manual dasa4 au1 value bucking - excidor ner... · 4 c dasa control systems ab d4au1o 1.8 en...

C Dasa Control Systems AB

Manualdasa4 AU1

Value buckingVersion: 1.8 en

1C Dasa Control Systems ABd4AU1O 1.8 en

11. dasa4 / Contents

Contents32.C.6 History ___________________________ 3:29

33 Machine variables ___________________ 3:3033.A Overview _______________________________ 3:30

33.B Description _____________________________ 3:31

33.C Proceed as follows ______________________ 3:3233.C.1 Single variables _____________________ 3:3233.C.2 Several variable values _______________ 3:3433.C.3 Print list of variables _________________ 3:3433.C.4 Help texts _________________________ 3:34

34 Set up diameter ____________________ 3:3534.A Overview ______________________________ 3:35

34.B Description ____________________________ 3:36

34.C Proceed as follows ______________________ 3:37

35 Test ______________________________ 3:3835.A Overwiev ______________________________ 3:38

35.B Description ____________________________ 3:3935.B.1 Input and output modules _____________ 3:3935.B.2 Key functions ______________________ 3:40

35.C Proceed as follows ______________________ 3:4135.C.1 Testing the outputs __________________ 3:4135.C.2 Testing the inputs ___________________ 3:4235.C.3 Testing the keys ____________________ 3:43

Appendix ___________________________________ 3:45

Variables for Dasa4 ___________________________ 3:45

41 Logging contract __________________ 4:341.A Summary ______________________________ 4:3

41.A.1 Create a logging contract _____________ 4:341.A.2 Change logging contract ______________ 4:341.A.3 Alter logging contract ________________ 4:341.A.4 Extensive change of bucking instruction __ 4:441.A.5 Limited change of bucking instruction ____ 4:441.A.6 Exit logging contract _________________ 4:441.A.7 Files of the Logging contract ___________ 4:5

41.B Description ____________________________ 4:641.B.1 Logging contract ____________________ 4:641.B.2 Limited change in bucking instructions,

Administration ______________________ 4:741.B.3 Limited change in bucking instructions,

Other variables _____________________ 4:841.B.4 Limited change in bucking instructions,

Color marking ______________________ 4:9

41.C Proceed as follows ______________________ 4:1041.C.1 New logging contract _________________ 4:1041.C.2 Modify logging contract _______________ 4:1341.C.3 Partly end an object _________________ 4:1441.C.4 Shift logging contract _________________ 4:1541.C.5 Limited change of bucking file __________ 4:1641.C.6 Exit a logging contract ________________ 4:20

42 Manual length _____________________ 4:2142.A Summary ______________________________ 4:21

42.A.1 Programming the keys _______________ 4:21

42.B Description ____________________________ 4:22


5. Results _____________________________ 5:1

51 Show trunk profiles ________________ 5:551.A Overview ______________________________ 5:5

51.A.1 Table mode ________________________ 5:551.A.2 Chart mode ________________________ 5:5

1. dasa4

1 dasa4 ____________________________ 1:3System overview ___________________________ 1:3Operating mode ___________________________ 1:3Settings _________________________________ 1:3

1.A Configuration of the manual ________________ 1:31.A.1 Settings ___________________________ 1:4

1.B Description ______________________________ 1:51.B.1 System description __________________ 1:51.B.2 dasa4, system configuration ___________ 1:61.B.3 D4AU1 Presentation and programming unit 1:71.B.4 D4CU Calculation and connection unit ___ 1:81.B.5 D4BU Connection unit ________________ 1:91.B.6 D4O8D Unit for 8 digital outputs ________ 1:101.B.7 D4O8A Unit for 8 analogue outputs ______ 1:111.B.8 D4I8 Unit for 8 inputs ________________ 1:12

2. Operating mode _____________________ 2:32.B Description ______________________________ 2:3

2.B.1 Logging in _________________________ 2:32.B.2 Predate, postdate ___________________ 2:42.B.3 Grade and cutting list ________________ 2:52.B.4 Indicators in operating mode ___________ 2:62.B.5 Monitoring during operation ____________ 2:72.B.6 Screen colors and screen brightness ____ 2:82.B.7 eseShell __________________________ 2:9

2.C Proceed as follows ______________________ 2:102.C.1 Log in ____________________________ 2:102.C.2 Predating, postdating ________________ 2:102.C.3 Log out ___________________________ 2:112.C.4 eseShell __________________________ 2:122.C.5 Value bucking ______________________ 2:132.C.6 Demand bucking ____________________ 2:142.C.7 Data calliper _______________________ 2:152.C.8 Cutting list _________________________ 2:162.C.9 Grade feed-in (manual) _______________ 2:172.C.10 State grade change as a distance from

the butt ___________________________ 2:172.C.11 State grade change during ongoing feed

or when stationary __________________ 2:18

31. Setting Key _______________________ 3:331.A Overview _______________________________ 3:3

31.A.1 Programming keys in several differentprograms _________________________ 3:3

31.B Description _____________________________ 3:4

31.C Proceed as follows _______________________ 3:5

32 Calibration _________________________ 3:632.A Overview _______________________________ 3:6

32.B Description ____________________________ 3:732.B.1 Length calibration ___________________ 3:732.B.2 Diameter calibration _________________ 3:832.B.3 Displacement of the basic curve ________ 3:932.B.4 Settings and historical background ______ 3:1032.B.5 Calibration by data calliper ____________ 3:1132.B.6 Calibrating status ___________________ 3:12

32.C Proceed as follows ______________________ 3:1332.C.1 Daily check, manual feed _____________ 3:1332.C.2 Daily checking by data calliper,

method STM - KTR __________________ 3:2032.C.3 Daily checking by data calliper,

method STI - KTR ___________________ 3:2332.C.4 Displacement of the basic curve for

diameter values _____________________ 3:2732.C.5 Checking diameter calibration using

diagram ___________________________ 3:28

2 C Dasa Control Systems AB d4AU1O 1.8 en

51.B Description ____________________________ 5:651.B.1 Open, show and print out trunk profiles ___ 5:651.B.2 Settings ___________________________ 5:7

51.C Proceed as follows ______________________ 5:851.C.1 Open, show and print out trunk profiles ___ 5:851.C.2 Set max. length, max. diameter and

auto mode _________________________ 5:9

52. Settings trunk profile _______________ 5:1052.A Overview ______________________________ 5:10

52.A.1 Identity ___________________________ 5:1052.A.2 Settings ___________________________ 5:10

52.B Description ____________________________ 5:11

52.C Proceed as follows ______________________ 5:1252.C.1 Give the file a name and consecutive

number ___________________________ 5:1252.C.2 Determine interval ___________________ 5:1252.C.3 Activate forced cut __________________ 5:1252.C.4 Activate trunk profiles ________________ 5:12

53 Production simple _________________ 5:1353.A Overview ______________________________ 5:13

53.A.1 Settings ___________________________ 5:1353.A.2 Show ____________________________ 5:13

53.B Description ____________________________ 5:14

53.C Proceed as follows ______________________ 5:1553.C.1 Choose prd-fil, operator and volume type _ 5:1553.C.2 Show and print production data _________ 5:1653.C.3 Create a sum file ____________________ 5:1653.C.4 Distribution level ____________________ 5:17

54 Production extensive _______________ 5:1854.A Overview ______________________________ 5:18

55 Control measuring _________________ 5:1955.A Overview ______________________________ 5:19

55.B Description ____________________________ 5:2055.B.1 Production control ___________________ 5:2055.B.2 Control trunk _______________________ 5:21

56 Operations follow-up ________________ 5:2256.A Overview _______________________________ 5:22

56.B Description _____________________________ 5:2356.B.1 Definitions of time ___________________ 5:2356.B.2 Predate, postdate ___________________ 5:2556.B.3 Select extent of the report _____________ 5:2656.B.4 Settings ___________________________ 5:2756.B.5 Open and save drf files _______________ 5:2856.B.6 Identity, time, production, statusline ______ 5:2956.B.7 Maintenance of database _____________ 5:3056.B.8 Example of printout __________________ 5:31

56.C Proceed as follows ______________________ 5:3256.C.1 Activate operations follow-up and show

report dialogue, set the stop times ______ 5:3256.C.2 Predating, postdating ________________ 5:3256.C.3 Operations follow-up report ____________ 5:3356.C.4 Save and open drf file ________________ 5:3556.C.5 Maintenance of database _____________ 5:35

6 System ___________________________ 6:1

61 Exit ______________________________ 6:5

62 Information _______________________ 6:662.A Overview ______________________________ 6:6

62.B Description ____________________________ 6:7


63 Operator __________________________ 6:963.A Overview ______________________________ 6:9

63.B Description ____________________________ 6:10

63.C Proceed as follows ______________________ 6:1163.C.1 Select operator and language __________ 6:1163.C.2 Add operator _______________________ 6:1263.C.3 Alter operator data __________________ 6:1363.C.4 Removing operator __________________ 6:14

64 eseShell __________________________ 6:1564.A Overview ______________________________ 6:15

64.A.1 eseBackup ________________________ 6:15

64.B Description ____________________________ 6:1664.B.1 eseShell __________________________ 6:1664.B.2 eseBackup, Safety backup ____________ 6:1764.B.3 eseBackup, Restoring ________________ 6:18

64.C Proceed as follows ______________________ 6:1964.C.1 eseShell __________________________ 6:1964.C.2 eseBackup, Safety backup ____________ 6:2064.C.3 eseBackup, Restoring ________________ 6:2164.C.4 eseBackup, Restoring optional file ______ 6:22

65 Kermit____________________________ 6:2365.A Summary _______________________________ 6:23

66 File manager ______________________ 6:2466.A Overview ______________________________ 6:24

66.B Description ____________________________ 6:2566.B.1 Move/copy/ delete felling files to/from

the felling computer __________________ 6:2566.B.2 Copy between units/folders of choice

Compressing files ___________________ 6:26

66.C Proceed as follows ______________________ 6:2766.C.1 Copy/move files from file directory to

external drive ______________________ 6:2766.C.2 Copy/move files from external drive to

the file directory ____________________ 6:3066.C.3 Delete files in Bucking System _________ 6:3166.C.4 Delete files in external drive ___________ 6:3166.C.5 Make a copy of a file to the same folder __ 6:3266.C.6 Rename files _______________________ 6:3366.C.7 Copy between units/folders of choice ____ 6:3366.C.8 Compressing files ___________________ 6:3466.C.9 Unzipping a zip file __________________ 6:34

67 Bucking instructions _______________ 6:3567.A Summary ______________________________ 6:35

68 E-mail ____________________________ 6:3668.A Overview ______________________________ 6:36

68.B Description ____________________________ 6:3768.B.1 Receive e-mail _____________________ 6:3768.B.2 Send e-mail ________________________ 6:3868.B.3 Address book ______________________ 6:3968.B.4 E-mail accounts and connections _______ 6:4068.B.5 Settings, production _________________ 6:41

68.C Proceed as follows ______________________ 6:4268.C.1 Retrieve e-mail _____________________ 6:4268.C.2 Send e-mail ________________________ 6:4368.C.3 Address book ______________________ 6:4568.C.4 Settings, send production results _______ 6:4668.C.5 Settings, E-mail accounts and Connections 6:48

1 1. dasa4 / Contents


11. dasa4

1 dasa4

34 Set up diameter35 Test

65 Kermit66 File manager67 Bucking instruction68 eseMail

3Machine31 Setting keys32 Calibration33 Machine variables

2Operating mode

4Bucking41 Logging contract42 Manual length

5 Results51 Show trunk profile52 Settings trunk profile53 Production simple

6System61 Exit62 Information63 Operator64 eseShell, Backup

1System overview11 Contents12 Index13 Presentation

1.A Configuration of the manual

SettingsChapters 3-6 have the following structure (chapter 3 isused below as an example):3 Machine4 Bucking5 Results6 SystemEach chapter has sub-headings, eg:31 Settings Keys32 Calibration33 Machine variables34 Set up diameter35 TestEach sub-heading is arranged similar to the followingexample:31.A Overview

Brief description of function of Settings Keys.31.B Description

Description of all sub-functions in the variousfunction windows.

31.C Proceed as followsStep by step description of how you work with thefunction Settings Keys.

System overview1 Contents and Index for the entire manual.

Presentation of the DASA system and layout ofthe manual.

Operating modeDescription of functions and indicators in theoperating mode.

54 Production extension55 Control measure56 Operation follow up


SECTION 3. MACHINE

SettingsKey

Calibration

Machinevariables

Bucking Result System

Machine

Set updiameter

Test

34. Set up diameterDefault setting of diameter sensor.

35. TestTest and trouble shooting of inputsand outputs and of the keypads.

31. Settings KeyCoupling between harvester headfunctions and function keys on thekeypads.

32. CalibrationCalibration of length and diametersensors with values from the calibrationdiagrams.

33. Machine variablesEntering of values of the variables,individually for each operator.

Show Settings MachineOperatingview

Buckinginstruction

Loggingcontract

Manuallength

41. Logging contractCreate, alter, change and exit loggingcontract.

42. Manual lengthProgramming the length selectionkeys.

Bucking

SECTION 4. BUCKING

51. Show trunk profileShow optional trunk profile as table ordiagram.

52. Settings trunk profileMake settings for and activate collectingof trunk profiles.

53. Production simpleA quick overview of production.

SECTION 5. RESULT

54. Production extensiveLink to program moduleProductionReport where theproduction result can be presented in avariety of different ways.

61. Exit Dasa4Exit the Dasa4 program. The computerreturns to Windows mode.

62. InformationInformation about current operator,bucking file, production file, trunkprofile and program versions.

63. OperatorAdd, choose or delete operator.

64. eseShell, BackupToggle between the bucking programand other Windows programs. Backup ofprogram and data files.

Exit Dasa4

Information

Operator

System

Kermit

File-manager

65. KermitLink to program module FileTransferwhich communicates with external unitswith the aid of Kermit.

66. FilemanagerCopy/move/delete files to/from Dasa4File system.

67. Bucking instructionLink to program moduleOptimizationBuilder where buckinginstructions can be created andmaintained.

68. E-MailE-mail program with facility for simpletransferring of data files.

SECTION 6. SYSTEM

1.A.1 Settings1.A.1 1. dasa4 A. Configuration of the manual 1. Settings

ShowTrunk profile

SettingsTrunk profile

Productionsimple

Productionextensive

Controlmeasure

55. Control measuringDo a control measuring on an optionalsection of a felling area.

eseShell

Result

E-Mail

56. Operations follow-upThe operations follow-up is an excellent aid indocumenting the various activities of each fellingobject.

Operationfollow up


Forest companySawmill

Customer order

Requirements

Resources

Harvesterdasa4

Simulations:• What shall I fell?• Which bucking instructions?• What results will I get?

Data from data calliper

1.B1. dasa4 B. Description

1.B Description

1.B.1 System descriptiondasa4 is a module configured, Windows-basedmeasuring and control system for harvesters, whichthrough its design is easy to install and use. dasa4 isalso an integrated part of the information systems that

sawmills and forest companies use to control andoptimise their production. Using the extensiveproduction follow-up part of the system, selected datacan be transmitted to PC-based production systems forfurther processing.

WinAPTProduction follow-upBucking instructions

Database:• Forest stand• Trunk profiles• Miscellaneous data

Timber stock


��

��

�

� �

�

�

�

��

� �

�

�

�

��

� �

�

�

�

��

��

��

�

��

�

��

�

�

��

��

�

��

Junction box D4BUConnects together the Controland calculation unit D4CU withthe Presentation unit D4AU1 andthe control levers of the machineand control pads.

A D4O8I/D4O8A – unit can beconnected direct to this unit.

External systems in the harvestercan also be connected here.

Control and calculationunit D4CUContains signal processor and thesoftware that controls the dasa4system. Can control a maximum of56 analogue/digital outputs andreceive signals from 16 inputs.

Unit for 8 digital outputsD4O8DEight short-circuit-proof outputs forthe various functions of theharvester.

3 A/Output.

Maximum 7 units/system (56outputs).

Unit for 8 analogueoutputs D4O8AEight short-circuit-proof outputs, 0 –3A/25 – 525 Hz for the variousfunctions of the harvester.

Maximum 7 units/system (56outputs).

Unit for 8 inputs D4I8Maximum 8 short-circuit-proofdigital inputs or enumerators.

Maximum 4 2-channel inputs frompulse sensors.

Maximum 4 potentiometers.

Maximum 2 units/system (16inputs).

Control lever unit D4KUAdapts signals from two controllevers/control keypads to thedata bus of the system.

Optional control levers/keypads

CAN busData transmission between thevarious units is performedaccording to the CAN standard.

1.B.2 dasa4, system configuration

External control/monitoringsystemsOther control or monitoring systems inthe harvester can be connected todasa4 for simple exchange ofinformation and coordination of theharvester functions.

1.B.2 1. dasa4 B. Description 2. dasa4, system configuration


1.B.3 D4AU1 Presentation and programming unit

The unit consists of a screen unit and a keyboardwith wireless data transmission.

Screen unit• Windows operative system.• Pentium processor.• >1 Gb hard disk.• 10.4" color screen VGA TFT with pointer function.• Diskette drive and four PC card connections.• 2 series ports, 1 parallel port and 1 Can bus

connection with three parallel CAN buses.

Keyboard• Wireless transmission of data between keyboard

and screen unit.• Batteries are charged when the keyboard is in the

holder on the screen unit.• The keyboard also works as protection for the

screen when the units are not being used.

Disc drive

Connection ofkeyboard PS2

Connection ofcomputer mousePS2

Series port COM125 pole d-sub(eg, for datacalliper)

Parallel port LPT 125 pole d-sub(eg, for printer)

Series port COM29 pole d-sub(eg, for modem)

Connection of3 CAN buses15 pole d-sub

Connection of fourPC cards

NOTE

Only 3 PC-cardconnections canbe used at thesame time.

1.B.31. dasa4 B. Description 3. D4AU1 Presentation and programming unit


1.B.4 D4CU Calculation and connection unit

This unit contains the signal processor and thesoftware that controls the harvester head. Theprocessor also performs the many mathematicalcalculations that constantly need to be done, eg, tocalculate the most favourable bucking at everymoment.The unit can control a maximum of 56 analogue ordigital outputs for functions of the harvester andreceive signals from 16 inputs. Furthermore, the unit

communicates with the Presentation andprogramming unit D4AU1 and also with control padsand control levers on the harvester (via Junction boxD4BU and Control lever unit D4KU).

��

��

�

��

�

��

�

�

To Connection unit D4BU(Connector on end piece)

Transmission of data between D4BUand D4CU via CAN bus.

Data transmission to inputand output unitsConnection options:

• Up to six output units of type D4O8I,each with 8 digital outputs via CANbus.

• Up to six output units of type D4O8A,each with 8 analogue outputs via CANbus.

• Up to two input units of type D4I8,each with 8 digital inputs via CAN bus.

1.B.4 1. dasa4 B. Description 4. D4CU Calculation and connection unit

A Out: OK

Lights: Error

B Lights/flashes:data communication OK

C Flashes: CU-unit active

D Lights: Voltage feed to safetyswitch OK

E Lights: Voltage feed to systemOK


��

��

�

1.B.51. dasa4 B. Description 5. D4BU Connection unit

1.B.5 D4BU Connection unitThis item is used as the connection unit between thefollowing units:• Control and connection unit D4CU• Presentation and programming unit AU1• Control pads via Control lever unit D4KU• External control and monitoring systemsPower supply to the system is also connected here.

To Presentation andprogramming unit AU1Transmission of data between D4BUand AU1 via CAN bus.

To Calculation andconnection unit D4CUTransmission of data between D4BUand D4CU via CAN bus.

Power supply and seatswitch

To Control lever unitD4KU – CAN bus 0Transmission of data betweenD4BU and D4CU via CAN bus.

Extra connections –CAN bus 0A D4O8I/D4O8A output unit canbe connected here.

There is also a possibility hereto connect external monitoring/control systems direct to CANbus 0.

Extra connections –CAN bus 1 and 2External monitoring/controlsystems can be connected herevia separate CAN busconnections.

Indicating power supply

output voltage via seat switch to D4CU

output voltage via seat switch to D4CU

output voltage to CAN buses 1 and 2, D4CU and AU1output voltage via seat switch to CAN buses 3, 4

output voltage via seat switch to CAN buses 5, 6

input voltage from power supply

input voltage from seat switch

input voltage from AU1 + pre-heating

input voltage constant voltage

Error indication

Lights: short circuit




Lights: overvoltage (>32 V) or

under-voltage (<8 V).


� �

�

�

�

��

1.B.6 D4O8D Unit for 8 digital outputs

Eight digital outputsShort-circuit-proof3 A output current

To Calculation andconnection unit D4CUTransmission of data betweenD4O8I and D4CU via CAN bus.

This unit is used as control unit for the variousfunctions of the harvester head. The outputs aredigital, ie, they switch between 0 and 1, off and on.Each output is short-circuit protected and can produce3 A output current.The unit is controlled from the Calculation andconnection unit D4CU via a CAN bus connection.

1.B.6 1. dasa4 B. Description 6. D4O8I Unit for 8 digital outputs

A Out OK

Lights: Short circuit/interruption of output or errorin CAN-bus.

B Lights: CAN-bus OK.

Out: No communication on CAN-bus.

C Slow flashing: CAN bus configured/active.

Fast flashing: CAN bus not configured/active.

Out: Unit faulty or supply voltage missing.


� �

�

�

�

��

1.B.7 D4O8A Unit for 8 analogue outputs

Eight analogue outputsShort-circuit-proof0 - 3 A output current25 - 525 Hz

To Calculation andconnection unit D4CUTransmission of data betweenD4O8A and D4CU via CAN bus.

This unit is used as control unit for the variousfunctions of the harvester head. The outputs areanalogous, ie, they can produce a continuallyincreasing output signal or a continually increasingfrequency.Each output is controlled by its own microprocessor,is short-circuit protected and can produce 0 – 3 A

output current. If the output is used for frequencycontrol the frequency range will be 25 - 525 Hz.The unit is adapted to enable control of Danfossvalves.The unit is controlled from the calculation andconnection unit D4CU via a CAN bus connection.

1.B.71. dasa4 B. Description 7. D4O8A Unit for 8 analogue outputs

A Out OK

Lights: Short circuit/interruption of output or errorin CAN-bus.







� �

�

�

�

��

1.B.8 D4I8 Unit for 8 inputsThis unit is used to sense various functions of theharvester head, eg, diameter and length sensors.The unit can receive various types of input signals.Each unit can receive the following:• Maximum 8 digital input signals, ie, input that gives

the signal 1 or 0 (on or off).• Maximum 8 enumerators, ie, the input counts the

number of pulses received.

Eight inputsShort-circuit-proof.

Maximum 8 digital inputs.

Maximum 4 analogue inputs.

Maximum 8 enumerators.

Maximum four 2-channel inputs frompulse sensors.

To Calculation andconnection unit D4CUTransmission of data betweenD4I8 and D4CU via CAN bus.

• Maximum four 2-channel inputs from pulse sensor,ie, two channels are used to sense pulse inputs ofthe diameter meter.Thanks to the input having two channels it cansense direction of the pulse, ie, whether the pulsesare to be counted up or down.

• Maximum 4 analogue inputs, eg, frompotentiometers.

The unit is controlled from the Calculation andconnection unit D4CU via a CAN bus connection.

1.B.8 1. dasa4 B. Description 8. D4I8 Unit for 8 inputs

A Out: OK

Lights: Short circuit of supply voltage to sensoror error in CAN-bus.







22. Operating mode / Contents

Contents

2. Operating mode _________________ 32.B Description ____________________________ 3

2.B.1 Logging in ________________________ 32.B.2 Predate, postdate __________________ 42.B.3 Grade and cutting list _______________ 52.B.4 Indicators in operating mode _________ 62.B.5 Monitoring during operation __________ 72.B.6 Screen colors and screen brightness ___ 82.B.7 eseShell _________________________ 9

2.C Proceed as follows ____________________ 102.C.1 Log in ___________________________ 102.C.2 Predating, postdating _______________ 102.C.3 Log out __________________________ 112.C.4 eseShell _________________________ 122.C.5 Value bucking _____________________ 132.C.6 Demand bucking ___________________ 142.C.7 Data calliper ______________________ 152.C.8 Cutting list ________________________ 162.C.9 Grade feed-in (manual) ______________ 172.C.10 State grade change as a distance from

the butt __________________________ 172.C.11 State grade change during ongoing

feed or when stationary _____________ 18

2. Operating mode


2 2. Operating mode / Index

IndexBBucking

Demand bucking 14

CCutting list 16

DData calliper 15Demand bucking 14

EeseShell 12

GGrade feed-in 17

LLog in 10Log out 11Logging in 3

MMonitoring during operation 7

OOperating mode 3

Description 3

Ppostdate 4postdating 10

SScreen colours and screen brightness 8

VValue bucking 13


Operator

Password

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

0 <=

Ok

Cancel

2. Operating mode2.B Description

2.B.1 Logging in

Select operatorClick on arrow to the right and select one of theoperators.

NOTEWhen no operator is selected you can onlychoose an operator by entering theoperator’s password.

Type the password.Type the correct password.

Delete wrong character

2. Operating mode 2


Operator: David

Logging contract:: Obj_15

Bucking file: Aptfil1.apt

Bucking date: 2001-11-21

Predate

Ok

2002-05-02 16:30:11

Unaccounted interruption time: 20:22

Repair

Waiting repair

Maintenance

Repair, harvester head

Maintenance, harvester head

Interruption

Not working

Moving (outside obj.)

G15B Moving

00:00

00:00

00:00

00:00

00:00

00:00

00:00

00:00

00:00 Ok

State time and cause of interruption

Operator: David

Logging contract: Obj_15



Postdate

Ok

Log out

State new stop time

+ +

- -

Ok

Cancel

13:37State new start time

+ +

- -

Ok

Cancel

10:15

2.B.2 Predate, postdate

When an operator begins his shift he has the option ofpredating the start of the shift. Predating may be made asfar back as the end of the preceding shift, however notmore than to 00:00 hours.

State a new starttime using the +and minus keys.

State one or more reasonsfor predating or postdating.

State a new stoptime using the +and minus keys.

When an operator ends his shift he has the option ofpostdating the end of the shift. The limit for predating is to24:00 hours:

2.B.2 2. Operating mode B. Description 2. Predate, postdate


312 241Length 312 (0) PINE 238

Pm1 Qu2

Show

Qu2 -> 13 Qu1 -> 311 Qu2 ->

Measured lengthZero set on cutting

Symbols showing status of the harvester headExplanations for the symbols are found in section “Indicators inoperating mode”

Diameter (under bark)Estimated for cutting position

Tree species

Diameter (under bark)Estimated at diameter sensor(eg, limbing knives)

Quality sequence

Present grade

13 311 2000

Qu2 -> 13 Qu1 -> 311 Qu2 ->

Graphical presentation

Character string

The grades can be presented in two differentways. Click on the grade box to shift betweenthe two ways.

Starting grade Grade limits Present grade

Grade limit

Selected length

Selected pricematrix

Active keyfunctions

Active analog keys

Nr: 1 Value 43Nr: 3 Value 8

Active Keys

Keys Settings

Length Diam. ob. Diam. ub. Grade Pm Volume Force cut

522 286 276 4 KL4 3111 0

Print out thecutting list

SettingsClick here to go to allsettings of the harvesterhead that are describedunder the tabs 3, 4, 5 and 6.

Cutting list

Click on the “Cutting list” box to display the list when in operating mode.

Monitoring the key functionsThis function is explained in section2.B.5.

Length Log length.

Diam.ob Top diameter overbark.

Diam.ub. Top diameter underbark.

Grade Indicates which of thegrades has beenselected.

Pm Indicates which matrixthe computer haschosen from thosepermitted in theselected grade.

Volume Volume of the log in 1/10ths dm3. Forexample: Volume =5180 means that thevolume is 518.0 dm3, ie,0.518 m3.

Force cut 0 indicates automaticfelling. If the automaticfelling is interrupted forany reason the operatorcan manually selectcutting code for thecause of the forcedcutting.

The operator can chooseone of the following cuttingcodes:

Force cut Cause

1 Rot

2 Damage

3 Sharp bend

4 Long bend

5 Timber grade

6 Pulpwood

7 Broken top

9 Miscellaneous

2.B.32. Operating mode B. Description 3. Grade and cutting list

2.B.3 Grade and cutting list

Transfertrunk data todata calliperSee explanationin section 2.C.7.

ColorsChoice of color forBackground, Text,Button text andIcons. Screenbrightness can alsobe adjusted. Seesection 2.B.6.

Save trunkdata in STI-fileSee explanationin section 2.C.7.

Cutting list

Print

Settings Color

Monitor

Transfer

to Calliper

Save STIOperationfollow-up

Save STMeseShell

Save thelatestprocessedtrunk profileSee explanation insection 51 and52.

Logg contr 1 123 Operator

Current logging contract Trunc counter, see

section 62.BCurrent operator

Changing between metric/imperial display of valuesPress Ctrl+U or F3 to change betweenmetric (eg, 312) and imperial (eg, 3’03"0)values. This applies to all length values inoperating mode and also the cutting list.


A

end

CU + -

CUAU

Supply from central unit tovalves brokenThis voltage supply is broken as a safetymeasure on turning the operators seat.Never operate the harvester head if thissymbol is not displayed on the screen.

312 241Length 312 (0) PINE 238

Pm1 Qu2

Show

Qu2 -> 13 Qu1 -> 311 Qu2 ->

No contact with the centralunitData communication between thescreen unit and the central unit is notworking. The cause could be a faultycable or fault in the drive circuits of therespective unit.

Saw is in the cutting zoneThe cutting zone (as a rule a fewcentimetres greater than nominal loglength) is the part of the trunk wherecutting is permitted.

Harvester head jammedThe harvester head has failed to feedthe trunk forward. If the automaticjamming function is switched on, thesymbol will be displayed when all threeattempts have failed.

Incorrect manual selectionThe length that you have selected withone of the length keys is not included inthe current price matrix.

Incorrect diameter displayThe diameter display at fully openlimbing knives shows incorrect values.Ensure that the knife opening is notobstructed and that the cable from thediameter sensor is intact.

Diameter too smallThe diameter value is smaller than thesmallest permitted diameter value in thecurrent price matrix. The trunk can nowonly be fed manually.

Trunk fully processedProcessing of a trunk is completed andthe harvester head is ready for the nexttrunk.

2.B.4 Indicators in operating mode

Color markingColor marking with the color shown is active.

Automatic cuttingPressing the SAW button is notnecessary.

Cut wait

Manual cuttingPress the SAW button to cut.

Stump treatment activeEquipment on the harvester head for stumptreatment is active, eg, treatment with urea orthe fungus Phlebiopsis gigantea.

Harvester head tilted up

2.B.4 2. Operating mode B. Description 4. Indicators in operating mode

Broken topBroken top will be indicated if thediameter value suddenly falls to thevalue for “grapple fully closed” whilefeeding in.

The functions may vary depending on the type of harvester head. Thefollowing description contains only a few examples of standard functions.


Output

Input

CAN-input

Keys

Select

Set size

Close

Settings

Height+ Height-

Width+ Width-

Adjusting size of thewindowHere you can easily adjust the size ofthe monitoring window. Click thebuttons to increase or reduce the size.

2.B.5 Monitoring during operation

9 0 010 0 011 0 012 0 013 0 014 0 015 128 016 0 018 0 019 0 020 0 021 0 022 0 023 0 024 0 025 0 026 0 027 0 028 0 0

No Name Status Err

Output Settings

1 0 02 4037 03 0 04 0 05 0 0

No Name Status Error

Input Settings

10 0 011 0 013 0 014 0 01 0 03 0 0

No Name Status Error

Selected Settings

OutputsHere you choose which outputs are tobe monitored.

Click in the boxes to select outputs.

Selected Inputs/OutputsHere you see which outputs and inputsyou have selected to be monitored. Yousee also what status and what faults theinputs and outputs have.

KeysIndication of the keys currentlybeing used.

Digital keys being currently used.

Functions of active digitaland analogue keys inclear text.

Analogue keys currentlybeing used. The valueshows output signal fromthe key in relation tomaximum deflection.Maximum deflection has thevalue 255.

Show

Settings

2.B.52. Operating mode B. Description 5. Monitoring during operation

Active keyfunctions

Active analog keys

Nr: 1 Value 43Nr: 3 Value 8

Active Keys

Keys Settings

Set size

Inputs/CAN-inputsHere you choose which inputs from theharvester head/inputs from other unitvia CAN-bus that are to be monitored.

Click in the boxes to select inputs.

Close the monitoring function

Cutting list

Print

Settings Color

Monitor

Transfer

to Calliper


Save STMeseShell


Background Text

Buttontext Icons

Light intensity

Auto Manual

Select scheme:

Newscheme

Deletescheme

Close

Scheme 1

312 241

Manual control of screen brightnessClick in the Manual box and click on + or – to alter thebrightness.

Automatic control of screenbrightnessClick on Auto. The computer is provided with alight sensor and the screen brightness is nowautomatically controlled depending on ambientlighting.

Select colorsClick on Background, Text, Button text orIcons. Select one of the colors in the boxes.

New color schemeUsing this function each operator can programhis own color scheme and screen brightness.

Click on New scheme. Type the name of the newscheme and click Enter. Then select the colorsand brightness setting that you want. Click onClose.

Select color schemeClick on arrow to the right and then click on the colorscheme that you want.

Delete color schemeSelect the color scheme that you wish to delete (seeabove). Click on Delete scheme.

2.B.6 Screen colors and screen brightness

Note that this setting applies to colorsand brightness in the operating modeonly, not in the Setting mode.

Show

2.B.6 2. Operating mode B. Description 6. Screen colors and screen brightness

Length 312 (0) PINE 238

Pm1 Qu2

Show

Qu2 -> 13 Qu1 -> 311 Qu2 ->

Cutting list

Print

Settings Color

Monitor

Transfer

to Calliper


Save STMeseShell


2.B.7 eseShellEseShell is a function making it possible to toggleto Windows-mode or to other Windows programs(eg, Internet Explorer).

2.B.7

Esemain Program1Windows

Windows

Program 1

Program 2

Program 3

Esemain Program1

Open programClick the box to see whichprograms you can open.

Return to previouslyopened programProgram that you opened earliercan be returned to by clickingdirect on the box for the relevantprogram.

The programs thatcan be opened.

Show

2. Operating mode B. Description 7. eseShell

Cutting list

Print

Settings Color

Monitor

Transfer

to Calliper


Save STMeseShell

Start WindowsClick on the box to start Windows.Please note that dasa4 is stillactive although Windows hasstarted.

WarningThe bucking program and harvester-headcontrol are still active even if you haveswitched to another program whereby dasa4is not visible on the screen.


2.C.1 Log in

1 Click on arrow to the right and select one ofthe operators.

2 Type your password and Click on OK.When no operator is selected you canchoose operator just by entering theoperator’s password.

2.C.2 Predating, postdating3 Predating: If operations follow-up is active

the operator is able to predate start of theshift when logging in.

4 Postdating: Before logging out the operatorhas the option of postdating the end of theshift. In the Operating mode: Click onShow and Operation follow up.

5 Click on Predate and Postdaterespectively.

6 Use the + and - keys to give a new time.Click on OK.

2.C Proceed as follows

Predating

When an operator begins his shift he has theoption of predating the start of the shift. Predatingmay be made as far back as the end of thepreceding shift, however not more than to 00:00hours.

One or more reasons must be stated whenpredating.

Postdating

When an operator ends his shift he has the optionof postdating the end of the shift. The limit forpostdating is to 24:00 hours.

One or more reasons must be stated whenpostdating.

FACTS

Operator: David




Predate

Ok

State new start time

+ +

- -

Ok

Cancel

10:15

Operator: David



Date: 2001-11-21

Postdate

Ok

Log out

5

6

2.C 2. Operating mode C. Proceed as follows

Operator

Password

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

0 <=

Ok

Exit

1

2


1 You can choose one or more reasons forpredating/postdating:

2 Click on one of the reasons in the table.

3 If you choose a single reason, click OK.

4 If you choose several reasons: Use the +and – keys to determine the length of theselected interruption. Click on OK.

5 Continue by choosing a new reason andtime for the interruption in the same way asthe above until the entire time is defined.

2.C.3 Log out6 In the Operating mode: Click on Show

and Operation follow up.

7 Click on Log out.

8 When changing the operator, click on Login new operator. The new operator logs inin the normal way with the aid of hispassword.

9 To turn off dasa4 click on Exit the system.The computer returns to Windows mode.

10 If you change your mind, and do not wishto log out, click on Cancel.

2002-05-02 16:30:11

Unaccounted interruption time: 20:2200:00

00:00

00:00

00:00

00:00

00:00

00:00

00:00

00:00Ok


State duration of interruption

+ +

- -

Ok

Cancel

00:25

Cause of interruption:Maintenance

43

2

2.C.32. Operating mode C. Proceed as follows 3. Log out

Repair

Waiting repair

Maintenance



Interruption

Not working


G15B Moving

7

8

910

Operator: David



Date: 2001-11-21

Postdate

Ok

Log out

CancelExit the system

Log in new operator


2.C.4 2. Operating mode C. Proceed as follows 4. eseShell

Esemain

2.C.4 eseShell1 In the Operating mode: Click on Show

and eseShell.

2 To see which other programs that can beopened: Click on the box containing thearrow.

3 Then click on the program symbol to startthe program.

NoteThe bucking program and harvester-head control are still active even if youhave switched to another programwhereby dasa4 is not visible on thescreen.

4 To start Windows: Click on the boxcontaining the Windows symbol.

5 To toggle to an opened program: Clickdirect on the box for the relevant program.

2 54

3

Program1Windows

Windows

Program 1

Program 2

Program 3

Esemain Program1


2.C.5 Value buckingValue bucking is selected when you define thelogging object in program module 41 Loggingobject.

1 Value bucking implies that several program-med price matrices can be compared withone another to enable the computer tochoose the assortment range and the lengththat give the most favourable yield value.When choosing log length the computeralso takes into consideration the value ofthe next log.

2 As a basis for evaluation the computermakes a prognosis of trunk taper with theaid of two diameter values taken at the buttof the trunk. The prognosis is continuallyupdated in relation to diameter valuesmeasured during the forward feed. Theprognosis will be repeated if thesubsequently measured diameter valuedeviates from the initial prognosis.

3 An adaptive prognosis model is used toachieve sufficiently high accuracy in theprognoses, ie, the computer creates standardprognosis trunks for a number of diameterclasses. These prognosis trunks are formedby taking the mean value of the mostrecently bucked trunks. Close conformity isobtained between prognoses and measureddiameter by always using prognosis trunksfrom the ongoing felling operation. Thestandard profiles are continually updated(new prognosis trunks continually replaceexisting ones in the different diameterclasses) and therefore compensation isquickly made even for local variations inthe profile of a trunk.

4 An important item in felling when usingvalue bucking is assessment of where thelimit lies for different grades. Since thesystem is based on real price lists forvarious grades the success of value buckingis directly dependent on correct assessment.

122 142 162 182 202 222 242 262 282 302 322310 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600340 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600370 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600400 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600430 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600460 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600490 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600520 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600550 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600

122 142 162 182 202 222 242 262 282 302 322310 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600340 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600370 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600400 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600430 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600460 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600490 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600520 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600550 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600

122 142 162 182 202 222 242 262 282 302 322310 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600340 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600370 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600400 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600430 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600460 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600490 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600520 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600550 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600

122 142 162 182 202 222 242 262 282 302 322310 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600340 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600370 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600400 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600430 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600460 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600490 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600520 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600550 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600

1

2Prognosis

3

Standard prognosis trunks(mean value)

Most recently buckedtrunks

Grade 1 Grade 2?4

2.C. 52. Operating mode C. Proceed as follows 5. Value bucking


2.C.6 Demand buckingDemand bucking is selected when you definethe logging object in program module 41Logging object.Demand bucking works together with profit-based bucking and is an instrument for selectingjust those lengths and diameters that are indemand.

1 The choice is made when programming amatrix in program moduleOptimizationBuilder, ie, by programmingthe demand matrix for the demand desiredin relation to various lengths in a diameterclass or in an entire price matrix. Youchoose OptimizationBuilder in Settings/System/BuckingInstruction.

2 By programming the limit matrix it is alsopossible to set limits for the maximumnumber of logs in each log class.

The principle of demand bucking is as follows:• The computer makes a normal profit-based

bucking assessment for each log. A pricematrix and a length is then selected that hasthe highest price according to the price list.In addition to this length, as a rule, there area few optional lengths that lie within themaximum permitted price deviation for thedemand bucking. (You have yourselfprogrammed how much the maximum pricedeviation may be.)

• The computer now checks among thepermitted lengths whether there are any thathave been selected for the demand bucking.If there are several selected lengths thecomputer will choose the length where thedifference between desired number and thenumber processed so far is greatest.

• If none of the permitted lengths are selectedin the demand bucking assessment a normalprofit-based bucking will be made, ie, thelength that has the highest value will beselected.

1

2

2.C.6 2. Operating mode C. Proceed as follows 6. Demand bucking

L/D 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320310 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600340 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600370 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600400 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600430 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600460 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600490 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600520 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600550 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600

Diameter

cm mm

Lower Upper

cm cm

Max root diameter

mm cm

Min top diameter

mm

Max valuesLength Over length

Price Color Demand Limit Pole Other settings

Cutting window


C:\Program\dasa\AWinApt32\....... L/D 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320

310 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0340 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0370 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0400 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0430 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0460 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0490 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0520 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0550 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Type of limitation per price matrix

No limitation

Action when production goal is reach

No action


2.C.7 Data calliperThe computer can handle two differentstandardised methods for transmission andprocessing of data between computer and datacalliper: STM - KTR and STI - KTR.The choice of method is made in programmodule Calibration, Settings, see section32.B.3.

STM - KTRThe method works, in brief, as follows:

1 Connect the data calliper and cable to thebucking computer.

2 Fell the trunks that you wish to use forcalibration. After each trunk: Send thecutting list to the data calliper by clickingthe box Transfer to calliper.

3 Calliper and measure lengths of the felledtrees.

4 The values that are read on are compared,processed and saved in the data calliper. Oncertain data callipers you can readtendencies in the deviations and thus receiveearly indication of any sudden deviation.

5 Repeat the above every day for about 1 – 2weeks and then transfer the accumulatedmean deviations to the bucking computer;where calibration is made automatically.

Show

2

Series port25 pole d-sub(eg, for datacalliper)

1

2. Operating mode C. Proceed as follows 7. Data calliper 2.C.7

Cutting list

Print

Settings Color

Monitor

Transfer

to Calliper


Save STMeseShell


STI - KTRThe method works, in brief, as follows:

1 Fell the trunks that you wish to use forcalibration. After each trunk: Click the boxSave STI to save calibration data in thebucking computer.

2 When you have saved 3 - 5 trunks, connectthe data calliper to the bucking computer.

3 Send data to the data calliper by clicking onTransfer to calliper.

4 Calliper and measure lengths of the felledtrees.

5 Connect the data calliper to the buckingcomputer and transfer the measuring resultsto the bucking computer.

6 The computer now compares the machine-measured and control-measured values andthen performs an automatic calibration.

2.C.8 Cutting list

7 When a trunk has been completely proces-sed (and before starting on the next trunk)you can get a list of the various logs fromthe trunk by clicking on Cutting list.

8 The list contains, length, top diameter onand under bark grade, price matrix volumein dm3 and any forced cut.

9 Click on Printout if you wish to print out alist from the printer.

2.C.8 2. Operating mode C. Proceed as follows 8. Cutting list


LengthDiam. ob. Diam. ub. Grade Pm Volume Force cut

522 286 276 4 KL4 3111 0

8

Show

3

2

7

9

1

Cutting list

Print

Settings Color

Monitor

Transfer

to Calliper


Save STMeseShell


2.C.9 Grade feed-in (manual)

Qu 1 Qu 2

6,7 metre

1

2.C.92. Operating mode C. Proceed as follows 9. Grade feed-in (manual)

The following description contains only afew examples of use. Use may varydepending on the type of harvester head.

For further information about grades seeappendix OptimizationBuilder.Before or during feed-in/bucking the operatorhas the possibility of notifying the computerwhere grade limits are located.• As a distance in metres and decimetres.• The choice is made using the length

selection buttons, before or after the tree isfelled. With the harvester head tilted downthe Shift key must be kept pressed in whilepressing the length selection buttons.

• By one push of a grade button as theknives pass the grade limit.

• By one push of a grade button and theShift button the grade is changed down forthe point of cutting.

2.C.10 State grade change asa distance from the butt


1 Example of entering grade change beforestarting:

At the same time, press the Shift and Rampkeys, or Shift and Module+ in programversions that lack the ramp function, to put thecomputer in the infeed mode for grade change.Then press the grade key for Gr 1 followed bykey 6 and 7 to give 670. Then press the gradekey for Gr 2.By pressing the Shift key in combination withthe species selection key you can save a grade-change sequence that is automatically done asyou take up with the species selection key.Then press the Start key to begin bucking. Amaximum of three grades can be given in thesequence.


2.C.11 State grade changeduring ongoing feed or whenstationary


The reference for grade change is at the limbingknives, regardless of whether feed is running ornot.

1 To change grade from limbing knives to toppart on the trunk.

2 Press the grade key as the grade limit passesthe limbing knives.

3 Here are the following exceptions from therule regarding reference at the limbingknives:

4 If new grade is stated when the harvesterhead has zero in measured length, eg, thereference for grade-change will be at thecutting position during or directly aftercutting.

5 Press the grade key.

6 To change grade for the entire trunk, ie,also the already measured part.

7 Press and hold the Shift key and press thegrade key. The function will only workwhile feed is switched off.

New grade

New grade

New grade

1

2

3

2.C.11 2. Operating mode C. Proceed as follows 11. State grade change during ongoing feed or when stationary


31. KeysCoupling between harvester headfunctions and keys on the keypads.

32. CalibrationCalibration of length and diametersensors manually or with data calliper.

33. VariablesEntering the variable values,individually for each operator.

33. Machine / Contents

3. Machine

Machine Bucking Result System

34. Set up diameterBasic setting of diameter sensorwhen the harvester head is new orin conjunction with any majoralteration of the measuring system.

35. TestTesting and trouble-shooting oninputs and outputs and on keypads.

Contents33 Machine variables _______________ 30

33.A Overview _____________________________ 30

33.B Description ___________________________ 31

33.C Proceed as follows ____________________ 3233.C.1 Single variables ____________________ 3233.C.2 Several variable values ______________ 3433.C.3 Print list of variables ________________ 3433.C.4 Help texts ________________________ 34

34 Set up diameter ________________ 3534.A Overview _____________________________ 35

34.B Description ___________________________ 36

34.C Proceed as follows ____________________ 37

35 Test __________________________ 3835.A Overwiev _____________________________ 38

35.B Description ___________________________ 3935.B.1 Input and output modules ____________ 3935.B.2 Key functions ______________________ 40

35.C Proceed as follows ____________________ 4135.C.1 Testing the outputs _________________ 4135.C.2 Testing the inputs __________________ 4235.C.3 Testing the keys ___________________ 43

Appendix _________________________________ 45

Variables for Dasa4 _________________________ 45

Settings Key

Calibration

Machinevariables

Machine

Set updiameter

Test

31. Setting Key ____________________ 331.A Overview _____________________________ 3

31.A.1 Programming keys in several differentprograms _________________________ 3

31.B Description ___________________________ 4

31.C Proceed as follows _____________________ 5

32 Calibration _____________________ 632.A Overview _____________________________ 6

32.B Description ___________________________ 732.B.1 Length calibration __________________ 732.B.2 Diameter calibration ________________ 832.B.3 Displacement of the basic curve ______ 932.B.4 Settings and historical background_____ 1032.B.5 Calibration by data calliper ___________ 1132.B.6 Calibrating status __________________ 12

32.C Proceed as follows ____________________ 1332.C.1 Daily check, manual feed ____________ 1332.C.2 Daily checking by data calliper,

method STM - KTR _________________ 2032.C.3 Daily checking by data calliper,

method STI - KTR __________________ 2332.C.4 Displacement of the basic curve for

diameter values ____________________ 2732.C.5 Checking diameter calibration using

diagram __________________________ 2832.C.6 History ___________________________ 29


Index

3. Machine / Index3

CCalibrating status 11Calibration 6

Daily check, manual infeed 12Description 7Overview 6Proceed as follows 12Settings and historical background 9

Calibration by data calliper 10Checking diameter calibration using diagram 29

DDaily checking by data calliper, method STI - KTR 25Daily checking by data calliper, method STM - KAU 19Daily checking by data calliper, method STM - KTR 22DCL 3, 31Diameter calibration 8

IInput and output modules 40

KKey functions 41

LLength calibration 7

MMachine variables 31

Description 32Help texts 35Overview 31Print list of variables 35Proceed as follows 33Several variable values 35Single variables 33

PPrint list of variables 35Programming keys in several different programs 3

SSet up diameter 36

Description 37Overview 36Proceed as follows 38

Setting Key 3Description 4Overview 3Proceed as follows 5

Several variable values 35Single variables 33

TTest 39

Description 40Overwiev 39Proceed as follows 42

Testing the inputs 43Testing the keys 44Testing the outputs 42


31. Setting Key31.A OverviewIn this program mode coupling between functions andkeys are made, ie, the operator can decide here whichkeys are to activate various functions of the harvesterhead.Each operator can open an own key file, which meansthat each operator can program the functions of thekeys to suit individual preferences.Key files are opened and selected in program module63 Operator. The files are given the suffix .tgt.

31.A.1 Programming keys in severaldifferent programsProgramming of functions and keys is made in threedifferent programs/program modules.

Settings KeyProgram module described in this chapter and wherecoupling between functions and keys are made.

DCLIn program DCL, which is a separate program notincluded in the bucking computer, the programmingof functions that control the harvester head ismade. The functions can for example be “Feedforward”, “Feed reverse” or “Saw”. Exactly whichvalves and other control systems are to be energisedwhen the function is activated are defined in programDCL.The coupling between function and key on thekeypads can also be programmed here. However, suchprogramming is normally made in the eseKeyprogram module Keys.

Setting manual selectionProgramming is made in the program module Settingmanual selection (see section 43) of which pricematrix and which length in the price matrix is tobe selected when the respective key is pressed.

Settings key

Define how the functionkeys are to control

functions of theharvester head

DCL

Setting manuallength

Separate program forprogramming functionson the harvester head

31. Machine / Setting Key 31


Settings Key

Calibration

Machinevariables

Machine

Set updiameter

Test

Select price matrix andlength for lengthselection keys


Key function

PineKey

Spruce Key

Hardwood Key

Arrow-up Key

Arrow-down Key

LK Pulse open Key

Feed forward Key

Feed rewers Key

Tilt down Key

Tilt up Key

Saw Key

Key Shift keySave and

exit

31.B Description

Key functionsThese functions, defined in theDCL program, can be linked toan optional key on the keypads.

Key numberIt is defined here which to which key the function isto be linked. The keys are numbered and it is thisnumber that is typed in.

Location of the keys varies with different makes. Anoverview figure is therefore necessary showing thecurrent key numbering to enable programming ofthe keys.

Shift keyIf the key function is to be activated only while anotheroptional key (“shift key”) is pressed it is to be markedhere.

A shift key can also be freely selected among keys ofthe keypad.

Save and exit key fileFor programming of the keys to beactivated the key file must be saved byclicking this box.

Exit without savingYou exit the program module herewithout saving any changes.

NOTEThe functions vary both with regard to contentand number depending on which harvester headis used. The names of functions in the illustra-tion are examples only to illustrate the principlewhen programming the keys.

31. Machine / Setting Key B. Description31.B

Exit

EditAlter key programmingClick here to change programming ofthe keys.


-Key 1Key 2Key 3Key 4Key 5Key 6Key 7Key 8Key 9Key 10Key 11Key 12Key 13Key 14

Double klick

Ok

Cancel

Left keys: Right keys:-Key 1Key 2Key 3Key 4Key 5Key 6Key 7Key 8Key 9Key 10Key 11Key 12Key 13Key 14


1 In Operating mode: Click Show, Settings,Machine and Settings Key.

2 The key file that is active will openautomatically.To open another key file: Go to programmodule 63 Operator and select the operatorwhose key file you wish to alter. Then goback to this program module to alter the keyfile.

3 Click the Key box for the function you wishto program.

4 Click Change.

5 Click the key, on left or right keypad, thatyou wish to link the function to (see FACTSbox). Grey-marked keys are alreadyengaged.

6 If the function is only to be activated by adouble-click (two quick consecutiveclicks):Click the box Double click to put a “tick” inthe box.

7 Click OK.

8 If the function is to be activated with a shift-function (a shift key must be kept pressed inwhile pressing the function key):Click the box Shift key for the function.

9 Click Change.

10 Click the key, on left or right keypad, thatyou wish to use as the shift key. Blue-marked keys are already engaged.

11 Click OK.

12 Continue in the same way (items 3 – 11) forother functions that you wish to program.

13 Click Save and close when you are ready.

14 To exit this module without saving anychanges, click Exit.

3

57

8

1011

NOTEThe functions vary both with regard to contentand number depending on which harvester headis used. The names of functions in the illustra-tion are examples only to illustrate the principlewhen programming the keys.

Location of keysAppearance of the keypads vary with different makes. Anoverview figure is therefore necessary showing thekeypads with current key numbering to enableprogramming of the keys.

FACTS

4

14

6

31. Machine / Setting Key C. Proceed as follows 31.C

13

9

Key function

PineKey

Spruce Key

Hardwood Key

Arrow-up Key

Arrow-down Key

LK Pulse open Key

Feed forward Key

Feed rewers Key

Tilt down Key

Tilt up Key

Saw Key

Key Shift keySave and

exit

Exit

Edit


32 Calibration32.A Overview

NoteIn this program module calibration is made on thebasis of daily calibrations. Initial calibration that ismade when the machine is new or in conjunctionwith any major alteration of the measuring systemis performed using program module 34 Set updiameter.

The diameter and length sensors must be checkeddaily to ensure bucking accuracy of the harvesterhead. The program module has two calibrationcomponents, ie, one for length and one for diametercalibration.For harvester heads that measure the diameter with theaid of two different diameter measuring positions it ispossible to calibrate the two positions separately(Sensor A/Sensor B)Calibration can be done in two ways:• manually

Any deviations are entered into the calibrationdiagram. An evaluation and possible correctionshould be made when a sufficient number of valuesare accumulated in the diagrams.Observe that manual calibration is only possiblewhen using one diameter measuring position.

• automatically by data calliperThe computer can handle two different standardisedmethods for transmission and processing of databetween computer and data calliper: STM - KTRand STI - KTR.The data calliper gives suggestions for adjustmentsthat can be automatically entered into thecalibration file.

Calibration results from both manual and automaticcalibration are saved in file kalib.ldk.

Calibration

32. Machine / Calibration32


Settings Key

Calibration

Machinevariables

Machine

Set updiameter

Test

Automatic calibrationCalibrating with the aid

of computer calliper

Manual calibrationCalibrating with the aid

calibration diagrams


32.B.1 Length calibrationCalibration of length is made by continuallymeasuring the length of logs, comparing their valueswith the length indication of the computer andentering any differences into a length diagram.

An evaluation is made when a sufficient number ofvalues are accumulated in the diagram. Anydeviations in length are entered into the lengthcalibration.It is possible to make separate length calibration foreach species. Two calibrations are made in eachspecies, ie, for butt logs and for other logs.

32.B Description

32. Machine / Calibration B. Description 32.B

Calibrating remaining logsThe length indication is calibratedhere for all logs except the first logfor each species.

Ok

Machine measured:

Control measured: 551

550

Cancel

Machine measured – Control measuredMachine measured is the value that the computerdisplays in the cutting list.

Control measured is the actual measured value on thetrunk.

The calibration value is the machine measured valueminus the control measured value.

By entering a number of differences between machinemeasured values and control measured values in thelength diagram a single machine value and a single controlvalue is obtained (see section 32.C.1). These two valuesare entered here for first log and for the remaining logs.

Observe that in the settings menu (see section 32.B.4)you can choose whether you want division between firstlog and remaining logs or a single value for all logs.

Select tree speciesSelect the species to which thecalibration applies.

Observe that in the settingsmenu (see section 32.B.4)you can choose whether youwant calibration separately foreach species or the samecalibration for all species.

Calibrating first logThe first log differ from other logsfrom a trunk because of the flaredbase of the tree. The lengthindication for first log is thereforecalibrated separately for each treespecies.

Calibrating the diametervaluesSee explanation in section 32.B.2.

Settings and historicalbackgroundSee explanation in section 32.B.4.

Save and exitcalibrationClick here to save and exitthe calibration.

Fetch data file fromdata calliperIn automatic calibration bydata calliper the relevantcalibration file is retrievedfrom the data calliper.See section 32.B.5.

900

600

300

850

550

250

800

500

200

750

450

150

700

400

100

650

350

50

0 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Parallel adjustment of basic settings

Length calibration

First logMachine measured: 550Calibration: -1

Change

Diameter calibration

Remaining logs

Change

Computercalliper

Settings

History

Ok

Cancel

Tree species: Spruce


Machine measured: 550Calibration: -1

Diagram

Displacement of the basiccurveSee explanation in section 32.B.4.


32.B.2 Diameter calibrationCalibration of diameter is made by continuallymeasuring the top diameter of logs, comparing theirvalues with the diameter indication of the computerand entering any differences into a diameter diagram.An evaluation is made when a sufficient number ofvalues are accumulated in the diagram.

Tree speciesDiameter calibration is doneseparately for each species.

Observe that in the settingsmenu (see section 32.B.44)you can choose whether youwant calibration for eachspecies or the samecalibration for all species.

32. Machine / Calibration B. Description 2. Diameter calibration32.B.2

Save and exitcalibrationClick here to save and exitthe calibration.

Settings and historicalbackgroundSee explanation in section32.B.4.

298

7 8 9 <=

4 5 6 +

1 2 3 -

0 C

Cancel

Ok

Max: 349Min: 250

Calibration diameterFixed calibration diametersfor every 50 mm are usedwhen calibrating diameters.

Calibrating valueThe current calibrating value for each calibrationdiameter is seen here.A number of differences between measured anddisplayed values are entered into the diameterdiagram. The mean value of the controlmeasurements is derived from the diagram for thevarious calibrating diameters (see section 32.C.3).When a new mean result of control measured valuesis entered (see below) any deviation is added to thecalibrating value.Example:This how you add a new value at diameter 300:The box for calibrating diameter 300 shows:

3005

Length calibrationSee explanation in section 32.B.1.

3005

3007

This means that previous calibrations have givencalibrating value +5 for diameter 300 mm.

By reading the diameter diagram (see section32.C.3) you perhaps get Calibrating value = 298.Click on the box:

Type 298 and press Ok.The box now shows:

The difference between the Calibration diameter(300) and Calibrating value (298) is 2. Thisdifference has been added to the value in the box:5 + 2 = 7.

Fetch data file fromdata calliperIn automatic calibration bydata calliper the relevantcalibration file is retrievedfrom the data calliper.See section 32.B.5.

Calibration curveCurve for selected species withcalibration for the various 700diameters (every 50 mm). Bycomparing with the basic curve it iseasy to detect abnormal values inthe calibration.

Basic curveThe basic curve shows the diametervalues without any calibration. Thecurve is used to easily see thecalibration values of the species.

Select speciesClick in the boxes to showcorresponding species in thediagram. There are no options hereif you have chosen joint calibrationfor all species (see section 32.B.4).

Displacement of thebasic curvePossibility of displacing the basiccurve for diameter measuring upor down by changing all thevalues equally throughout theentire measuring range.

See section 32.B.3

Interval number/sensorpositionPress F2 to shift between intervalnumber and sensor position.

Exit

Print

Interval number

Tr.sp. 1Tr.sp. 2

Tr.sp. 3Tr.sp. 4


700

600

500

400

300

200

100

01 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Dia

met

er (

mm

)

Diametet A Diameter B

Select diameter measuringpositionIf the harvester head has two diametersensors, choose for which position thatvalues are to be displayed.

Any deviations in diameter are entered into thediameter calibration.

Diameter calibrationA/Diametercalibration BUse Diameter calibration Afor manual calibrating if thehead has only one diametersensor.

If the head has two diametersensors: Choose whethermanual calibration is it to bedone for diameter sensor Aor B.

900

600

300

850

550

250

800

500

200

750

450

150

700

400

100

650

350

50

0 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Length calibration


Change

Diameter calibration A

Remaining logs

Change

Computercalliper

Settings

History

Ok

Cancel




Diagram

Parallel adjustment of basic settingsDiameter calibration B


Diameter A

Value: 0 mm

+ -

Diameter B

Value: 0 mm

+ -

32.B.3 Displacement of the basic curve

The entire diameter curve can be parallel-displacedhere, up or down. This means that an equal value isadded to or subtracted from all of the diameter valuesin the diameter curve.The basic curve of each diameter measuring positioncan be adjusted separately for harvester heads thathave two diameter measuring positions (Diameter A/Diameter B).The function can be used, for example, to compensatefor worn feed rollers if the diameter measuring is madenear the rollers.

Diameter measuring position AIncrease the value with the plus button toincrease all of the displayed diametervalues.

Reduce the value with the minus button toreduce all of the displayed diameter values.

Displacement valueValue showing how much thecurve is displaced.

Click on Diagram to check howthe basic curve has beendisplaced, see section 32.B.2.

Diameter measuring position BIf the harvester head has two diametersensors the basic curve for position B canbe displaced in the same way as forposition A.

32.B.3

Length calibration


Change


Remaining logs

Change

Computercalliper

Settings

History

Ok

Cancel




32. Machine / Calibration B. Description 3. Displacement of the basic curve


32. Machine / Calibration B. Description 4. Settings and historical background32.B.4

32.B.4 Settings and historical background

Diameter per tree speciesHere you can choose whether diameter calibrationis to be done for each tree species (a cross in thebox) or whether the same calibration shall apply forall tree

Length per tree speciesHere you can choose whether length calibration isto be done for each tree species (a cross in the box)or whether the same calibration shall apply for alltree

Separate first log and remaining logsIf the function is active (cross in the box) you do twolength calibrations, ie, one for the first log and onefor the remaining logs. If you switch the function off(no cross in the box) you do one calibration for all ofthe logs. The calibration will then be done in the boxRemaining logs. The First Log box cannot beused.

List of calibrations doneClick on the date to get informationabout the calibration that has beendone.

Information aboutcalibrationHere you can see information about thecalibration that you marked in the list tothe left.

Choice of method for transferring data todata calliperThe computer can handle two different standardisedmethods for transmission and processing of data betweencomputer and data calliper:

• STM, where lengths/diameters can vary in relation to localrequirements.

• STI, which uses fixed, standardized lengths and positions.

Here you can choose which method to use.

Show KtrA Ktr file will be generated if thecalibration suggestion has beencreated in Dasa 4. You can show thiscalibration suggestion here, seesection 32.B.5.

2000-06-09

2000-06-12

2000-06-18

2000-07-01

2000-07-12

2000-08-02

History

Date:

Operator:

Type:

Tree species:

Cause:

Ok

Show Ktr

Diameter by tree species:

Length by tree species:

Separate first and remaining logs:

Cancel

Use STM

Use STI Ok

Use separate cross measured diam.

Use separate cross-measured diame-terEach diameter is checked by cross-measuring whenthe data calliper is used to check the diameter.

If the function is active (box crossed) the result fromthe two measurements is added to Diameter A andDiameter B respectively. The mean value of the twomeasurements is used if the function is not active.

Observe that for the function to be used the datacalliper must be able to save both of the cross-measurements as individual values.

900

600

300

850

550

250

800

500

200

750

450

150

700

400

100

650

350

50

0 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Length calibration


Change


Remaining logs

Change

Computercalliper

Settings

History

Ok

Cancel




Diagram



Length calibration

Tree species: Maskin rot Kontroll rot Machine ControlSpruce 450 452 450 452

Tree species: 50 100 150 200 250 300Spruce 47 98 148 200 252 303

Print

Cancel

Length calibration

Diameter A

Info

Ok

Calibrate diameter A

Diameter B

32.B.5 Calibration by data calliper

Estimated deviation length indicationThe mean length deviation transferred as two values perspecies for butt logs and other logs respectively.

Estimateddeviations diame-ter indicationThe mean diameterdeviations per speciestransferred to evendiameter values.

Calibration of diameter andlength indicationA cross in the box for diameter and lengthcalibration implies that an automaticcalibration (on the basis of the aboveshown deviations) is performed when youclick on OK.

MachineShows the standard diameters formachine-measured values that are usedin diameter calibration (50 mm, 100 mm,150 mm, etc.)

ControlShows the calculated control values foreach standard machine diameter.To calculate the control value for 150 mm,for example, the control measured valuesbetween 100 - 200 mm are used (seediagram below on the right). The closer tothe 150 mm-value, the greater weight inthe calculation.

Measuring errorThe calculated differences in tenths ofmm

Not sureA “factor of uncertainty” showing reliabilityof the calculation. The more controlmeasured values that are used in thecalculation, the lower the “Measuringerror” and all the more reliable value.

NumberNumber of control-measured values thatare used in calculating the Control value.

SuggestionSuggested action for each diameter

All control-measureddifferencesDiameterA/DiameterB: The smallerwhite squares show the difference foreach control-measured value. The largercolored squares show the calculateddifferences for each standard machinediameter (50 mm, 100 mm, 150 mm,etc).

Mean value (for harvester head with twodiameter measuring positions): Showsthe actual measuring deviation of thesystem used in crosscutting calculationand production storage.

No calibration suggestion shown.

Length or diametersThe table/diagram on the leftshows measured diameters. Asimilar table/diagram shows thelength values.

32. Machine / Calibration B. Description 5. Calibration by data calliper 32.B.5

History

Cancel

Computercaliper

Settings

Ok

Calibration statusPreexamination of calibrationresults and that the calibrating isdone.

See section 32.B.6.

Measur error mm

All logs201510

50

-5-10-15-20

50 100 150 200 250 300

diameter mm

Diameter A Diameter B Mean

Tree speciesSpruce

MachineControl Me.err.Con.int No.of Suggestion50 51 -1,3 4,4 7 Not enough data100 102 -2,6 3,8 9 Not enough data150 152 -2,2 1,8 14 Calibrate200 203 -3,6 1,5 18 Calibrate250 251 -1,7 1,6 15 Calibrate300 300 0,3 1,8 13 No action

length

diameter

Close

Calibrationstatus

Print

diagram

Diameter A Diameter B

Select diametermeasuring positionIf the harvester head hastwo diameter measuringpositions, choose in whichposition values are to bedisplayed.

Select diametermeasuring positionIf the harvester head has twodiameter measuring positions,choose in which position valuesare to be displayed.


length

Close

Print

32.B.6 Calibrating status

Calibrating status

Running meterDeviation in lengthmeasuring for each matrixin each species and alsototally in each species.

Volume dm3Deviation in thevolumetric calculation foreach matrix in eachspecies and also totallyin each species.

Deviations in thevolumetric calculationare influenced bydeviations in both thelength and the diametermeasuring.

diameter

Print

Info

Ok

Cancel

32. Machine / Calibration B. Description 6. Calibrating status32.B.6

Calibrating status

Calibration date: Apt. file name:

Machine number: Apt. identity:

Organization: Apt. date:

Region: Subcontractor:

District: Kode:

Working team: Name:

Site number: Address:

Marking for cutting: Buyer:

Compartment number: Vendor:

Lot number: Contract number:

Running meter Volume dm3

Species/ Number of Machine Control Difference Machine Control Difference

Matrix loggs measured measured % measured measured %

Species 1

Matrix 1

Matrix 2

Matrix 3

=

Species 2

Matrix 1

Matrix 2

=

Species 3 Matrix 1

Matrix 2

=

Calibrationstatus


The diameter and length sensors are accuratelycalibrated on the harvester head before it is putinto operation. To maintain the same accurateindication throughout the service life of theharvester head the lengths and diameters of anumber of test logs should be measured daily.Any deviations between indicated andmeasured values are then to be entered intodifferent diagrams for the length and diametervalues.When a sufficient number of values have beennoted to give a clear picture of how the head ismeasuring an evaluation is to be made,followed by any necessary calibration. Aftercalibration, new values are to be collected innew diagrams to check the result of calibrationand to check again whether there are anydeviations.

1 Choose three test trunks with differentdiameters each day. The test trunks are tocorrespond to the different species beingfelled. The trunks may not be oval shaped(max. ovality 1 cm at 20 cm diameter) andthey are to be limbed without large knotlumps.

2 Process the first trunk but position the logsend to end so that it is easy to see theirrelative positions.

3 Print out a cutting list for the trunk.

4 Measure length of the different logs, usingan approved tape measure. Make a note ofthe species, lengths and mark which lengthrefers to the butt log.

5 Measure the top diameters with a calliper atthe thinnest point from the top 10 cm in onthe log (remember that the computer regis-ters falling diameters). Make a note of thetree type and mean value of the callipersizes.

32.C Proceed as follows32. Machine / Calibration C. Proceed as follows 32.C

32.C.1 Daily check, manual feed


+3+2+1

-1-2-3

310 - 340 - 370 - 400 - 430 - 460 - 490 - 520 - 550

2

1

• Save the notes together with the cutting list.• Repeat items 1 – 5 from the previous page on

the other two trunks.• Under flap 7 in the binder you will find

length diagram, diameter diagram and tablefor diameter calibration. Make two copiesper species of the length diagram (onediagram for butt logs, one for other logs) anda copy per species of the diameter diagramand the table.

• Enter the difference values in the length anddiameter diagrams according to the examplein section 32.C.2 and 32.C.3.

Enter deviations in the length diagramYou need two length diagrams per species, ie,one for butt logs and one for other logs.Diagrams that can be copied are available underflap 7.To begin with, a definition of the differentvalues:• Control measured value: The length value

that you measured on the trunk with a tapemeasure

• Machine measured value: The length valueindicated in the log list by the machine.

Use the following formula to calculate thedifference:Machine measured value – (minus) Controlmeasured value = Difference

Example 1:Machine measured value: 402 cmControl measured value: 405 cmDifference: 402 – 405 = -3 cm

1 Follow the zero-line to: 402 cm (machinemeasured value)

2 Mark the difference with a cross: -3 cm

32. Machine / Calibration C. Proceed as follows 1. Daily check, manual infeed32.C.1

Machinemeasured

X


3 4

+3+2+1

-1-2-3

310 - 340 - 370 - 400 - 430 - 460 - 490 - 520 - 550

Example 2:Machine measured value: 372 cmControl measured value: 370 cmDifference: 372 – 370 = +2 cm

1 Follow the zero-line to: 372 cm (machinemeasured value)

2 Mark the difference with a cross: +2 cm

Interpret the length diagramWhen the diagram contains a sufficient numberof values (at least 50) to provide reliablestatistics, an evaluation is to be made, togetherwith any necessary calibration.

3 Draw a straight line from the zero point sothat it forms an approximate mean value ofthe entered values.

4 Find a Difference value where the linecrosses a centimetre line. In the example onthe right the Difference value = 2 cm forMachine value = 520 cm is chosen. Thevalues you should enter into Calibration are:

Machine measured value: 520 cmControl measured value: 520 - 2 = 518 cm

(Control measured value = Machinemeasured value - Difference)

Settings

You only need to make this choice once, orif you wish to change the setting.

5 In Operating mode: Click on Show,Settings, Machine and Calibration.

6 Then click on Settings.

7 Choose whether diameter and lengthcalibration is to be done per species orjointly for all species.

8 Choose whether the length calibration is tobe done separately for butt logs and otherlogs or jointly for all logs.

+3+2+1

-1-2-3

310 - 340 - 370 - 400 - 430 - 460 - 490 - 520 - 550

12

32. Machine / Calibration C. Proceed as follows 1. Daily check, manual infeed 32.C.1

Machinemeasured

Machinemeasured

7

8

6

X

X X XX

X

X

XXX

XXX

XX




Cancel

Use STM

Use STI Ok

900

600

300

850

550

250

800

500

200

750

450

150

700

400

100

650

350

50

0 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Length calibration


Change


Remaining logs

Change

Computercalliper

Settings

History

Ok

Cancel




Diagram




Enter the length values

1 In Operating mode: Click Show, Settings,Machine and Calibration.

2 If required: Click Tree species to select adifferent tree species.

3 Select a tree species and click Ok.

4 If the value concerns the first log, clickChange in the box First log.

5 If the value concerns remaining logs, clickChange in the box Remaining logs.

6 Click Machine measured to enter the valuethat you derived from the length diagram.

7 Enter the value and click Ok.

8 Enter the Control measured value that youderived from the length diagram.

9 Click Ok.

10 The Calibration value is automaticallycalculated when the values Machine-measured and Control-measured areentered.

11 Continue with next page if you also intendto enter calibration values for diameterindication.If entering is ready, save the entered valuesin the calibration file in the usual Windowsmanner by clicking Ok.


Ok

Machine measured:

Control measured: 551

550

Cancel

Species 1Species 2Species 3Species 4Species 5Species 6

Ok

Cancel

550

7 8 9 <=

4 5 6 +

1 2 3 -

0 C

Cancel

Ok

Max: 999Min: 500

2 104

3

5

8

6

10

7

9

11

900

600

300

850

550

250

800

500

200

750

450

150

700

400

100

650

350

50

0 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Length calibration


Change


Remaining logs

Change

Computercalliper

Settings

History

Ok

Cancel




Diagram



Enter deviations in the diameter diagramYou need one diameter diagram per tree typeand also a table for diameter calibration.Diagrams that can be copied are available underflap 7.To begin with, a definition of the differentvalues:• Control measured value: The diameter

value that you measured on the trunk with acalliper.

• Machine measured value: The diametervalue measured by the machine and shown inthe cutting list.

Use the following formula to calculate thedifference:

Machine measured value – (minus) Controlmeasured value = Difference

Example 1:Machine measured value: 100 mmControl measured value: 103 mmDifference: 100 – 103 = -3 mm

1 Follow the zero-line to: 100 mm (machinevalue)

2 Mark the difference with a cross: -3 mm

Example 2:Machine measured value: 201 mmControl measured value: 197 mmDifference: 201 – 197 = 4 mm

3 Follow the zero-line to: 201 mm (machinevalue)

4 Mark the difference with a cross: 4 mm.

-2-4-6

+6+4+2

50 100 150 200 250

-2-4-6

+6+4+2

50 100 150 200 250

1 2

3 4


Machinemeasured

Machinemeasured

X

X


+6+4+2

-2-4-6

100 15050 250200

Interpret the diameter diagram

1 Draw a graph so that it forms the meanvalue of the entered points.

NOTEIf deviations in the diagram are very largeand vary between plus and minus values itmay be an indication that something iswrong with the diameter measuringequipment.

2 Use the calibration diameters 50, 100, 150,etc, as intersection points for the graph.

3 Read the deviation value for eachcalibration value.

4 Enter these values in the column Differencein the table for diameter calibration.

5 Then calculate Control measured valuesfor all diameters according to the formula:Control measured value = Machinemeasured value - Difference

6 Use the calculated Control-measuredvalues to adjust the diameter calibration inprogram module Calibration.

Machine Diffe- Controlmeasured rence measured

50 mm -3 mm 53 mm

100 mm -3 mm 103 mm

150 mm -2 mm 152 mm

200 mm 0 mm 200 mm

250 mm +2 mm 248 mm

1

2

3

4

+6+4+2

-2-4-6

100 15050 250200


5

Machinemeasured

Machinemeasured

XXX

X

XX

XX

XX

X

X

XX

XXX

XX

XX

X

XX

X

X

X

XX

XXX

XX

X

XXX

X X


Enter the diameter values

1 In Operating mode: Click Show,Settings, Machine and Calibration.

2 Select Diameter calibration A if thehead has only one diameter sensor. If thehead has two sensors, select Diametercalibration A or Diameter calibration B.

3 If required: Click Tree species to select adifferent tree species.

4 Select tree species and click Ok.

5 To get the right diameter indication thethe estimated control measured valuesthat you derived from the diameterdiagram are to be entered.

One example:

Diameter 50 mm

6 Click the box 50 mm.

7 The Control measured value for diame-ter 50 = 53 mm.

8 Enter 53.

9 Click Ok.

10 The Mean deviation (-3 mm) are addedto the previous value in the box 50 mm(in this case -2 + (-3) = -5).

11 Continue in the same way with the rest ofthe Control measured values.

12 When ready: Click Ok.


53

7 8 9 <=

4 5 6 +

1 2 3 -

0 C

Cancel

Ok

Max: 319Min: 0

Species 1Species 2Species 3Species 4Species 5Species 6

Ok

Cancel

Machine Diffe- Controlmeasured rence measured

50 mm -3 mm 53 mm

100 mm -3 mm 103 mm

150 mm -2 mm 152 mm

200 mm 0 mm 200 mm

250 mm +2 mm 248 mm

3

12

4

5

6

7

10

9

8

900

600

300

850

550

250

800

500

200

750

450

150

700

400

100

650

350

50

0 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Length calibration


Change

Diameter calibration A

Remaining logs

Change

Computercalliper

Settings

History

Ok

Cancel




Diagram

Parallel adjustment of basicsettings

Diameter calibration B

2


32.C.2 Daily checking by data calliper, method STM - KTR

The diameter and length sensors are accuratelycalibrated when the harvester head is put intooperation. To maintain the same accuracythroughout the service life of the harvester headthe lengths and diameters of a number of testtrunks should be measured daily.When a sufficient number of values have beennoted to give a clear picture of how the head ismeasuring an evaluation is to be made,followed by any necessary calibration. Aftercalibration you should begin to measure newtest trunks to check the result of calibration andto ensure that there are no further deviations.

Setting the data caliper

1 Set the data caliper so that it can receive anSTM file from the felling computer andsend back a KTR file to the fellingcomputer; see operating instructions for therelevant data caliper.

Select method STM - KTR

You only need to make this choice once, orif you wish to change the method.



4 Check that there is a cross in the box UseSTM.

5 If not, click in the box Use STM.

Others settings

6 Activate the function Use separate cross-measured diameter if you wish the firstdiameter of each callipering to be saved asDiameter A and the second diameter asDiameter B.Observe that the function can only be usedif the data calliper is able to save eachindividual cross-measuring diameter as aseparate value.



3

7

4

5

32. Machine / Calibration C. Proceed as follows 2. Daily checking by data calliper, method STM - KTR32.C.2

8

900

600

300

850

550

250

800

500

200

750

450

150

700

400

100

650

350

50

0 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Length calibration


Change


Remaining logs

Change

Computercalliper

Settings

History

Ok

Cancel




Diagram




Cancel

Use STM

Use STI Ok

6




Collect calibration data

1 Connect the data calliper and cable to thebucking computer and set the data calliperin the server mode (receiving mode, seedirections for use of the data calliper).

2 Choose three test trunks with differentdiameters each day. The test trunks are tocorrespond to the different species beingfelled. The trunks may not be oval shaped(max. ovality 1 cm at 20 cm diameter) andthey are to be limbed without large knotlumps.


4 Send the cutting list to the data calliper byclicking in the box Show and then Transferto calliper.

5 Process remaining test trunks in the sameway and click in the box Transfer tocalliper after each processed trunk.

6 Disconnect the calliper from the computer.

7 Measure the different log lengths andmeasure the top diameters with calliper atthe thinnest point from the top 10 cm in onthe trunk (remember that the computer onlyregisters falling diameters).

8 The values that are read in are compared,processed and saved in the data calliper. Oncertain data callipers you can readtendencies in the deviations and thus receiveearly indication of sudden deviations.

9 Repeat the above measuring daily for aboutone week.

10 If you wish to check calibration data whilemeasuring is being done:

• Set to calibration mode.

• Connect the data calliper and cable to thebucking computer.

• Request printout from the calliper.

1

Computer, left side

4Cutting list

Print

Settings

Monitor

Color

Transmit

to Calliper

Show

4

5

10

32. Machine / Calibration C. Proceed as follows 2. Daily checking by data calliper, method STM - KTR 32.C.2


eseShell

Operation

follow-up

Save STM


Transfer calibration data from data calliperto computer

You make this transfer when the test seriesis ready after about one week. Remember toreset the data calliper before starting thenext test series.



3 Then click on Data calliper. Calibrationdata is now transferred from data calliper tocomputer.

4 Reset the data calliper.

5 You can now check the calculated control-measured values supplied by the datacalliper.

6 If you wish to calibrate diameter, length orboth diameter and length, click on the boxesDiameter calibration and/or Lengthcalibration so that the right box/boxes arecrossed.For harvester head with double diametersensors: Select Diameter A or Diameter B.

7 On clicking OK, an automatic calibrationof the cross-marked data will be performed.

8 The new calibration differences are added tothe old values.

9 Click on Info to obtain a more accurateanalysis of the calibration results and to seesuggestions made by the computer forvarious calibration points.

10 Click on length or diameter to togglebetween information on length calibrationor diameter calibration.

11 Click on Calibrating status to check thecalibration result, ie, how big were thedeviations between control measured andmachine measured value, see section32.B.6.

3

5

7

6

8

32. Machine / Calibration C. Proceed as follows 2. Daily checking by data calliper, method STM - KTR32.C.2

Tree speciesSpruce


diagram length

diameter

Close

Calibrationstatus

Print

11

10

9

Length calibration



Print

Cancel

Length calibration

Diameter A

Info

Ok


Diameter B

900

600

300

850

550

250

800

500

200

750

450

150

700

400

100

650

350

50

0 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Length calibration


Change


Remaining logs

Change

Ok

Cancel

Tree species:



DiagramSpruce

Computercalliper

Settings

History






Cancel

Use STM

Use STI Ok

32.C.3 Daily checking by data calliper, method STI - KTR

Diameter and length sensors are accuratelycalibrated when the harvester head is put intooperation. To maintain the same accuracythroughout the service life of the harvester headthe lengths and diameters of a number of testtrunks should be measured and evaluated dailyand possibly re-calibrated.

Setting the data caliper

1 Set the data caliper so that it can receive anSTI file from the felling computer and sendback a KTR file to the felling computer; seeoperating instructions for the relevant datacaliper.

Select method STI - KTR

You only need to make this choice once, orif you wish to change the method.



4 Check that there is a cross in the box UseSTI

5 If not, click in the box Use STI.

Others settings



8 The function Use separate cross-measureddiameter can only be used together withmethod STM.

3

4

5

6

7

32. Machine / Calibration C. Proceed as follows 3. Daily checking by data calliper, method STI - KTR 32.C.3

900

600

300

850

550

250

800

500

200

750

450

150

700

400

100

650

350

50

0 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Length calibration


Change


Remaining logs

Change

Ok

Cancel

Tree species:



DiagramSpruce

Computercalliper

Settings

History

8




Collect calibration data

1 Connect the data calliper and cable to thebucking computer and set the data calliperin the server mode (receiving mode, seedirections for use of the data calliper).

2 Choose five test trunks with differentdiameters each day. The test trunks are tocorrespond to the different species beingfelled. The trunks may not be oval shaped(max. ovality 1 cm at 20 cm diameter) andthey are to be limbed without large knotlumps.


4 Save the cutting list in the data file (STI-file) that is later to be sent to the datacalliper by clicking in the box Show andthen Save STI.

5 Process remaining test trunks in the sameway and click in the box Save STI aftereach processed trunk.

6 When all trunks are processed, click onTransfer to calliper to send the STI-file tothe data calliper.Note that this transfer is done once onlywhen all the trunks are processed and savedby the bucking computer.

7 Disconnect the data calliper and measurethe different log lengths according to theprocedure that applies for the method KTR- STI. (The diameter values are to bemeasured 50 cm, 100 cm, 150 cm, etc, fromthe crosscut point.)

1

4

Transfer

to Calliper

Save STI

Show

4

5

6

32. Machine / Calibration C. Proceed as follows 3. Daily check by data calliper, method STI - KTR32.C.3

Computer, left side


Cutting list

Print

Settings

Monitor

Color

eseShell

Operation

follow-up

Save STM


Length calibration



Print

Cancel

Length calibration

Diameter A

Info

Ok


Diameter B

Transfer calibration data from data calliperto computer

Note that this transfer must be done beforethe bucking computer can save any newcalibration trunks.



3 Then click on Data calliper. Calibrationdata is now transferred from data calliper tocomputer

4 The computer processes the calibration datathat has been transferred and you can nowcheck the processed data.

5 Click on Info to obtain a more accurateanalysis of the calibration results and to seesuggestions made by the computer forvarious calibration points.

6 Click on length or diameter to togglebetween information on length calibrationor diameter calibration. For harvester headwith double diameter measuring positions:Select Diameter A or Diameter B.


5

6

3

4

32. Machine / Calibration C. Proceed as follows 3. Daily check by data calliper, method STI - KTR 32.C.3

7

900

600

300

850

550

250

800

500

200

750

450

150

700

400

100

650

350

50

0 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Length calibration


Change


Remaining logs

Change

Ok

Cancel

Tree species:



DiagramSpruce

Computercalliper

Settings

History

Tree speciesSpruce


length

diameter

Close

Calibrationstatus

Print

diagram




1 Click on diagram to show a diagram withall differences entered. For harvester headswith two diameter measuring positions aseparate diagram is shown for the respectiveposition (Diameter A/Diameter B) and alsothe measuring deviation for the wholesystem (Mean). Shown under flap Mean arethe values used for example in crosscuttingcalculation and production storage.

2 If you wish to calibrate diameter, length orboth diameter and length, click on the boxesDiameter calibration and/or Lengthcalibration so that the right box/boxes arecrossed.

3 On clicking OK, an automatic calibration ofthe cross-marked data will be performed.

3

2

Tree species Spruce diagram length

diameter

Close

1

1

32. Machine / Calibration C. Proceed as follows 3. Daily check by data calliper, method STI - KTR32.C.3

Measur error mm

All logs201510

50

-5-10-15-20

50 100 150 200 250 300

diameter mm

Diameter A Diameter B Mean

Length calibration



Print

Cancel

Length calibration

Diameter A

Info

Ok


Diameter B


32.C.4 Displacement of thebasic curve for diameter valuesThe function parallel-displaces the entire basiccurve for the diameter sensor. The basic curveof each diameter measuring position can beadjusted separately for harvester heads that havetwo diameter measuring positions (Diameter A/Diameter B).

1 If the harvester head has double diametermeasuring positions choose whether thedisplacement shall apply to position A or B.

If the harvester head has one diametermeasuring position: use the buttons in theDiameter A box.

2 Click on the plus button to increase thevalues of the displayed diameter.

3 Click on the minus button to reduce thevalues of the displayed diameter.

32

1

32. Machine / Calibration C. Proceed as follows 4. Displacement of the basic curve for diameter values 32.C.4

Diameter A

Value: 0 mm

+ -

Diameter B

Value: 0 mm

+ -

Length calibration


Change


Change

Computercalliper

Settings

History

Ok

Cancel





Exit

Print

Interval number

Tr.sp. 1Tr.sp. 2

Tr.sp. 3Tr.sp. 4


700

600

500

400

300

200

100

01 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Dia

met

er (

mm

)

Diametet A Diameter B

32.C.5 Checking diametercalibration using diagram1 The calibration is available in diagram form

to facilitate checking of the diametercalibration and to see whether the values areplausible.

2 In the Operating mode: Click on Show,Settings, Machine and Calibration.

3 Click on Diagram.

4 Select which species are to be shown in thediagram. (There are no options here if youhave chosen joint calibration for all species.)

5 For harvester head with double diametermeasuring positions: Select Diameter A orDiameter B to display the respective positiondiagram.

6 Change between displays Interval numberor Sensor position by pressing F2.

7 The curve(s) from selected species areshown in the diagram...

8 ... and can be compared with a basic curvewithout the calibration values beingentered.

9 Click on Print to obtain a print of thediagram.

3

4

9

7

8

32. Machine / Calibration C. Proceed as follows 5. Checking diameter calibration using diagram32.C.5

900

600

300

850

550

250

800

500

200

750

450

150

700

400

100

650

350

50

0 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Length calibration


Change


Remaining logs

Change

Ok

Cancel

Tree species:



DiagramSpruce

Computercalliper

Settings

History

5

6



Tree speciesSpruce


length

diameter

Close

Calibrationstatus

Print

diagram


2000-06-09

2000-06-12

2000-06-18

2000-07-01

2000-07-12

2000-08-02

History

Date:

Operator:

Type:

Tree species:

Cause:

Ok

Show Ktr

32. Machine / Calibration C. Proceed as follows 6. History 32.C.6

32.C.6 History1 You can easily check calibrations made

earlier.

2 In the Operating mode: Click on Show,Settings, Machine and Calibration.

3 Click on History.

4 Select the calibration that you wish to checkin the list on the right.

5 The History box shows you data oncalibration.

6 Click on Show Ktr to see further data aboutcalibration.

Observe that the calibration must have beenperformed using either of the methods STM- KTR or STI -KTR to enable these data to beshown.

7 Now you can see detailed data concerningthe calibration for different species indifferent diameters, see also section 32.B.5.If the harvester head has double diametermeasuring positions: Select Diameter A orDiameter B to display the information forthe respective position.


6

5

4

7

8

3

900

600

300

850

550

250

800

500

200

750

450

150

700

400

100

650

350

50

0 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Length calibration


Change


Remaining logs

Change

Ok

Cancel

Tree species:



DiagramSpruce

Computercalliper

Settings

History



33 Machine variables33.A OverviewIn this program module you set all the times andvariable values that match the computer fordifferent harvester heads, modes of operation andoperator. The number and configuration of thevariables is unique for each maker of harvester heads.The variables are saved in files with the suffix .mas.Each operator can have his own .mas file. This meansthat each operator can individually program the timesand variables that suit him. When changing theoperator the new operator’s .mas file is activatedautomatically.

DCLIn program DCL, which is a separate program notincluded in this manual, the programming offunctions that control the harvester head is made.The functions can for example be “Feed forward”,“Feed reverse” or “Saw”.Exactly which valves and other control systems are tobe energised when the function is activated aredefined in program DCL. It is also decided whetherthe function is to have a variable where the operatorhimself shall be able to influence the function.It is also here that the variables are put into groupsand sub-groups of variables.

Machinevariables

Programming of timesand variables on which

the harvester headdepends.

33. Machine / Machine variables33


Settings Key

Calibration

Machinevariables

Machine

Set updiameter

Test


33.B Description

Exit without saving changesClick here to exit without changing the value ofany variable. Any changes that you have madewill not be saved.

Save changes made and exitClick here to exit and save the changes thatyou have made to time values and to valueof variables.

Select group ofvariablesAs a rule, to make the valuesof variables clear and easy tofind they are divided intodifferent groups. Click one ofthe boxes to select a group.

Select sub-groupIt is sometimes suitable todivided groups of variables intoadditional sub-groups. Here, thegroup of variables Feed rollers isdivided into seven different sub-groups.

Sub-groups, if any, are shownwhen you select a group ofvariables.

Variable and value ofvariableThe variables belonging to a group orsub-group of variables are seen here.

Name of group or sub-groupof variablesHere you can see the group or sub-groupof variables currently being displayed.

The variables that are specific for each maker ofharvester heads are noted in an appendix at theend of chapter 3.

The groups, sub-groups of variable and individualvariables shown here are only examples used todemonstrate the principles of programming.

Variables can be programmed individually by eachoperator. To facilitate programming, the variables aredivided into different groups. The groups of variablescan be divided into sub-groups if required.Examples below include the groups of variables:Feed rollers - Limbing knives - Saw - Way ofdriving - Basic settings.The Feed rollers group includes the sub-groups:MaxMinpressure - Speed - Pressure% - Times -Ramp - Feed forward - Feed revers.

The variables can be divided into two differentgroups:• Numerical variables

Variable that is to be saved with a numerical value,eg, various lengths of time. A numerical variablecan have minimum and maximum value limits thatmay not be exceeded.

• Selection variablesVariables where you make a choice between certaindetermined options, eg, to activate or close afunction or to choose between different tree types.

33. Machine / Machine variables B. Description 33.B

Print list of variablesHere you can print out the whole list ofvariables including the entered values of eachone.

Help textsCan show help texts for each variable(assuming that help texts are entered whenprogramming the variables).

Click on the help text box and then on avariable.

Feed rollersLimbingknives Saw

Way ofdriving

MaxMinpressure

Speed

Pressure%

Times

Ramp

Feed forward

Feed rewers

MaxFRpressure (0-255) 200

MinFRpressure (0-255) 150

Max Min pressure

CloseSave and Close

Basicsettings

Print ?

0

7 8 9 <=

4 5 6 +

1 2 3 -

0 C

Cancel

Ok

Max: 255Min: 0

Outputactive

Activate output

DANGER OF PERSONAL INJURYTake great care when activating theoutput. The function that youactivate operates immediately andcan result in injury to persons ordamage to equipment.

For certain variables you can activate the output at thesame time as you set the value of the variable. In thisway the function can be checked direct, making iteasier to achieve correct setting.

Output activatedRed when the output isactivated.

Deletes one character

Entered value


Feed rollersLimbingknives Saw Way of

driving

MaxMinpr.

Speed

Pressure%

Times

Ramp

Feed forward

Feed rewers

MaxFRpr. (0-255) 200

MinFRpr. (0-255) 150

Max Min pressure

CloseSave and Close

Basicsettings

Print ?NOTEThe variables that are specific for eachmaker of harvester heads are noted in anappendix at the end of chapter 3.

The groups, sub-groups of variables andindividual variables shown here are onlyexamples used to demonstrate the princip-les of programming.

1 In Operating mode: Click Show, Settings,Machine and Machine variables.

33.C.1 Single variables

DANGER OF PERSONAL INJURYTake great care when activating the output.The function that you activate operatesimmediately and can result in injury topersons or damage to equipment.

2 Select a group of variables, eg, Feed roll-ers, by clicking the box.

3 If there are sub-groups ensure that the rightgroup is selected. If not, click the box of theright sub-group, eg, MaxMin pressure.

4 Click the name of the variable that you wishto adjust, eg, MaxFR pressure.

5 Enter the right value. If the box Outputactive is visible, you can activate the outputby clicking the box. In this way you seedirect the result of various settings.

6 The indication is red when the output isactivated.

7 Click OK when ready.


3

4

7

33. Machine / Machine variables C. Proceed as follows33.C

2

50

7 8 9 <=

4 5 6 +

1 2 3 -

0 C

Cancel

Ok

Max: 255Min: 0

Outputactive

6


5

OffOn

Cancel

Ok

3

4

2

Feed rollersLimbingknives Saw Way of

driving

Tree start

Tree end

Automatic

Tilt

Cut

Start on preselect (On/Off) On

Start on grade (On/Off) On

Start on tree type(On/Off) On

Tree start

CloseSave and Close

Basicsettings

Print ?

1 Certain variables (eg, Start on preselect)can only be programmed withpredetermined options (in this case On orOff).

2 Click the name of the variable that youwish to alter.

3 Click the correct option.

4 Click OK.

5 Click Save and Close when completed.

33. Machine / Machine variables C. Proceed as follows 1. Single variables 33.C.1


Feed rollers Limbingknives

Saw Way ofdriving

Sawbar position

Autofelling

Autocut

Sawtime warning

Distance

Autofelling

CloseSave and Close

Basicsettings

Print ?

Diameter Species 1 Species 2 Species 3

[ 1 ] 100 120 120 150

[ 2 ] 200 120 120 150

[ 3 ] 300 120 120 150

[ 4 ] 400 120 120 150

[ 5 ] 500 120 120 150

3

5

6

33.C.2 Several variable valuesCertain variables can contain several variablevalues. The example below refers to the settingof Autofelling.

1 Click a box to select a group of variables,eg, Saw.

2 If there are sub-groups ensure that the rightgroup is selected. If not, click the box of theright sub-group, eg, Autofelling.

3 Click the name of the variable that you wishto adjust, eg, [ 1 ].

4 A red frame will now appear round thevariable values to the right of the name ofthe variable.

5 Click the variable value that you wish toprogram.

6 Enter the numerical value and click OK.

7 Repeat items 3 – 6 above to enter remainingvalues.

33.C.3 Print list of variables

8 Click Print to print out a list of currentvariables.

33.C.4 Help texts9 The help texts that were entered when the

machine variables were programmed can beviewed as follows:

10 Click on ?.

11 Click on the variable to view its help texts.

12 Help text shown. Click on OK to close thehelp text box.

1

2

4

33. Machine / Machine variables C. Proceed as follows 2. Several variable values33.C.2

0

7 8 9 <=

4 5 6 +

1 2 3 -

0 C

Cancel

Ok

Max: 255Min: 0

8

Ok

Help text

12

10

11


34 Set up diameter34.A OverviewThis function is used to make a basic setting fordiameter measuring on the harvester head.Measuring is done with a calliper and marking on atree that has a large butt diameter. The harvester headfeeds the trunk forward to the marked diameters andthe various diameters are written in.

NOTEThis setting shall only be done when the harvesterhead is new or in conjunction with any majoralteration of the measuring system.Carry out the daily check and adjustment ofdiameter measuring in program module “32Calibration”.

Set updiameter

Add and deletereference diameter

34. Machine / Set up diameter 34


Settings Key

Calibration

Machinevariables

Machine

Set updiameter

Test


34.B Description

Diameter valueWrite in the measured diametervalues used for the calibration.

AddressThe value (number of pulses)currently given by the measuringequipment since the harvesterhead has been fully open. Displaysdifferent addresses depending onwhich flap DiameterA / Diameter Bis selected

DeleteDelete an already recordedaddress/diameter value.

AddAdd a new address/diametervalue.

Address/diametertableTable showing values foraddress/ diameter that areentered.

Diameter:

Add Delete

Ok

Cancel

Address Diameter

Address:

The diameter of the trunk is measured continually viathe limbing knives, or on certain harvester heads bothvia the limbing knves and via the feed rollers.If the harvester head has double diameter measuringpositions both Diameter A and Diameter B are usedfor the initial setting of the two different diametermeasuring positions. For harvester head with onediameter sensor, Diameter A is used.The diameter measuring positions, mounted on theknives/feed rollers, transmit a train of pulses when thelimbing knives/feed rollers open and close. Thefollowing measuring is done to define the number ofpulses that the diameter measuring positions transmitfrom when the knives are fully open until they are fullyclosed at different diameters of the trunk:

• On a thick trunk measure the diameters with acalliper and mark them.

• Open the limbing knives/feed rollers of the harvesterhead fully so that pulse counting can be zero set.

• Allow the harvester head to feed forward to the firstmeasured diameter and write in the diameter value.The address shown is the number of pulses from thediameter sensor.

• Feed forward the other diameters in the samemanner to give a series of diameters with evendistribution in the grapple width of the harvesterhead.

• The input procedure is repeated for Diameter Bwhen using diameter measuring in two positions.

34. Machine / Set up diameter B. Description34.B


DiameterA/Diameter BFor harvester head with double diameter measuringpositions, use both pages. For harvester head withone diameter measuring positions use pageDiameter A.


NOTEThis setting shall only be done when theharvester head is new or in conjunction withany major alteration of the measuring sys-tem.Carry out the daily check and adjustment ofdiameter measuring in program module 32Calibration.

1 In Operating mode: Click Show, Settings,Machine and Set up diameter.

2 Limb a trunk that has a thick butt diameter.Measure with a calliper and mark up anumber of suitable diameters, however, notmore than ten. The diameters can forexample be 300, 250, 140, 100 and 70 mm,but any other sizes will do, even unevenvalues.

3 Open the diameter tool fully and measurethe distance between the fixed and movingcontact points against the trunk.

4 For harvester head with double diametermeasuring positions: Select Diameter A orDiameter B depending on which position isto be set.

5 Click Diameter.

6 Write in the measured maximum value (incm). Click OK.

7 Click Add.

8 Feed the trunk forward so that the tool gripsat the first callipered diameter.

9 Click Diameter.

10 Write the callipered diameter value (in cm)in the box Diameter. Click OK.

11 Repeat items 6 to 9 for all the callipereddiameters on the trunk.

12 If any of the values is incorrect: Click theincorrect line in the table.

13 Click Delete.

14 Click OK when you are ready.


14

5 9

12

13

34.C34. Machine / Set up diameter C. Proceed as follows

0

7 8 9 <=

4 5 6 +

1 2 3 -

0 C

Cancel

Ok

Max: 255Min: 0

106

7

Diameter:

Add Delete

Ok

Cancel

Address Diameter

Address:


4


35 Test

35.A Overwiev

DANGER OF PERSONAL INJURYSwitch off the engine of the base machine beforechecking the outputs. In the test mode the valvesswitch on and off direct and can result in injury topersons or damage to equipment if the engine isrunning.

The test function can be used to check and trouble-shoot electrical components of the computerinstallation. It can also be used to test and trouble-shoot the other functions of the harvester head toquickly determine which component in the computeror harvester head is malfunctioning.

Test

Control the outputs:ON/OFF

Check the outputsshort circuiting

Check status of theinputs:

ON/OFFshort circuitingerror interrupt

Inputs Outputs

35. Machine / Test35


Settings Key

Calibration

Machinevariables

Machine

Set updiameter

Test


35.B Description

NOTE.Both the number of test functions and theiraction vary depending on the harvester head.The following description is an example toillustrate the principles of the test program.

35. Machine / Test B. Description 35.B

Exit

12

34

56

78

Output module -operationOutput modules are green incolor.

By clicking one of themodules as shown in theabove summary a detailedimage of the module will bedisplayed.

Input moduleInput modules are red in color.

An overview of status for theinputs is shown here.

Green color: Input OK

Red color: Faulty input(interruption or short circuit)

Function ON/OFFClick the name of thefunction to switch it on or off.

Return to choice ofmodule

Output LK close

Output tilt down

Output Urea

Output pump high

Output saw motor

Output tilt down

Output LK open

<<<

Sensor sawbar position

Sensor sawbar home

Diameter pulse 2

Length pulseDiameter pulse 1

<<<

35.B.1 Input and output modulesUsing the test function you are able to manuallycontrol all output signals from computer to harvesterhead in a very clear manner. You are also able tocheck voltage levels of input signals from harvesterhead to computer. Output or input that is shortcircuited or broken is also indicated.

1

316 1

316672

KU BU


Exit

12

34

56

78

Left keys

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

Right keys

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

Aktive key functions

Analouge keys

Value: 55 0 0 0 0 21 0 9No: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

35.B.2 Key functionsHere you can test control keys and control levers onthe keypads. On actuating a key/lever it is indicated inthe menu below. For analogue functions also the sizeof the signal is shown by a numerical value and as abar diagram.

Active keysActive keys are indicated bya green color.

Active key functionsThe names of key functionsare shown here in clear text.

Analogue keysActive analogue keyfunctions are shown here asa numerical value between0 and 256 and also as a bardiagram.

35. Machine / Test B. Description 2. Key functions35.B.2

KU BU


35.C.1 Testing the outputs

DANGER OF PERSONAL INJURYSwitch off the engine of the base machinebefore checking the outputs. In the testmode the valves switch on and off directand can result in injury to persons ordamage to equipment if the engine isrunning.

NOTE.Both the number of outputs and theirfunction vary depending on the harvesterhead. The following description is anexample to illustrate the principles fortesting the outputs.

1 In the Operating mode: Click Show,Settings, Machine and Test.

2 You now see a warning box urging you tostop the engine of the base machine beforecontinuing.Switch off the engine if not already doneand then click on OK.

3 Click the output module containing theoutput that you wish to test. The outputmodules are green in color.

4 Click the name box for the output toactivate it. Click the name box again toswitch the function off.

5 Click <<< to return to menu choice.

6 Press Exit to end the function.


3

4 6

35. Machine / Test C. Proceed as follows 35.C

Exit

12

34

56

78

5

Output LK close

Output tilt down

Output Urea

Output pump high

Output saw motor

Output tilt down

Output LK open

<<<

Shut down the machine before you proceed!

Ok Cancel

2

KU BU


3

5

4

35. Machine / Test C. Proceed as follows 2. Testing the inputs35.C.2

Exit

12

34

56

78

6

35.C.2 Testing the inputs

NOTE.Both the number of inputs and their functionvary depending on the harvester head. Thefollowing description is an example toillustrate the principles for testing theinputs.



3 Click the input module containing theinputs that you wish to test. The inputmodules are red in color.

4 Check status of the inputs: green color =input OK, red color = faulty input(interruption or short circuit).The current value is seen in the box for eachfunction.



Sensor sawbar position

Sensor sawbar home

Diameter pulse 2

Length pulseDiameter pulse 1

<<<

Ok Cancel

2

1

316 1

316672


KU BU


35.C.3 Testing the keys

NOTEBoth the number of inputs and their functionvary depending on the harvester head. Thefollowing description is an example toillustrate the principles for testing theinputs.



3 Click the key test box.

4 Press a key/lever on the keypads. Ensurethat the corresponding symbol is activated(changes to green).

5 The name of the activated function is shownin clear text in the box.

6 You can check analogue functions asnumerical values or in a bar diagram.



Left keys

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

Aktive key functions

Analouge keys

Value: 55 0 0 0 0No: 1 2 3 4 5

Exit

12

34

56

78

3

4

5

6

7<<<

8

35. Machine / Test C. Proceed as follows 3. Testing the keys 35.C.3

Ok Cancel

2


KU BU


Appendix

Variables for Dasa4


Loggingcontract

Manuallenght


41. Logging contractCreate, alter, change, partly exit and exitlogging contracts.

42. Manual lengthProgramming of length selection keys

Bucking

44. Bucking / Contents

4. Bucking

41 Logging contract________________ 341.A Summary_____________________________ 3

41.A.1 Create a logging contract ____________ 341.A.2 Change logging contract _____________ 341.A.3 Alter logging contract _______________ 341.A.4 Extensive change of bucking instruction 441.A.5 Limited change of bucking instruction __ 441.A.6 Exit logging contract ________________ 441.A.7 Files of the Logging contract _________ 5

41.B Description ___________________________ 641.B.1 Logging contract ___________________ 641.B.2 Limited change in bucking instructions,

Administration _____________________ 741.B.3 Limited change in bucking instructions,

Other variables ____________________ 841.B.4 Limited change in bucking instructions,

Color marking _____________________ 9

41.C Proceed as follows ____________________ 1041.C.1 New logging contract _______________ 1041.C.2 Modify logging contract ______________ 1341.C.3 Partly end an object ________________ 1441.C.4 Shift logging contract _______________ 1541.C.5 Limited change of bucking file ________ 1641.C.6 Exit a logging contract ______________ 20

42 Manual length __________________ 2142.A.1 Programming the keys ______________ 21

42.A Summary_____________________________ 21

42.B Description ___________________________ 22

42.C Proceed as follows ____________________ 23

Contents


4. Bucking / Index4

Index

A

Alter logging contract 3

C

Change or alter logging contract 3Create a logging contract 3

D

DCL 21

E

Exit a logging contract 20Exit logging contract 4Extensive change of bucking instruction 4

F

Files of the Logging contract 5

L

Limited change in bucking instructions,Administra 7

Limited change in bucking instructions, Colormark 9

Limited change in bucking instructions, Othervari 8

Limited change of bucking file 16Logging contract 3

Description 6Exit a logging contract 20Files of the Logging contract 5Modify logging contract 13New logging contract 10Proceed as follows 10Shift logging contract 15Summary 3

M

Manual length 21Description 22Proceed as follows 23Summary 21

Modify logging contract 13

N

New logging contract 10

P

Partly end an object 14Programming the keys 21

S

Shift logging contract 15


41 Logging contract

41.A SummaryLogging contract is a collective term that is used tokeep together various data concerning a particularfelling task. In this function you create, alter, changeand exit logging contracts.

41.A.1 Create a logging contractWhen creating a new logging contract you linkoptional bucking instructions to the object. Aproduction file is also created in which productiondata from felling is accumulated.

41.A.2 Change logging contractYou can have several different logging contractsactive and change between them, eg, if you areoperating in the border area of two logging contracts.A logging contract can be partly exited, eg, if youneed production data concerning the object before it iscompleted.

41.A.3 Alter logging contractIf you wish, while felling is in progress, you can alterthe bucking instructions and bucking method for thelogging contract. Should the new bucking instructionsdiffer so much from the initial instructions that theexisting production file cannot be used then a newproduction file will be created as you alter the buckinginstructions.

Create new loggingcontract

Select bucking instructionsSelect bucking method

Production file is created

41. Bucking / Logging contract 41

Change loggingcontract

Choose another active loggingcontract

Alter a loggingcontract

Change bucking instructionsChange bucking method

Machine Result System

Loggingcontract

Manuallenght

Bucking

Bucking


Exit

Exit a logging contract

Limited change

OrganisationObject

ContractorContract

Administration

For each length/diameter class:

Color marking with amaximum of three

colors

Color marking

Minimum top diameterCutting zone

Bucking conditionsGrade setting

Other variables

41.A.4 Extensive change ofbucking instructionFor more extensive changes in the buckinginstructions there is link to the function System /Bucking instructions (WinApt), which is the toolused to make major changes in bucking instructionsand to create entirely new instructions. This functionis explained in section 67.

41.A.5 Limited change of buckinginstructionYou can use this function to simply enter or editcertain data in a bucking instruction without having touse program module WinApt (see section 67).The data that can be edited are those that are mostfrequently modified by the operator. They are:• Administration All data regarding Organisation,

Object, Contractor and Contract.• For each price matrix in the bucking instructions:

Minimum top diameter, Cutting zone, Buckingconditions and Grade setting

• For each length/diameter class in each pricematrix: Colour marking with a maximum of threecolours.

41.A.6 Exit logging contractWhen a logging contract is completed the prd-file isgiven a final date and entered into the folder ObjEnd(see section41.A.7). It is important that the logging contract isended in DASA4 when felling is completed, ie, toensure that the database for operations follow-up doesnot become too big.

Extensive change ofbucking instruction

Link to program moduleBucking instructions, see

section 67.

41. Bucking / Logging contract A. Summary 4. Extensive change of bucking instruction41.A.4


APT_1$01.aptAPT_2$01.aptOBJ_1.objOBJ_1.prdOBJ_1$01.prdOBJ_1.priOBJ_1$01.priStockNot.Stn

41.A.7 Files of the Loggingcontract• Current logging contracts

Files for the objects that have been started but notyet completed are found in object folders (OBJ_1,OBJ_2 and OBJ_3 in the example on the right)filed in the folder Dasa4/User/Obj.

• Exited logging contractsWhen the objects are exited the object folders aremoved (OBJ_4, OBJ_5 and OBJ_6 in the exampleon the right) from folder Dasa4/User/Obj to folderDasa4/User/ObjEnd.

• Contents of the object folder- Object information (OBJ_1.obj in the example

on the right) containing:object name and filename, starting date, anyalterations during progress of the project andwhen the project was ended.

- Bucking instructions (APT_1$01.apt andAPT_2$01.apt in the example on the right).The, or those, bucking instructions used arecopied to the object folder. If the buckingfunction is altered it is saved again and gets theaddition $ and a consecutive number.

- Production filesType PRD

(OBJ_1.prd and OBJ_1$01.prd in theexample on the right).The, or those, production files withproduction results created in the object.Each time the object is partly ended a newproduction file is created with the addition $and a consecutive number.

Type PRI(OBJ_1.pri and OBJ_1$01.pri in theexample on the right).Pri is a file format for saving productionstatistics at log level according to theStanForD standard.Each time the pri-file is partly ended a newpri-file is created with the addition $ and aconsecutive number.

- Log bill (StockNot.Stn) used for calculationof distribution bucking.

41.A.741. Bucking / Logging contract A. Summary 7. Files of the Logging contract

Dasa4

Obj

ObjEnd

OBJ_1

OBJ_2

OBJ_3

OBJ_4

OBJ_5

OBJ_6

User


Change loggingcontractYou can change at any time toanother current logging contract.

Status of the contractCurrent status of the loggingcontract and also changesthat have been made in thebucking files and productionfiles.

41.B Description

41.B.1 Logging contract

Shift

Logging contract

Name:Created:Apt-File:Prd-File:

Create new

Modify

41. Bucking / Logging contract B. Description41.B

Changes in LoggCon

Export LoggCon.

Export closed LoggCon.

Export logging contractDo not export non-finished logging contracts(located in the folder Dasa4/User/Obj, seesection 41.A.4), eg, to diskette, PC-card orexternal hard disk.

Export completed loggingcontractsExport finished logging contracts (located inthe folder Dasa4/User/ObjEnd, see section41.A.4) to diskette, PC-card or external harddisk.

Extensive changeA link to functionOptimizationBuilder, seeseparate manual.

Limited changeEdit following data in selected bucking instructions:

• AdministrationAll data regarding Organisation, Object,Contractor and Contract.

• For each price matrixin the bucking instructions: Minimum topdiameter, Cutting zone, Bucking conditions andGrade setting

• For each length/diameter classin each price matrix: Color marking with amaximum of three colors.

Create Pri-filePri is a file format for saving production statistics at log levelaccording to the StanForD standard.

The file is used to export data to an external PC for furtherprocessing.

The file grows in size for each log and accordingly there is alimit for how big the file can become before it must be endedor partly ended.

Select name of the logging contract, buckinginstructions and bucking method

Import Apt-fileImport an Apt-file from anexternal unit, eg, diskette orPC-card.

Edit in apt-fileExtensive or limited alterationof apt-file, see explanationabove at the box Create newlogging contract.

Edit bucking instructions andbucking method

Partly end PRI-fileThe PRI-file grows in size foreach log and consequently it ispossible to partly end the PRI-fileonly.

Partly end productionThe production file and any PRI-file can be partly ended to enableevaluation of production duringongoing bucking.

New production and PRI-files withthe addition $ and a consecutivenumber are created for the partlyended object. The originalproduction file will remain intact.

Create new logging contract

Bucking file Aptfile1.apt

Ok

Cancel

Bucking method ValueBucking

Name

Import Apt-file

Create Pri-file

Limited change of Apt-file

Extensive change of Apt-file

Bucking method

Logging contract:Current Bucking file:

Ok

Swap bucking file

Partly end production

Close logging contract

Modify logging contract

Partly end PRI-file





Cancel

Site number

Marking for cutting

Comparment number

Lot number

Organization

Region

District

Working team

Wood pile

Subcontractor

Subcont. Code

Subcont. Name

Entrep. Address

Buyer

Vendor

Contract number

Edit

Ok

AdministrativedataHere you can view andedit the administrativedata that can be tied tothe price matrix.

They are the same datathat you can reach in theBucking instructionsfunction Identity/Administration, seesection 67.B.3.

Save and exitSave the changes you havemade and exit the program.

ExitExit the program withoutsaving any changes.

Save as new buckinginstructionsWhen you have made changes youcan save the file as new buckinginstructions. The new instructions aresaved in folder Dasa4/User/Apt.

Choose and editUsing the arrow keys,select the line where youwish to edit/type new data.Then click on Edit.

Use the template tofacilitate settings• Click on Show template. Type

data in the fields that you willfrequently edit.

• When you wish to enter thesedata in a price matrix: Click inUpdate from template.

• The data in the template will thenbe entered in correspondingempty fields in the price matrix.Fields that already have text/figures will not be altered.

41.B.2 Limited change in bucking instructions, Administration

Administration

Other Variables

Color marking

Select:

Save and exit Exit Save in Aptdirectory

Site number

Marking for cutting

Comparment number

Lot number

Organization

Region

District

Working team

Wood pile

Subcontractor

Subcont. Code

Subcont. Name

Entrep. Address

Buyer

Vendor

Contract number

Contract number (VIOL)

Show

Administration

Edit

Updatefrom

template

Showtemplate

41.B.241. Bucking / Logging contract B. Description 2. Limited change in bucking instructions, Administration


Other Variables

EditPricematrix Min Top DiamCutting windowBucking condition Grade

Matrix 1 50 2/5 Buck always 1


Matrix 3 100 -2/4 Buck never 101

Matrix 4 0 2/4 Buck never 1111

Tree speciesTree species 1

Bucking condition

Min Top Diam

Lower cutting window

Uppercutting window

Buck always

Ok

Cancel

Grade

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

50

2

5

Tree species 1/Matrix1

Matrix dataHere you can see andedit a limited number ofdata for each matrix:

Min Top Diameter

Cutting window

Bucking condition

Grade

Choose and editUsing the arrow keys,select the line where youwish to edit/type new data.Then click on Edit.

Cutting windowThe length zone within which cutting is permitted.

LowerLower limit for the cutting zone. The lower limit will be:Length-class length + possible extra length + value in thebox Lower (the value can be negative).Upper

Upper limit for the cutting zone.

The upper limit will be: Length-class length + possibleextra length + value in the box Upper (the value cannotbe negative).

Minimum top diameterSmallest permitted topdiameter for a log to beclassified in the price matrix.

Bucking conditionChoose under which conditions bucking is to be done:

• Buck alwaysStandard setting, calculation for bucking is alwaysdone if the matrix is permitted in the selected grade.

• Buck neverUsed if you wish to temporarily “switch off” a matrix,or have a matrix that is used to register manuallycut timber.

• Buck butt-log only, Buck butt-log neverCalculation for bucking made for butt log only or forall logs except butt log if the matrix is permitted inthe selected grade.

GradeClick so that the box shows 1 in those grades for which the matrix isvalid.

• If you apply VMR 87 (falling grades): A higher grade may be includedin a lower grade when the bucking computer estimates the price of anindividual log.

• If you apply VMR 95 (specific grades): Only the grade or gradesstated in the price matrix are allowed to be included in the priceestimate for an individual log.

Select speciesAll matrices in selectedspecies are shown in thetable.

Administration

Other Variables

Color marking

Select:

41.B.3 Limited change in bucking instructions, Other variables

41.B.3 41. Bucking / Logging contract B. Description 3. Limited change in bucking instructions, Other variables


Show


Administration

Other Variablers

Color marking

Color marking

Edit

PricematrixTree speciesTree species 1

142 162 182 202 222 242 262 282 302 322 342 362

Pricematrix 1

340

370

400

430

460

490

520

550

Color 1

Color 2

Color 3

Ok

Cancel

Select tree speciesSelect price matrixChoose among the matrices ofthe selected species

Select:

Mark all boxesClick here to mark all boxes inthe table

Mark a length classClick in one of the boxes tomark all boxes in the lengthclass.

Mark diameter classClick in one of the boxes tomark all boxes in the diameterclass.

Mark diameter classClick in the arrow boxes tomark all boxes in a diameterclass.

Mark a length classClick in the arrow boxes tomark all boxes in a lengthclass.

Mark an individual boxClick in the box to mark it.

Select an areaClick the screen and drag obliquely downto the right to mark a particular area of thetable.

Select color markingClick so that the box(es) are ticked.Press OK. All marked boxes will nowget this color marking.

41.B.4 Limited change in bucking instructions, Color marking

41.B.441. Bucking / Logging contract B. Description 4. Limited change in bucking instructions, Color marking

Save and exit Exit Save in Aptdirectlry

Show


41.C.1 New logging contract1 In Operating mode: Click Show, Settings,

Bucking and Logging contract.

2 Click Create new.

Enter the name

3 Click Name.

4 Click the letters to write the name, thenclick Enter.

Choose bucking file

5 You can choose one of the bucking filessaved in the bucking computer. You can alsoimport a bucking file from an external unit,eg, diskette, PC-card or external hard disk.This is how you choose a bucking file savedin the bucking computer:

6 Click Bucking file.

7 Choose bucking file by clicking it.

8 Click OK.

2

7

41.C Proceed as follows41.C 41. Bucking / Logging contract C. Proceed as follows

3

6

§ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 + ´

Tab Q W E R T Y U I O P Å ¨ Del

Caps A S D F G H J K L Ö Ä Enter

Shift < Z X C V B N M , . - Shift

Space

Caps Lock:

4

Bucking 1.aptBucking 2.aptBucking 3.aptBucking 4.aptBucking 5.aptBucking 6.aptBucking 7.aptBucking 8.apt

Cancel

Ok

8

Shift

Logging contract


Create new

Modify

Changes in LoggCon

Export LoggCon.


Keyboard<- Delete character.

Del Delete all text.

Shift Capital letter.

Caps Shift locking key. Capital letters will be typedwhen the LED Caps Lock lights. Small letterswill be typed when the LED Caps Lock is off.

Enter Exits and saves entered data, switches off thekeyboard and returns to the previous function.

FACTS



Ok

Cancel


Name

Import Apt-file

Create Pri-file



Bucking method


1 This is how you choose a bucking file savedin an external unit:Click on Import Apt-file.

2 Click on the unit of choice, eg, diskette orPC-card.

3 Click on the bucking file of choice.

4 Click OK.

Alter in bucking file

5 If you need to edit other data in the buckingfile, eg, administrative data, it is anadvantage to do this before beginning thelogging contract.

6 A limited number of variables can be editedsimply by clicking on Limited change ofApt-file. How this is done is described insection 41.C.4.

7 Major changes can be made by clicking onExtensive change of Apt-file. Programmodule OptimizationBuilder will then becalled. The manual for OptimizationBuilderis included as an appendix to this manual.

Select bucking method

8 Click Bucking method.

9 Select bucking method by clicking on theright method.

10 Click OK.

11 Click OK.

12 The name of the logging contract is nowvisible here, and also which bucking filesand production files that apply.

13 Any alterations made while felling is inprogress are also shown here.

11

8

6

Value Bucking

Demand Bucking

Cancel

Ok

FormVal

9

10

Cancel

Drive 1

Drive 3

Drive 2

Drive 4

Buck1.aptBuck2.aptBuck3.apt

Cancel

Ok

2

3

4

12

13 Shift

Logging contract


Create new

Modify

Changes in LoggCon

Export LoggCon.


41.C.141. Bucking / Logging contract C. Proceed as follows 1. New logging contract

1



Ok

Cancel


Name

Import Apt-file

Create Pri-file



Bucking method

7


Activate saving of PRI-file

1 Pri is a file format for saving productionstatistics at log level according to theStanForD standard.

The file is used to export data to an externalPC for further processing. The file grows insize for each log and accordingly there is alimit for how big the file can become beforeit must be ended or partly ended.

2 Click on Create PRI-file...

3 ...so that the box becomes marked.

2

41.C.1 41. Bucking / Logging contract C. Proceed as follows 1. New logging contract

3



Ok

Cancel


Name

Import Apt-file

Create Pri-file



Bucking method


41.C.2 Modify loggingcontract1 In Operating mode: Click Show, Settings,


2 Click Modify.

Alter bucking method

3 Click Bucking method.

4 Click the bucking method that you select.

5 Click OK.

6 You can also choose direct a new buckingmethod from the list.


Change bucking file

8 Note that should the new buckinginstructions differ so much from the initialinstructions that the existing production filecannot be used then a new production filewill be created.

9 Click Swap buckingfile.

10 Click the bucking file that you select.

11 Click OK.

12 Click OK.

Modify bucking file

13 A limited number of variables can be editedsimply by clicking on Limited change ofApt-file. How this is done is described insection 41.C.4.

14 Major changes can be made by clicking onExtensive change of Apt-file. How this isdone is described in section 67.

Value BuckingDemand Bucking

Cancel

Ok

3

4

5

FormVal

Bucking 1.aptBucking 2.aptBucking 3.aptBucking 4.aptBucking 5.aptBucking 6.aptBucking 7.aptBucking 8.apt

Cancel

Ok

10

11

9

13

712

41. Bucking / Logging contract C. Proceed as follows 2. Modify logging contract 41.C.2

2

6

Shift

Logging contract


Create new

Modify

Changes in LoggCon

Export LoggCon.



Ok

Swap bucking file




Partly end PRI-file



Extensive change of Apt-file14


41.C.3 Partly end an object1 The production file and any PRI-file can be

partly ended to enable evaluation ofproduction during ongoing bucking.

Because the PRI-file, otherwise than theprd-file, grows in size for each bucked trunkit may be necessary at regular intervals topartly end it in order to limit the size of thefile.

2 lick on Partly end production to partly endthe prd-file and possibly the pri-file.

3 lick on Partly end PRI-file to partly endthe pri-file only.

3

2

41. Bucking / Logging contract C. Proceed as follows 3. Partly end an object41.C.3


Ok

Swap bucking file




Partly end PRI-file





41.C.4 Shift logging contract1 In Operating mode: Click Show, Settings,


2 Click Shift.

3 Click Name.

4 Click the logging contract that you wish toshift to.

5 Click OK.

6 You can also choose direct another loggingcontract from the list.

7 In this box you can see current data for theselected logging contract.

8 Click OK.3

8Ok

Cancel

Select logging contract

41.C.441. Bucking / Logging contract C. Proceed as follows 4. Shift logging contract

10

2

CreatedApt-filePrd-file

Changes in LoggCon

Name:

OBJ_01OBJ_02OBJ_03OBJ_04OBJ_05

Cancel

Ok

4

6

712

5

Shift

Logging contract

Name:Create:Apt-File:Prd-File:

Create new

Modify

Changes in LoggCon

Export LoggCon.



41.C.5 Limited change ofbucking file1 In Operating mode: Click Show, Settings,

Bucking and Logging contract. 1Click Modify or Create new.

2 Then click Limited change of Apt-file.

Administration

3 If required, click on Show and Administra-tion to display the Administration data.

4 Using the arrow keys, select the line thatyou wish to edit.

5 Click Edit.

6 Using the keyboard, delete old text/typenew text (see FACTS box). Click ENTERwhen ready.


§ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 + ´



Space

Caps Lock:






FACTS

3

4

5

6

41. Bucking / Logging contract C. Proceed as follows 5. Limited change of bucking file41.C.5


Site number

Marking for cutting

Comparment number

Lot number

Organization

Region

District

Working team

Wood pile

Subcontractor

Subcont. Code

Subcont. Name

Entrep. Address

Buyer

Vendor

Contract number


Show

Administration

Edit

Updatefrom

template

Showtemplate


Use the template

1 Often the same data need to be entered intoseveral different bucking instructions. Atemplate is available to facilitate suchoperations. Proceed as follows:

2 Click on Show template.


4 Click on Edit.

5 Using the keyboard, delete old text/typenew text (see FACTS box). Click ENTERwhen ready.

6 Continue with all the fields that you wish toedit in the same easy way.

7 Click on OK.

8 When you have bucking instructions thatyou wish to edit with data in the template:Click on Update from template.

9 Data in the template are entered into thebucking instructions.

Observe that only empty fields in thebucking instructions will be programmedfrom the template.

Tab Q W E R T Y U I O P Å ¨ Del5

§ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 + ´



Space

Caps Lock:






FACTS

2

3

47

8

41. Bucking / Logging contract C. Proceed as follows 5. Limited change of bucking file 41.C.5


Site number

Marking for cutting

Comparment number

Lot number

Organization

Region

District

Working team

Wood pile

Subcontractor

Subcont. Code

Subcont. Name

Entrep. Address

Buyer

Vendor

Contract number


Show

Administration

Edit

Updatefrom

template

Showtemplate

Cancel

Site number

Marking for cutting

Comparment number

Lot number

Organization

Region

District

Working team

Wood pile

Subcontractor

Subcont. Code

Subcont. Name

Entrep. Address

Buyer

Vendor

Contract number

Edit

Ok


Other variables

1 Click on Show and Other variables so thatOther variables are shown.

2 Select Species.


4 Click on Edit.

5 Click on the box for the data you wish toedit.

6 Select an option (Bucking conditions) ortype a number. Click on OK.

7 Click on the boxes for the grade setting thatyou wish to edit. The value shifts between 1and 0 for each click.


1

3

4

Buck always

Buck never

Buck butt-log only

Buck butt-log never

Cancel

Ok

0

7 8 9 <=

4 5 6 +

1 2 3 -

0 C Cancel

Ok

Max: 255Min: 0

5

6

6

2

7

8

41. Bucking / Logging contract C. Proceed as follows 5. Limited change of bucking file41.C.5

Other Variables

EditPricematrix Min Top DiamCutting windowBucking condition Grade



Matrix 3 100 -2/4 Buck never 101

Matrix 4 0 2/4 Buck never 1111

Tree speciesTree species 1


Show

Bucking condition

Min Top Diam

Lower cutting window

Uppercutting window

Buck always

Ok

Cancel

Grade

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

50

2

5

Tree species 1/Matrix1


Color marking

1 Click on Show and Color marking so thatOther data are shown.

2 Select Species.

3 Select Price matrix in the selected species.

Mark individual box in the color matrix

4 Click on the box that you wish to mark.

Mark all boxes in the color matrix

5 Click on the box at the top left of the matrixheader.

Mark a diameter class in the color matrix

6 Click on the up and down arrows or ...

7 ... click on the diameter value in the head ofthe column.

Mark a length class in the color matrix

8 Click on the left and right arrows or ...

9 ... click on the length class value at the leftend of the line.

Mark an optional area in the color matrix

10 Click and hold the right uppermost value inthe area that you wish to mark ...

11 ... and pull across the screen obliquely downto the left.

Change color marking

12 Click on Edit.

13 Click on the color boxes to be marked, thusmaking ticks in the small box.

14 Click on OK.

1

6

12

Color 1

Color 2

Color 3

Ok

Cancel

3

5

8

2

7

9

4

14

142 162 182 202 222 242 262 282 302 322 342 362

340

370

400

430

460

490

520

550

11

10

13

41. Bucking / Logging contract C. Proceed as follows 5. Limited change of bucking file 41.C.5

Color marking

Edit

PricematrixTree speciesTree species 1

142 162 182 202 222 242 262 282 302 322 342 362

Pricematrix 1

340

370

400

430

460

490

520

550

Save and exit Exit Save in Aptdirectlry

Show


41.C.6 Exit a logging contract1 In Operating mode: Click Show, Settings,


2 Click Modify.

Partly close a logging contract

3 Click Partly close production. Bothproduction file (. prd) and possibly PRI-fil (.pri) end partly.

4 Click OK.

Partly close PRI-file

5 Click Partly close PRI-file. Only the PRI-file is partly ended. The production file isnot influenced.

6 Click Ok.

Close a logging contract

7 Click Close logging contract

8 Click OK.

3

5

2

Shift

Logging contract

Name:Create:Apt-File:Prd-File:

Create new

Modify

Changes in LoggCon

Export LoggCon.


Production partly ended.

Ok

Production ended.

Ok

4

8

41.C.6 41. Bucking / Logging contract C. Proceed as follows 6. Exit a logging contract


Ok

Swap bucking file




Partly end PRI-file




7

6


42.A SummaryIn this function you program the length selection keysof the keypads so that the correct length and pricematrix is selected when you press the length selectionkey.

Manual length

Set length keys Length searchtolerance

Link a particular pricematrix and a particularlength in the matrix to

length key

Indicate tolerance forlength search by

computer

42. Bucking / Manual length 42

42 Manual length

Each length selection key can be programmedindividually for each species so that:• a predetermined price matrix, for example

pulpwood, is selected when the key is pressed (oncondition that the selected matrix is valid for theselected grade).

• a certain length is chosen in the selected pricematrix.

Having pressed a length selection key the computersearches for the selected length in the selected pricematrix. You can here define how big a deviation maybe from the selected length for the length to beaccepted.

42.A.1 Programming the keysProgramming of function keys is made in two otherprograms/program modules in addition to the programmodule Setting Manual selection:

DCLIn the DCL program, which is a separate program andnot included in the standard program of the buckingcomputer, programming is made of functions thatcontrol the harvester head. The functions can forexample be “Feed forward”, “Feed reverse” or “Saw”.Exactly which valves and other control devices areused when operating the functions are defined in theDCL program.Coupling between function and function key on thekeypads can also be programmed here, but suchprogramming is normally done in program moduleSettings Keys.

Settings KeysCoupling between function and function key ismade in the program module Settings Keys (seesection 31). The machine operator has an opportunityhere to adapt the keypads to individual preferencesregarding location of the functions.

DCL

Separate program forprogramming functionsof the harvester head

SettingsKeys

Couple function tofunction key


Buckinginstructions

Manuallenght

Bucking

Bucking


42.B Description

Settings manual length sel

Select tree spec SPRUCE Tolerance length seek 00

Key No Pm No Length

1

2

3

4

5

6

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Select tree speciesThe length keys can be programmedindividually for each species. Youchoose here the species that youwish to program.

It is an advantage if species in thevarious bucking instructions arearranged in the same order.

Numbers of the keysUp to 20 different keys can beprogrammed. Each key can beprogrammed individually for eachspecies.

Which key number is to be coupled tothe respective key in the basemachine is not determined here, it isdone in the DCL-programming (seesection 42.A.1).

Price matrix numberChoose among the price matricesavailable for the selected species.

If you choose “First to come” (indicatedby 0) the program searches for theprogrammed length in the price matricesthat are permitted in the selected grade.The program searches in the pricematrices in the order (from top tobottom) that the matrices are arrangedin the matrix overview (see section 67)and chooses the matrix that first has arelevant length.

Tolerance length seekOn selecting the key, thecomputer searches for theselected length in the selectedprice matrix.

Searching is made from theentered length to enteredlength + the value in the boxLength tolerance search.

Example:

Length value: 310

Length tolerance search: 10

Searching for the right length inthe matrix is made from 310 to320.

42.B 42. Bucking / Manual length B. Description

Scroll up or downClick the arrow boxes toscroll up or down in the list ofkeys.

LengthWhen a length is to be selected a tableis shown with the lengths that arepermitted in the selected price matrix.

Price matrix 1 will be shown if no pricematrix is selected (0). Another pricematrix can be selected if desired.

Select Price MatrixPM1

Cancel

Ok

370

400

430

460

490

520

550


Settings manual length sel

SPRUCE Tolerance length seek 00

Key No Pm No Length

1

2

3

4

5

6

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1 In Operating mode: Click Show, Settings,Bucking and Manual length.

2 If it is the wrong species: Click Choosespecies.

3 Click the species of choice.

4 Click OK.

5 If Tolerance length seek is incorrect: Clickthe box Tolerance length seek.

6 Enter desired value. Click OK.

7 Click the key number that you wish toprogram. A red frame will thus appeararound the boxes Pm no. and Length on thesame line.

8 Click the box Pm no.

9 The price matrices that you can choose arenow shown. Click the price matrix ofchoice. The choice “First to come” isexplained in the FACTS box below.

10 Click OK.

11 Click again on the same key number thatyou chose in item 7 above.

12 Click the box Length.

13 Permitted lengths will now be shown for theprice matrix that you have selected. Select alength and click OK.

14 If you selected “First to come” or no matrixat all, the first matrix in the list will beshown. Change price matrix if desired byclicking on Select Price Matrix.


First to comePM 1PM 2PM 3PM 4

Cancel

Ok

3

7

8

11

10

9

5

13

Species 1Species 2Species 3Species 4Species 5

Cancel

Ok4

42. Bucking / Manual length C. Proceed as follows 42.C

2

12

Select tree spec

First to comeIf you choose “First to come” the programsearches for the programmed length in the pricematrices that are permitted in the selected grade.The program searches in the price matrices inthe order (from top to bottom) that the matricesare arranged in the matrix overview (see section67) and chooses the matrix that first has arelevant length.

FACTS

Select Price MatrixPM1

Cancel

Ok

370

400

430

460

490

520

550

14


53.C Proceed as follows ____________________ 1553.C.1 Choose prd-fil, operator and volume

type ____________________________ 1553.C.2 Show and print production data ______ 1653.C.3 Create a sum file _________________ 1653.C.4 Distribution level __________________ 17

54 Production extensive ___________ 1854.A Overview _____________________________ 18

55 Control measuring _____________ 1955.A Overview _____________________________ 19

55.B Description ___________________________ 2055.B.1 Production control_________________ 2055.B.2 Control trunk _____________________ 21

56 Operations follow-up ___________ 2256.A Overview_____________________________ 22

56.B Description___________________________ 2356.B.1 Definitions of time _________________ 2356.B.2 Predate, postdate _________________ 2556.B.3 Select extent of the report __________ 2656.B.4 Settings _________________________ 2756.B.5 Open and save drf files_____________ 2856.B.6 Identity, time, production, statusline ___ 2956.B.7 Maintenance of database ___________ 3056.B.8 Example of printout _______________ 31

56.C Proceed as follows ____________________ 3256.C.1 Activate operations follow-up and show

report dialogue, set the stop times ____ 3256.C.2 Predating, postdating ______________ 3256.C.3 Operations follow-up report _________ 3356.C.4 Save and open drf file ______________ 3556.C.5 Maintenance of database ___________ 35

Contents

51. Show trunk profileShow optional trunk profile intable or chart.

52. Settings trunk profileMake settings for and activatecollection of trunk profiles.

53. Production simpleA quick overview of production.

Results

55. Results / Contents

5. Results 54. Production extensiveLink to program moduleProductionReport where theproduction result can be presented ina variety of different ways.

55. Control measuringMake a control measuring ofproduction during an optional sectionof a felling. The result will be aproduction file that can be displayed,exported and printed out in a normalmanner.

56. Operation follow-upThe operations follow-up is anexcellent aid in documenting thevarious activities of each felling object.

Machine Bucking Results System

Show trunkprofile

Settingstrunk profile

Productionsimple

Productionextensive

Controlmeasure

Operationfollow-up

5. Results ________________________ 1

51 Show trunk profiles ____________ 551.A Overview _____________________________ 5

51.A.1 Table mode ______________________ 551.A.2 Chart mode ______________________ 5

51.B Description ___________________________ 651.B.1 Open, show and print out trunk profiles 651.B.2 Settings _________________________ 7

51.C Proceed as follows ____________________ 851.C.1 Open, show and print out trunk profiles 851.C.2 Set max. length, max. diameter and

auto mode _______________________ 9

52. Settings trunk profile ___________ 1052.A Overview _____________________________ 10

52.A.1 Identity _________________________ 1052.A.2 Settings _________________________ 10

52.B Description ___________________________ 11

52.C Proceed as follows ____________________ 1252.C.1 Give the file a name and consecutive

number _________________________ 1252.C.2 Determine interval ________________ 1252.C.3 Activate forced cut ________________ 1252.C.4 Activate trunk profiles ______________ 12

53 Production simple _____________ 1353.A Overview _____________________________ 13

53.A.1 Settings _________________________ 1353.A.2 Show ___________________________ 13

53.B Description ___________________________ 14


5 5. Results / Contents


55. Results / Index

Index

AActivate forced cut _____________________________ 12Activate operations follow-up _____________________ 32Activate trunk profiles ___________________________ 12

CChart mode __________________________________ 5Choose prd-fil, operator and volume type ____________ 15Control measuring _____________________________ 19

Desription _________________________________ 20Overview __________________________________ 19

Control trunk _________________________________ 21Create a sum file ______________________________ 16

DDefinitions of time _____________________________ 23Determine interval _____________________________ 12Distribution level _______________________________ 17

GGive the file a name and consecutive number _________ 12

IIdentity ______________________________________ 10Identity, time, production, statusline ________________ 29

MMaintenance of database ________________________ 30

OOpen and save drf files _________________________ 28Open, show and print out trunk profiles _____________ 6, 8Operations follow-up ___________________________ 22

Description ________________________________ 23Overview __________________________________ 22Proceed as follows __________________________ 32

Operations follow-up report ______________________ 33

PPostdate ____________________________________ 25Postdating ___________________________________ 32Predate _____________________________________ 25Predating ____________________________________ 32Production control _____________________________ 20Production extensive ___________________________ 18

Overview __________________________________ 18Production simple _____________________________ 13


SSave and open drf file ___________________________ 35Select extent of the report ________________________ 26Set max. length, max. diameter and auto mode ________ 9Settings _____________________________________ 7, 10, 13, 27

Settings trunk profile ___________________________ 10Description ________________________________ 11Overview __________________________________ 10Proceed as follows __________________________ 12

Show _______________________________________ 13Show and print production data ___________________ 16Show trunk profiles ____________________________ 5


TTable mode __________________________________ 5


Show trunkprofile



Result

51 Show trunk profiles51.A OverviewIf you wish, the bucking computer will continuallysave data on a selection of processed trunks, eg everyfifth or tenth trunk. These data are recorded in thetrunk profile register.In the “Show trunk profiles” function you can viewoptionally saved trunk profiles either in the form of atable or a chart.Setting and activating of the trunk profile function ismade in program module 52 “Settings trunkprofiles”.The trunk profiles can also be transferred to anexternal computer system for statistical processing.

51.A.1 Table modeThe table mode gives a detailed description of eachlog in the trunk that is recorded. In addition to length,diameter and volumetric values there is alsoinformation regarding length/diameter class in theselected price matrix, and also the grade assigned tothe log.

51.A.2 Chart modeThe chart shows very clearly the length/diameter ratioof the logs and also the length and grade of the logs.In the chart mode various several log profiles can beentered simultaneously to enable comparisons withone another.

Show trunkprofiles

Graphical presentation of:trunk length/dia.

log lengthsgrades

Shows for each log:length, diameter

matrixlength/dia. class

volumecutting code

Table Chart

51. Results / Show trunk profiles 51

Bucking

Productionsimple

Productionextensive

Controlmeasure

Operationfollow-up


550500450400350300250200150100

500

0 500 1000 1500 2000

Trunk length (cm)

Dia

met

er (

mm

)

523 cm404 cm

403 cm301 cm

301 cm300 cm

Trunk prof.CutQu1Qu2Qu3

TableShow data of thetrunk in table form.

ChartShow data of thetrunk or trunks inchart form.

Open trunk fileClick here to choosethe trunk file to beshown.

Add trunk fileAfter opening a trunk file you can open additionaltrunk files here. The various trunks are entered intothe chart below and can then easily be compared.

CloseCloses the functionShow trunk profile.

Trunk profile chart

Cutting point Log length Trunk profile

Shows grades of thevarious logs

Length Log length

Diam. ob Top diameter on bark

Diam. ub Top diameter under bark

Grade Indicates which of the gradesthat has been selected.

Pm Indicates which price matrix ischosen by the computer fromthe matrices permitted underthe selected grade.

Lth. class States which Length class fromthe selected price matrix that ischosen for a log.

Dia. class States which Diameter classfrom the selected price matrixthat is chosen for a log.

Volume Volume of the log in tenths ofdm3. Eg, Volume 5180 meansthat the volume is 518.0 dm3,ie, 0.518 m3.

Cut code Automatic felling is indicated by0. If the automatic felling isinterrupted for any reason theoperator can manually choosecut code for the current forced-cut cause.

The operator may choose oneof the following cut codes:

Cut code Cause

1 Rot

2 Damage

3 Sharp bend

4 Long bend

5 Timber grade

6 Pulpwood

7 Top break

8 Miscellaneous

51.B Description

51.B.1 Open, show and print out trunk profiles

51. Results / Show trunk profiles B. Description51.B

Show previous trunk profile

Settings diagramsSettings for max. diameter, max. lengthand auto ON/OFF (see section 51.B.2)

Show next trunk profile

Print outPrint out the trunk profile via the printer.

Open

Previous

Settings

Add

Next

Print

Dia.class

Table Chart

Length Diam.ob Diam.ub Grade Pm Lgth.class DIam.class Volume Cut code

1 523 276 262 4 3 8 6 283 3

2 404 244 232 2 3 4 4 1690 0

3 403 204 193 2 2 4 2 1170 0

4 301 146 137 2 -1 1 1 621 0

5 301 104 97 2 -1 1 1 337 0

6 300 65 59 2 -1 1 1 133 0

Total 2232 6754

CloseFile

Trunkfile: STM0004 Tree species: Species 1


Length Diam.ob Diam.ub Grade

1 523 276 262 4

2 404 244 232 2

3 403 204 193 2

4 301 146 137 2

5 301 104 97 2

6 300 65 59 2

Total 2232

Max diameter (mm):

Max length (cm):

Auto:

Ok

Cancel

500

3000

Maximum diameterMaximum diameter of the vertical axisof the diagram (if the box Auto, seebelow, is not ”crossed”).

Maximum lengthMaximum diameter of the vertical axisof the diagram (if the box Auto, seebelow, is not ”crossed”).

AutoWhen the function is ON (ie, a “cross” inthe box) the scale of the diagram axesare automatically adapted to the trunkprofile shown.

51.B.2 Settings

51. Results / Show trunk profile B. Description 2. Settings 51.B.2

Table ChartFile


Open

Previous

Settings

Add

Next

Print


Table Chart


1 523 276 262 4 3 8 6 283 3

2 404 244 232 2 3 4 4 1690 0

3 403 204 193 2 2 4 2 1170 0

4 301 146 137 2 -1 1 1 621 0

5 301 104 97 2 -1 1 1 337 0

6 300 65 59 2 -1 1 1 133 0

Total 2232 6754

CloseFile


51.C.1 Open, show and printout trunk profiles1 In Operating mode: Click Show, Settings,

Result and Show trunk profile.

Open optional trunk profile

2 The latest entered trunk profile is shownautomatically. If you wish to show any othertrunk profile, click File.

3 Click Open. Open optional trunk profile file(the files have the suffix .stm).

4 The trunk profile can be shown as a table orchart: To choose click Table or Chart.

Add (open) additional trunk profiles

5 Click File.

6 Click Add. Open optional trunk profile file.

Select the previous or the next trunk profile

7 Click File.

8 Click Previous or Next.

Print out trunk profile

9 Click File.

10 Click Print.


3

51. Results / Show trunk profiles C. Proceed as follows51.C

550500450400350300250200150100

500

0 500 1000 1500 2000

Trunk length (cm)

Dia

met

er (

mm

)

523 cm404 cm

403 cm301 cm

301 cm300 cm

Trunk pr.CutQu2Qu3Qu4

2 4

4

975

8

10

6

8

Table mode

Chart mode

Table Chart CloseFile

Open

Previous

Settings

Add

Next

Print

Trunkfile: STMF0004 Tree species: SPRUCE


Max diameter (mm):

Max length (cm):

Auto:

Ok

Cancel

500

3000

0

7 8 9 <=

4 5 6 +

1 2 3 -

0 CCancel

Max: 255Min: 0

5

51.C.2 Set max. length, max.diameter and auto mode1 In Operating mode: Click Show, Settings,


2 Click File.

3 Click Settings.

4 To alter Max. length or Max. diameter:Click one of the boxes.

5 Type the new value. Click OK.

6 To switch the Auto function ON or OFF:Click the Auto box.

7 A cross is visible in the box when thefunction is ON.

8 Click OK.

3

2

4

6

8

7

51. Results / Show trunk profiles C. Proceed as follows 2. Set max. length, max. diameter and auto mode 51.C.2

Open

Previous

Settings

Add

Next

Print

Ok

Table Chart


1 523 276 262 4 3 8 6 283 3

2 404 244 232 2 3 4 4 1690 0

3 403 204 193 2 2 4 2 1170 0

4 301 146 137 2 -1 1 1 621 0

5 301 104 97 2 -1 1 1 337 0

6 300 65 59 2 -1 1 1 133 0

Total 2232 6754

CloseFile




Show trunkprofile


52.A OverviewEach time a trunk is processed a trunk file is createdand you can always view the profile of the latestprocessed trunk (function “Cutlist” when buckingcomputer is in the operating mode).To save trunk profiles in the trunk profile register youmust activate the collection function and make certainsettings. You do it in this function “Settings trunkprofile”.Use program module 51 “Show trunk profile” toshow and print saved trunk profiles.

Settings trunkprofile

IntervalAuto collection ON/OFF

Cut code ON/OFF

NameNumber

Identity Settings

52 Results / Setting trunk profiles52

52. Settings trunk profile

52.A.1 IdentityTrunk profiles are saved in files with the suffix .stm.The name consists of four permanent characters and afour-digit consecutive number.

52.A.2 SettingsYou can determine here at which intervals the trunksare to be recorded and whether a cut code must begiven for manual felling. This is where you alsoactivate the function Trunk profiles.

Bucking

Productionsimple

Productionextensive

Controlmeasure

Operationfollow-up


Cut codeWhen the function is ON (ie, a “cross” inthe box) you must notify a cause whenyou break the automatic felling to makea manual cut. The following options areavailable:

Cut code Cause

1 Rot

2 Damage

3 Charp bend

4 Long bend

5 Timber grade

6 Pulpwood

7 Top break

9 Miscellaneous

IntervalThe value indicates how oftenprocessed trunks are to be read in as atrunk profile. If the value is 10, forexample, then every tenth trunk will berecorded in the trunk profile register.

Auto collectionWhen the function is ON (ie, a “cross” inthe box) then automatic collection oftrunk profile data will be made at theintervals you have chosen above.

Show trunk profileActivate program module51 “Show trunk profile”.

52.B Description

Name/consecutive number of trunk profile

The name consists of two groups each with four charactersand the suffix .stm showing that the file contains a trunk file.

You can choose the first four characters yourself (Name:box). The day’s date will be used if you do not choose aname yourself. The last four characters comprise theconsecutive number of the trunk profile (No.: box). Here youcan choose the first number for the consecutive series. Theconsecutive number steps up for each registered trunkprofile.

Name Consecutive number

Name0000.stm

52. Results / Setting trunk profiles B. Description 52.B

Setting Trunk profiles

Name:

No:

Interval:

Auto collection:

Cut code:

Show trunkprofile

XXXX

38

10

Current trunk profile: XXXXXXXX.stm


Settings Trunk profile1 In Operating mode: Click Show, Settings,


52.C.1 Give the file a nameand consecutive number

2 Type the file name (4 characters), seeFACTS box.

3 Click No.: to alter the consecutive number.

4 Enter the start number for the new series ofconsecutive numbers. Click OK.

52.C.2 Determine interval

5 Click Interval.

6 Enter the interval at which the trunk profilesare to be saved. If you type 10, for example,then every tenth trunk will be recorded inthe trunk profile register. Click OK.

52.C.3 Activate forced cut

7 Click Cut code to mark the small box (SeeFACTS box).

52.C.4 Activate trunk profiles

8 Click Auto collection to mark the smallbox.

52.C.1

5

2

7


8

Trunk profile name

The name consists of two groups each with fourcharacters and the suffix .stm showing that the filecontains a trunk file.

You can choose the first four characters yourself(Name: box). The day’s date will be used if you do notchoose a name yourself. The last four characterscomprise the consecutive number of the trunk profile(No.: box). Here you can choose the first number forthe consecutive series. The consecutive number stepsup for each registered trunk profile.

Name Consecutive number

Name0000.stm

FACTS Forced cut code

When the function is ON (ie, a “cross” in the box)you must notify a cause when you break theautomatic felling to make a manual cut. Thefollowing options are available:

Cut code Cause

1 Rot

2 Damage

3 Charp bend

4 Long bend

5 Timber grade

6 Pulpwood

7 Top break

9 Miscellaneous

FACTS

52. Results / Show trunk profiles C. Proceed as follows52.C

0

7 8 9 <=

4 5 6 +

1 2 3 -

0 C Cancel

Ok

Max: 255Min: 0

4

3

6

Name:

No:

Interval:

Auto collection:

Cut code:

Show trunkprofile

XXXX

38

10

Current trunk profile: XXXXXXXX.stm


53 Production simple

Show production

Total production:Volume

Mean volumeProd./product group:

VolumeNumber of logs

Select operator:All operators

Current operatorSelect type of volume:

m3sobm3sub

Settings Show

53. Results/ Production simple 53


Show trunkprofile


Bucking

Productionsimple

Productionextensive

Controlmeasure

Operationfollow-up

53.A OverviewTo get a quick overview of current production youcan look here at major production data from thecurrent production file.However, you can only make limited settings hereand cannot view all of the production data. A morecomprehensive follow-up of production from optionalproduction files is available in program module 54Production extensive.

53.A.1 SettingsYou can select production file here, and choose toshow production for the current operator or alloperators, and also choose between the types ofvolume m3sub and m3sob.

53.A.2 ShowTotal production is shown here, and for the differentspecies. If the felling instructions include differentproduct groups then volumes and number of logs areindicated for the different product groups.


Choose production fileChoose among the production files inthe current felling project.

Joint operators –Current operatorChoose whether to show jointresult or result of the currentoperator.

Volume typeChoose the type of volume youwish to show in the result:

m3sob solid measure over bark

m3sub solid measure under bark

Total productionHere you can see the totalproduction so far, divided intodifferent species.

Production perproduction groupYou also get the productiondivided into different productgroups.

When programming thevarious price matrices you canlink each price matrix to aparticular product group, eg,TIMBER, PULPWOOD orLOGS.

53.B Description

Scroll

Print outPrint out production/distribution levelvia printer.

Show the entire tableScrolling function showing/concealing arrow keys forshowing the entire table. The keysreplace the scroll lists in thetable and assist when you use thepointer screen.

Current dataabout that shown in thetable.

53. Results / Production simple B. Description53.B

Selectprdfile

Volume type

Print

Operator

Create sumfile

Create sum fileCreates a sum file of all prd filesin the current logging contract.The sum file is given the name“avv.objektnamn”.psu.

Show

Production

Distribution level

Select Production orDistribution level

Distribution levelIn the bucking instructions it is possiblewith the aid of the distribution matrix(see section 67.B.16) to select justthose lengths/diameters that are indemand.

The distribution level is a measure ofhow well the desired distribution hasbeen accomplished. The distributionmatrix is compared with the log bill andthe result is shown there:

100% = complete agreement

0% = no agreement

Current production andbucking files

Scroll

Species/Matrix Distribution levelTrädslag 1/Matrix 1 89Species 2/Matrix 2 91Species 3/Matrix 3 94Species 4/Matrix 4 86

Production

File Prd-file: OBJ1.PrdApt-file: Apt1.AptShow

Distribution level in %

Species 1 Species 2 Species 3 Species 4 TotalNumber of treesTotal volumeAverage volumeGroup no 1VolumeNo of logsGroup no 2VolumeNo of logs

Scroll

Production

FileOperator: AllVolume type: m3fubPrd-file: OBJ_1

Show

Produktion


Select prdfile

Volume type

Print

1 In Operating mode: Click Show, Settings,Result and Show Production.

53.C.1 Choose prd-fil, opera-tor and volume type

Choose production fileThe current production file is shown when youopen program module Show Production.Proceed as follows if you wish to see anotherfile:

2 Click File.

3 Click the box Choose prdfile.

4 Click the production file you wish to show.

5 Click OK.

Choose operator

6 Click File.

7 Click the box Operator to choose betweenshowing joint data or data per operator.

8 Click All or Operator.

9 Click OK.

Select volume type

10 Click File.

11 Click the box Volume type to choose thetype of volume.

12 Click the type of volume that you choose.

13 Click OK.

2

3


53. Results / Production simple C. Proceed as follows 53.C

FormVal

Cancel

Ok

4

5

All operatorsOperator

Cancel

Ok

8

m3subm3sob

Cancel

Ok

11

7

OBJ_1.prdOBJ_2.prdOBJ_3.prdOBJ_4.prdOBJ_5.prd

9

13

12

610

Create sumfile

Operator


Scroll

Production


Show

Produktion


Selectprdfile

Volume type

Print

1

5

253.C.2 Show and printproduction data

Show the entire table

1 If the table containing production data is toobig for the screen then scroll bars willappear at the lower and right of the screen.

2 Click Scroll to make it easier to roll thetable.

3 Click the arrow boxes to roll the table indifferent directions.

Printing the table

4 Click File.

5 Click Print.

53.C.3 Create a sum file6 A sum file can be created that contains all

production files in the current loggingcontract.

7 Click on File.

8 Click on Create sum file.

9 The new file is given the name“Logg.contract name”.psu and can beselected by clicking on Settings and Selectprdfil.

4

3

Scroll

53. Results / Production simple C. Proceed as follows 2. Show and print production data53.C.2

Create sumfile

FormVal

Cancel

Ok

OBJ_1.prdOBJ_2.prdOBJ_3.prdOBJ_4.prdOBJ_5.prdAVVOBJ.psu

9

7

8

Operator


Scroll

Production


Show

Produktion


53.C.4 Distribution level1 The distribution level is a measure of how

well the distribution matrix has been fulfil-led. The distribution matrix is comparedwith the log bill and the result is shown as apercentage.

2 Click on Show...

3 … and then on Distribution level.

4 The distribution level for each species/matrix is shown in %. 100 % means that theaim of the distribution matrix is fulfilledcompletely.

2

53. Results / Production simple C. Proceed as follows 4. Distribution level 53.C.4

3

Scroll

Scroll

Species/Matrix Distribution levelSpecies 1/Matrix 1 89Species 2/Matrix 2 91Species 3/Matrix 3 94Species 4/Matrix 4 86

Prd-file: OBJ1.PrdApt-file: Apt1.Apt

4

Operator: AllVolume type: m3fubPrd-file: OBJ_1

Production

File Show

Production

File Show

Production

Distribution level

Distribution level in %


Link to program module ProductionReport. Themanual for ProductionReport is included as anappendix to this manual.In module ProductionReport you can get acomprehensive presentation of an optional productionfile. The production results can be presented in avariety of ways to suit varying requirements.The result can be divided per species or perassortment range. They can also be divided intoproduction groups or types of trunks that you havedefined in the felling instructions. In all of these casesthe results can be shown jointly for all operators orindividually for each operator.The log bill shows the results for each diameter/length class either as number of logs or as volumes.These values can also be obtained as percentagedistribution per length class. You also get volumesand number per length class and per diameter class,and percentage distribution between the diameterclasses and between the length classes.In overview of breast heights you get the number oftrunks and volumes for different diameter classesbased on diameter of the tree at breast height.

54 Production extensive

54.A Overview

54. Results / Production extensive54

Productionextencive

Production fileBucking fileHarvester

BuyerLatest calibration

Diameter calibrationLength calibration

IdentityCalibration

Productionresult

SpeciesMatrix

Product groupTrunk type

Log billBreast height


Show trunkprofile


Bucking

Productionsimple

Productionextensive

Controlmeasure

Operationfollow-up


With the aid of program module Control measuringyou can carry out the following:• Production control

Take out part of a felling operation and for this partobtain a production file containing all relevant data.This production file can be used, for example, forcontrol measuring of volumetric calculation by theharvester head.

• Control trunkMakes random selection of trunks that can be usedto check calculations of length, diameter andvolume.

55 Control measuring

55.A Overview

55. Results / Control measuring 55

Controlmeasuring

Production controlStart and end control

measuring

Print out cutting lists

Show the latestcontrol measuring

Show trunkprofile


Productionsimple

Productionextensive

Controlmeasure

Machine Result SystemBucking

Operationfollow-up

Control trunkDetermine the number

of control trunksNumbering of the trunks

Function ON/OFF


55.B Description

55.B.1 Production control

55. Results / Control measuring B. Description55.B

Start and stop controlmeasuringCurrent status is shown on thestatus line (Off/On)

Print out cutting listsPrint out all cutting lists createdso far from the controlmeasuring.

Latest production fileOpens the program moduleProduction scope (see section54) and opens the latestproduced production file fromcontrol measuring.

Settings production control

Start control measuring

End control measuring

Print cutting lists

Show latest prd-file from control

Status OffNumbers of trunks: -

Apply production controlApply control trunk

Control measuring

Select production controlCross the box to enable productioncontrol


55.B.2 Control trunkIn this function you define how control trunks areto be selected. Control trunks are selectedrandomly within a certain interval of trunks or asa certain number of trunks per day.

55.B.255. Results / Control measuring B. Description 2. Control trunk

Settings control trunk

Control trunk On/Off

Apply production controlApply control trunk

Control measuring

Control trunk numberThe trunk number can look likethis: C2005111100001.stm. Thenumber consists of a C, the datewhen the trunk was processedand a five-digit consecutivenumber. The consecutivenumber increases one step foreach trunk.

You decide here the number withwhich the consecutive numberseries begins.

The trunk profiles are saved infolder Dasa4\User\Cstm.

Select control trunkCross the box to use control trunk.

Control trunk number:

Control log number:

Interval:

Number of control trunks per day

Valid species

Number of control trunks inline

Show dialogue for log number

Lower DBH limit (mm)

Valid speciesThe permitted species can benumbered for example asfollows:

1 = species 1

2 = species 2

4 = species 3

8 = species 4

By adding the numbers it isdetermined which species arepermitted to become a controltrunk.

If for example species 1 andspecies 3 are permitted thenumber 1+4 = 5.

Number of controltrunks per dayThe number of control trunksthat are selected randomly perday. The number of trunks perday is calculated on the basis ofthe mean value of processing forthe latest 10 days.

Activate one of the followingfunctions. Type “0” for thefunction that is not activated.

Show dialogue for lognumberSelect at which log in the controltrunk that the message belowshall be shown.

Control trunk

OKReject

Lower DBH limit (mm)Lower limit in mm for breast-height diameter to enable atrunk to become a control trunk.

Control log numberThe log number consists of afour-digit consecutive number.

You decide here the number withwhich the consecutive numberseries begins.

IntervalThe computer randomly selectsone trunk within the interval thatyou enter here.

Number of consecutivetrunksWhen the computer has decidedthat the next trunks are to becontrol trunks then this numberof trunks will be felledconsecutively as control trunks.

When a control trunk is being processed the operatorreceives a message in the character window. He thenhas the option of accepting or rejecting the controltrunk.A reason must be given if the trunk is rejected.


56 Operations follow-up

56.A OverviewThe operations follow-up is an excellent aid indocumenting the various activities of each loggingcontract.The operations follow-up records the following data: • How much of the total machine time is productive

running time, and how much consists of interruptions,repairs, maintenance and moving time within eachobject.

• Total number of trunks and total volumes for variousspecies and also machine running time for:- optional object- optional operator within the object

Distinguishing between the data saved in operationsfollow-up and in production follow-up is important.In the production follow-up, described in section 53 and54, very detailed data concerning total volumes andvolumes per assortment range are saved in each loggingcontract. However, data concerning operating times andvarious interruptions in production are not recorded there.

Operationsfollow-up

Records productivetime and times for

various interruptionsRecords volumes and

numbers

56 56. Results / Operations follow-up


Show trunkprofile


Bucking

Productionsimple

Productionextensive

Controlmeasure

Operationfollow-up


56.B Description

56.B.1 Definitions of time

G0-timeG0 time is the basic time (productive time) that includes interruptions thatare shorter than the set short stop time. The normal value for a short stoptime is 1 – 5 minutes.

G15 timeG15 time is the basic time (productive time) that includes interruptions thatare shorter than the set stop time. The normal value for stop time is 15minutes. The operator must document an interruption that exceeds the stoptime before continued production is enabled.

G15B timeThe G15B time is the moving time for the machine within the object.

56.B56. Results / Operation s follow-up B. Description

Sum G0 time

Operatorlogs in Repairs Interruption

Stop less thanG15 time

Movingwithin the object

LunchNot working Operator logs out

Sum G15 time

Sum G0 time





Sum G15+G15B time

Sum G15 time

Sum G0 time






Sum of utilised timeThe sum of utilised time is the G15 time plus the G15B time plus the stopsand interruptions that occurred during the shift except interruptions “Notworking”.

Interruption for “Not working”Interruption, eg, for lunch. This is not counted as utilised time.

56.B.1 56. Results / Operations follow-up B. Description 1. Definitions of time

Sum of utilised time

Sum G15+G15B time

Sum G15 time

Sum G0 time





Sum of utilised time

Sum G15+G15B time

Sum G15 time

Sum G0 time






Operator: David




Predate

Ok

Operator: David




Postdate

Ok

Log out

State new stop time

+ +

- -

Ok

Cancel

13:37State new start time

+ +

- -

Ok

Cancel

10:15

56.B.2 Predate, postdate

When an operator begins his shift he has the option ofpredating the start of the shift. Predating may be made asfar back as the end of the preceding shift, however notmore than to 00:00 hours.

Observe that a predating can delete all or parts of apostdating that was made at the end of the preceding shift.

State a new starttime using the +and minus keys.

State one or more reasonsfor predating or postdating.

State a new stoptime using the +and minus keys.

When an operator ends his shift he has the option ofpostdating the end of the shift. The limit for predating is to24:00 hours:

56.B.256. Results / Operations follow-up B. Description 2. Predate, postdate

2002-05-02 16:30:11

Unaccounted interruption time: 20:22

00:00

00:00

00:00

00:00

00:00

00:00

00:00

00:00

00:00Ok


Repair

Waiting repair

Maintenance



Interruption

Not working


G15B Moving

CancelExit the system

Log in new operator

Log in new operatorA new operator logs in in thenormal way with the aid ofhis password.

Exit the systemCloses DASA4. Thecomputer returns toWindows mode.


mo ti we th fr sa su29 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2627 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Day´s date: 2002-05-14

OK

Cancel

may 2002

Select the entire object ora certain timeTick the box to limit the report to acertain time.

No tick in the box means that theentire selected logging contract willbe presented.

Select periodIf you have marked the box Use date:Select between which dates thereport is to apply.

Go to an earlier month Go to a later month

Click on the date that youchoose.

The day’s date

56.B.3 Select extent of the report

Select logging contractSelect an individual logging contract. Ifyou have selected a limited period youcan choose to see all logging contractsunder that period.

Date

Use date

Start date

End date

Cutting Object

All

OK Cancel

2002-05-14

2002-05-14

Hide ended

Conceal ended objectShow only the objects that arestarted but not yet ended.

56.B.3 56. Results / Operations follow-up B. Description 3. Select extent of the report


Page Setup BasicSettings

Page Header

Page Footer

OK Cancel

Page SetupBasic

OK Cancel

Operating Follow Up On/Off

Stop Time G15 (min)

Short Stop Time (min)

On

15

5

Settings, Printout Settings, Basic setting

File

56.B.4 Settings

Header and footer text on printoutType the text to be included as page headerand footer when printing out.

Short stop timeUsed to calculate the G0 time. G0time is productive time includingstops shorter than the short stoptime Normal value Short stop time: 1-5 min.

Stop time G15Used to calculate the G15 time. G15time is the productive time thatincludes interruptions that are shorterthan the set Stop time G15. Theoperator must document aninterruption that exceeds the stoptime before continued production isenabled.

Normal value Stop time G15 15minutes.

ON/OFFClick in the box to activateoperations follow-up.

56.B.456. Results / Operations follow-up B. Description 4. Settings

Open Report

Save

Print

Exit

Settings

Maintenanceof database

Show report dialogue On

Show report dialogueIf you activate this function (On) thereport dialogue will be displayed (seesection 56. B. 3) each time you openthe Operations follow-up function.


Open drf file Save drf file

56.B.5 Open and save drf filesAll data that is collected by the operations follow-up issaved in a database. Using the Report function (seesection 56. B. 3) you can select data from a particularperiod or from a particular logging contract.If you wish to export the report that you have selectedit must be saved to a file format (.drf) that can be sentand then read, eg, in an ordinary PC. You do this usingthe Save function.

All saved .drf files can also be opened again using theOpen function.

Observe that the displayed result can varydepending on whether you have selected alloperators or a single operator.

Select a drf fileMark and click OK to open adrf file.

Save a drf fileThe day’s date is preselected as filename. Ifyou wish you can type a name of your choice.Press OK to save. The files are saved in thefolder C:\Dasa4\User\Drf.

2002-04-09.drf

2002-04-12.drf

object 1.drf

object 2.drf

Showmessages

OK

object 3.drf Cancel

56.B.5 56. Results / Operations follow-up B. Description 5. Open and save drf files

Open Report

Save

Print

Exit

Settings

Maintenanceof database

File

Select catalogueSelect from which catalogue you wish to open the drf-file.The following two catalogues can be selected:

1 Logging contractdrf-files saved in the current logging contract will beshown.

2 User/drfdrf-files saved in folder Dasa4\User\Drf will be shown.

Select catalogueSelect the catalogue in which youwish to save the drf-file.

The following two catalogues can beselected:

1 Logging contractdrf-files saved in the currentlogging contract will be shown.

2 User/drfdrf-files saved in folderDasa4\User\Drf will be shown.

Logging contracts

Cancel

2002-04-09.drf

2002-04-12.drf

object 1.drf

object 2.drf

Showmessages

OK

.drf

Logging contracts


All times are counted in hours and minutes

G0 timeProductive time including stops shorter thanthe short stop time (Normal value for shortstop time: 1-5 min).

G15 timeProductive time that includes interruptionsthat are shorter than the set Stop time G15(Normal value of the stop time: 15 minutes).The operator must document an interruptionthat exceeds the stop time before continuedproduction is enabled.

G15B timeMoving time for the machine within theobject.

Utilised timeG15 time + G15B time + all interruptiontimes except “Not working”.

Technical degree of utilization (%)G15 time + G15B time / Utilised time.

Identity

Identity data that was filled in when the loggingcontract was specified. If you have chosen to showall logging contracts then only the data that iscommon to all objects will be shown.

Data cannot be altered in this image.

Production

Mean volume per trunk

56.B.6 Identity, time, production, statusline

56.B.656. Results / Operations follow-up B. Description 6. Identity, time, production, statusline

File IdentityTime

informationProduction

Operator

Delay time (hh:mm)

StatuslineShows the file or the period that is currentlydisplayed on the screen.

0:18

0:00

1:36

0:00

0:00

1:54

0:42

0:42

5:12

Repair

Repair Wait

Maintenance

Repair Harvester Head

Harvester Head Maintenance

Disturbance

Move Time

Not Work Time

Sum Delay Time

Compilation

David

Used Time (hh:mm)

Total Time - Not Work Time = 18:12

Total Time (hh:mm) 18:54

Basic Time (hh:mm)

G15-Time

(G0-Time)

G15B-Time

13:36

9:36

0:06

Operating disturbance

Technical usage (%)

(G15+G15B) / Used Time = 75,3

Time information

File IdentityTime

information Production

Drf-File nameGeneralSave Date

Start

Machine Number

Version

Apt-Identity

Apt File

Apt Date

Object Number

Marking

Area Number

Parcel Number

Object

Report Date: 2002-09-26 - 2002-09-29 Logging contract: Object_1

File IdentityTime

information Production

Operator David

Number of Trunks 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Total Volume m3fub 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Total Volume m3fpb 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Mean Volume m3fub 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Mean Volume m3fpb 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Number/G15 Volume /G15 m3fub Volume /G15 m3fpb

SPECIES 1SPECIES 2 SPECIES 3 SPECIES 4 SPECIES 5 SPECIES 6 Sum


Open Report

Save

Print

Exit

Settings

Maintenanceof data base

File

56.B.7 Maintenance of databaseShows all completed but not yet deleted loggingcontracts in the database for operations follow-up.Deletion is made in order of date and you can deletelogging contracts up to the date of the initial record ofan object that is not yet completed.

Select objectsSelect the objects where thedatabase for operationsfollow-up is to be deleted.Only objects that can bedeleted will be selected.

Notethat it is only logging contracts in the database foroperations follow-up that are deleted. The productionfiles that are saved in the logging contracts and thatcan be shown in the functions 53 Production simpleand 54 Production extensive are not deleted.

56.B.7 56. Results / Operations follow-up B. Description 7. Maintenance of database

Object 1Object 2Objckt 3Object 4Object 5

OK

Cancel

Remove from:2002-05-07

to:2002-05-12

Database (with projects in chronological order)

Logging contract 1, not closed

Logging contract 2, closed





Object 1, that is not ended, blocksthe possibility of ending projects 2,3 and 4.

Take care to really end your logging contracts.An old object that is not ended could block the possibility ofdeleting other completed objects.


56.B.8 Example of printout

56.B.856. Results / Operations follow-up B. Description 8. Example of printout

DWinApt

IdentitySave Date 2002-09-26 15:27:53 Object Number Obj1

Start 2002-09-26 12:56:58 Marking 12345

Maschine Number 123 Area Number 5467

Version X.X.X Parcel Number 147

Apt-identity Sawmill

Apt File Aptfile1.apt

Apt Date 2001-05-12 14:35:30

ProductionSpec.1 Spec. 2 Spec.3 Spec. 4 Spec. 5 Spec. 6 Sum

Number of Trunks 0 134 0 1 0 0 135

Total Volume m3fub 0 79,26 0 0,79 0 0 80,05

Total Volume m3fpb 0 88,66 0 0,87 0 0 89,53

Mean Volume m3fub 0 0,59 0 0,79 0 0 0,59

Mean Volume m3fpb 0 0,66 0 0,87 0 0 0,66

Number / G15 84

Volume / G15 m3fub 50,03

Volume / G15 m3fpb 55,95

Operator DavidDrf-File name 2002-09-26.drf

Time dataCompilationTotal Time 2:24

Used Time (hh:mm)

Total Time - Not work time = 2:24

Technical usage (%)

(G15+G15B) / Used time = 66,7

Basic TimeG15 Time 1:36

(G0 Time) 1:36

G15B Time 0:00

Delay TimeOperating disturbance

Repair 0:24

Repair Wait 0:12

Maintenance 0:00

Repair Harvester Head 0:00

Harvester Head Maintenance 0:00

Disturbance 0:12

Move Time 0:00

Not Work Time 0:00

Sum delay Time 0:48


56.C.1 Activate operationsfollow-up and show reportdialogue, set the stop times1 In the Operating mode: Click Show,

Settings, Results and Operations follow-up.

2 Click on OK, File, Settings and Basicsettings.

3 Click on Operating follow-up ON/OFFand Show report dialogue respectively.

4 Select ON or OFF and click on OK.

5 Click on Stop time G15 (min) and Shortstop time (min) respectively.

6 Click on the arrows to reduce or increasethe value. Click on OK.

56.C.2 Predating, postdating7 Predating: If operations follow-up is active

the operator is able to predate start of theshift when logging in.

8 Postdating: Before logging out the operatorhas the option of postdating the end of theshift. In the Operating mode: Click onShow and Operation follow-up.

9 Click on Predate and Postdaterespectively.

10 Use the + and - keys to give a new time.Click on OK.


Page SetupBasic

Settings

OK Cancel

Operating Follow Up On/Off

Stop Time G15 (min)

Short Stop Time (min)

On

15

5

OK Cancel

OffOn

OK Cancel

15

Predating

When an operator begins his shift he has theoption of predating the start of the shift. Predatingmay be made as far back as the end of thepreceding shift, however not more than to 00:00hours.

One or more reasons must be stated whenpredating.

Postdating

When an operator ends his shift he has the optionof postdating the end of the shift. The limit forpostdating is 24:00 hours.

One or more reasons must be stated whenpostdating.

FACTS

Operator: David




Predate

Ok

State new start time

+ +

- -

Ok

Cancel

10:15

Operator: David




Postdate

Ok

Log out

6

5

4

3

9

10

56.C 56. Results / Operations follow-up C. Proceed as follows

Show report dialogue On3


1 You can choose one or more reasons forpredating/postdating:

2 Click on one of the reasons in the table.

3 If you choose a single reason, click OK.

4 If you choose several reasons: Use the +and – keys to determine the length of theinterruption. Click on OK.

5 Continue by choosing a new reason andtime for the interruption in the same way asthe above until the entire time is defined.

56.C.3 Operations follow-upreport6 In the Operating mode: Click on Show,

Settings, Results and Operation follow-up.

Select scope of the report

7 If you have chosen to activate the functionShow report dialogue (see section 56. C.1) the report dialogue box will be shownautomatically when you go to the operationsfollow-up.

8 If Show report dialogue is not activated,click on File and Report.

2002-05-02 16:30:11

Unaccounted interruption time 00:25

00:00

00:00

00:00

00:00

00:00

00:00

00:00

00:00

00:00Ok


State duration of interruption

+ +

- -

Ok

Cancel

00:25

Cause of interruption:Maintenance

8

7

43

2

56.C.256. Results / Operations follow-up C. Proceed as follows 2. Predating, postdating

Date

Use date

Off

On

Cutting Object

All

OK Cancel

2002-05-14

2002-05-14

Hide ended

Repair

Waiting repair

Maintenance


Maintenance harvester head

Interruption

Not working


G15B Moving

Open Report

Save

Print

Exit

Settings



1 If you press OK direct then all objects andthe day’s date will be shown.If you want the report to cover a particularperiod: Click in the box Use date.

2 Then click in the boxes OFF and ONrespectively to determine the period coveredby the report.

3 If necessary, use the arrow boxes to changethe month.

4 Click on the date number to select the date.

5 Click on OK.

6 Select which operator(s) the report is toinclude: Click on Time information orProduction. Select one of the operators orJoint.

Select logging contract

7 Click in the box Hide ended if you wishonly active, unfinished objects to be shownin the list.

8 Select from the list if you wish all or anindividual logging contract to be shown.Click on OK.

Display data for the object(s)

9 Click on Identity, Time information orProduction to show these data (see section56. B. 6).

Observe that the displayed result can varydepending on whether you have selected alloperators or a single operator.

Print out the report

10 Select File and Print. All data that areshown under Identity, Time informationand Production are now printed out (seeexample in section 56. B. 8)

File IdentityTime

Information Production

10

9

2

56.C.3 56. Results / Operations follow-up C. Proceed as follows 3. Operations follow-up report

Date

Use date

Off

On

Cutting Object

All

OK Cancel

2002-05-14

2002-05-14

Hide ended

1

Open Report

Save

Print

Exit

Settings


7

mo ti we tu fr sa su29 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2627 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Day´s date: 2002-05-14

OK

Cancel

May 2002

3 5

4

8


56.C.4 Save and open drf file

Save as drf file

1 Select File and Save.

2 You can choose to give an optional filenamesimply by marking the date in the name boxand type a new one. The filename will bethe day’s date if you do not type a newname.

3 Select in which catalogue you wish to savethe file. Select between current loggingcontract or the folder Dasa4/User/Drf.

4 Press on OK to save the file.

Open as drf file

5 Select File and Open.

6 Select from which catalogue you wish toopen a file. Select between current loggingcontract or the folder Dasa4/User/Drf.

7 Select an optional drf file.

8 Press on OK to open the file.

56.C.5 Maintenance ofdatabase

9 Select File and Maintenance of database.

10 Select the objects you wish to delete.

11 Click on OK.

Drf filesAll data that is collected by the operations follow-up issaved in a database. Using the Report function (seesection 56. B. 3) you can select data in this databasefrom a particular period or from a particular loggingcontract.

If you wish to export the report that you have selectedit must be saved to a file format (.drf) that can be sentand then read, eg, in an ordinary PC. You do this usingthe Save function.

All saved .drf files can also be opened using the Openfunction.

Observe that the displayed result can vary dependingon whether you have selected all operators or a singleoperator.

FACTS

8

7

5

3

2

1

56.C.456. Results / Operations follow-up C. Proceed as follows 4. Save and open drf file

Open Report

Save

Print

Exit

Settings


Object 1Object 2Object 3Object 4Object 5

OK

Cancel

Remove from:2002-05-07

tol:2002-05-12

9

10

11

Cancel

2002-04-09.drf

2002-04-12.drf

object 1.drf

object 2.drf

Showmessages

OK

object3.drf

Logging contracts

4

Cancel

2002-04-09.drf

2002-04-12.drf

object 1.drf

object 2.drf

Showmessages

OK

object3.drf

Logging contracts

6


61. ExitExit the bucking program. The computer returnsto Windows mode.

62. InformationInformation about current operator, bucking file,production file, trunk file and programversions.

63. OperatorAdd, choose or delete operator.

64. eseShell, BackupToggle between the bucking program andother Windows programs. Backup of programand data files.


65. KermitLink to program module FileTransfer whichcommunicates with external units with the aid ofKermit.

66. File managerCopy/move/delete files to/from apteringsdatorn.

67. Bucking instructionsLink to program module OptimizationBuilderwhere bucking instructions can be created andmaintained.

68. E-mailSend and receive e-mail.

Contents

65 Kermit____________________________ 2365.A Summary _______________________________ 23

66 File manager ______________________ 2466.A Overview ______________________________ 24

66.B Description ____________________________ 2566.B.1 Move/copy/ delete felling files to/from the

felling computer _____________________ 2566.B.2 Copy between units/folders of choice

Compressing files ___________________ 26

66.C Proceed as follows ______________________ 2766.C.1 Copy/move files from file directory to

external drive ______________________ 2766.C.2 Copy/move files from external drive to the

file directory _______________________ 3066.C.3 Delete files in Bucking System _________ 3166.C.4 Delete files in external drive ___________ 3166.C.5 Make a copy of a file to the same folder __ 3266.C.6 Rename files _______________________ 3366.C.7 Copy between units/folders of choice ____ 3366.C.8 Compressing files ___________________ 3466.C.9 Unzipping a zip file __________________ 34

67 Bucking instructions _______________ 3567.A Summary ______________________________ 35

68 E-mail ____________________________ 3668.A Overview ______________________________ 36

68.B Description ____________________________ 3768.B.1 Receive e-mail _____________________ 3768.B.2 Send e-mail ________________________ 3868.B.3 Address book ______________________ 3968.B.4 E-mail accounts and connections _______ 4068.B.5 Settings, production _________________ 41

68.C Proceed as follows ______________________ 4268.C.1 Retrieve e-mail _____________________ 4268.C.2 Send e-mail ________________________ 4368.C.3 Address book ______________________ 4568.C.4 Settings, send production results _______ 4668.C.5 Settings, E-mail accounts and Connections 48

6 System ___________________________ 1

61 Exit ______________________________ 5

62 Information _______________________ 662.A Overview ______________________________ 6

62.B Description ____________________________ 7

62.C Proceed as follows ______________________ 8

63 Operator __________________________ 963.A Overview ______________________________ 9

63.B Description ____________________________ 10

63.C Proceed as follows ______________________ 1163.C.1 Select operator and language __________ 1163.C.2 Add operator _______________________ 1263.C.3 Alter operator data __________________ 1363.C.4 Removing operator __________________ 14

64 eseShell __________________________ 1564.A Overview ______________________________ 15

64.A.1 eseBackup ________________________ 15

64.B Description ____________________________ 1664.B.1 eseShell __________________________ 1664.B.2 eseBackup, Safety backup ____________ 1764.B.3 eseBackup, Restoring ________________ 18

64.C Proceed as follows ______________________ 1964.C.1 eseShell __________________________ 1964.C.2 eseBackup, Safety backup ____________ 2064.C.3 eseBackup, Restoring ________________ 2164.C.4 eseBackup, Restoring optional file ______ 22

6 System / Contents 6

6 System

Buckinginstruction

Exit

Information

Operator

System

Kermit

File-manager

eseShell E-mail


6 System / Contents6


IndexAAdd operator 12Address book 39, 45Alter operator data 13

BBucking instructions 35

Summary 35

CCompressing files 26Copy between units/folders of choice 26, 33Copy/move files from file directory to external d 27

DDelete files in Bucking System 31Delete files in external drive 31

EE-mail 36


E-mail accounts and connections 40eseBackup, Restoring 18, 21eseBackup, Restoring optional file 22eseBackup, Safety backup 17, 20eseShell 15

Overview 15Proceed as follows 19

Exit 5

FFile manager 24


IInformation 6


KKermit 23

Summary 23

MMove/copy/ delete felling files to/from the fellin 25

O

Operator 9Description 10Overview 9Proceed as follows 11

R

Receive e-mail 37Removing operator 14Retrieve e-mail 42

S

Safety backup 17Select operator and language 11Send e-mail 38, 43Settings, E-mail accounts and Connections 48Settings, production 41Settings, send production results 46

6 System / Index 6


61 ExitClick on Exit to switch off the computer completely.Note that also Windows will be terminated. If youwish to go to Windows-mode, use the functioneseShell, see section 64.

61. System / Exit 61

SystemMachine Bucking Result

Buckinginstruction

Exit

Information

Operator

System

Kermit

File-manager

eseShell E-mail


62 Information

62.A OverviewInformation is shown here concerning the currentstatus of the harvester:• Selected operator• Bucking file and bucking mode• Production file• Trunk profile – trunk number and collecting on/

off.System information is displayed in addition, showingthe current version of all programs and also theversion and status of all hardware components inthe system.

62. System / Information62

Information

OperatorFiles for:Bucking

ProductionTrunk profile

System info.:Program versionHardware status


Buckinginstruction

Exit

Information

Operator

Kermit

File-manager

eseShell E-Mail


62.B Description

Current operator’s name

Current bucking fileThe bucking file is chosen inprogram module 41 Loggingcontract.

Current trunk profileThe name of the trunk profile isdefined in program module 52Settings trunk profile.

The name consists of two parts (nameand consecutive number) each withfour characters and the suffix .stmshowing that the file contains a trunkprofile. Only the consecutive numberis shown here.

The number is increasedconsecutively for each saved trunk file.

Current production fileThe production file is created whenyou define a new logging contract inprogram module 41 Loggingcontract.

Version: XX..XXXManufacture No: XXXMachine Type: XXX

Program info CU info

Program/file VersionEseMain X.X.X.XXXEseVar X.X.X.XFile managerX.X.X.XEseInstr X.X.X.XEseProd X.X.X.XEseKey X.X.X.XEseCal X.X.X.XEseCtrl X.X.X.XEseRlt X.X.X.X

Type Version Status00000

Ok

Version numberVersion number of theprogram modules in thebucking computer.

Information abouthardwareVersion number and otherstatus information about thecomponents included in thecomputer system.

62. System / Information B. Description 62.B

System Information

Version Info

Version:Operator:Bucking

Production

Trunk profile

Bucking file: dasa4.aptBucking mode: 0

Production file: Prod-1.prd

Trunk No: 11Trunk collection: Off

Current bucking method1 = Profit-based bucking

2 = Distribution bucking

Bucking method is selected in programmodule 41 Logging contract

Machine numberEnter the current machine number here.The machine number is visible in theproduction follow-up, see section 54.B.17.

Machine number: 123

Current version of the Buckingprogram

Dcl

Program/file Versiondasa4.Cfg XX.XX.XXXMachine.inf

DCLFilename and version number of the Dcl-file used by the Bucking program.

In the Dcl program, which is a separate program, the programming is made ofthe functions that control the harvester head.

The program defines exactly which valves and other control systems that are tocome into action when the relevant function is activated. It is also decidedwhether the function is to include a variable giving the operator the option ofaffecting the function.

Nation: GB

Nation for national settingsSet the correct country to ensure the rightnational settings in the program.This setting does not affect the language ofmenus shown in the character display. Eachoperator sets the desired language for thecharacter display, see section 63. B.

Current version of the bucking program andidentity of the harvester unit Program and Machine identity

System Information

Print

Trunk counter

On/Off

Reset 150

Trunk counterThe trunk counter can be zeroset or provided with a start value.The counter steps up one foreach approved processed trunk.In the operating mode thecounter reading is visible at thebottom of the screen.

150Logg contr. 1 Operator 1


System Information

Version Info

Version:Oprerator: Name1Bucking

Produktion

Trunk profile

Bucking file: dasa4.aptBucking mode: 0

Production file: Prod-1.prd

Trunk nr: 11Trunk collection: Off


5

6

1 In Operating mode: Click Show, Settings,System and Information.

2 To fill in the machine number: Click onMachine number.

3 Enter the machine number and click OK.

4 Select nation to get the right nationalsettings in the program.

5 To see information about system hardware:Click Versions info.

6 Click OK to return to information aboutstatus of the harvester.

7 Activate the trunk counter if desired, andzero set or type a start value. In theoperating mode the current reading of thecounter is visible at the bottom of thescreen.

62.C 62. System / Information C. Proceed as follows

0

7 8 9 <=

4 5 6 +

1 2 3 -

0 C

Cancel

Ok

Max:Min:

3

Machine number: 123

2

Nation: GB

4

Version: XX..XXXManufacture No: XXXMachine Type: XXX

Program info CU info

Program/file VersionEseMain X.X.X.XXXEseVar X.X.X.XFile managerX.X.X.XEseInstr X.X.X.XEseProd X.X.X.XEseKey X.X.X.XEseCal X.X.X.XEseCtrl X.X.X.XEseRlt X.X.X.X

Type Version Status00000

Ok

Dcl

Program/file Versiondasa4.Cfg XX.XX.XXXMachine.inf

Program and Machine identity

System Information

Print

Trunk counter

On/Off

Reset 150

7


63 Operator63.A OverviewHere you can log in, add and delete operators. Youcan link the following functions to each operator:• Language

on-screen and printouts.• Machine variables

which file of machine variables that is to be active.• Key file

where functions can be linked to optional key.• Password

each operator can have his own password.In addition to adapting the settings of keys andvariables in relation to each operator the informationabout operators is utilised in the production follow-upsystem in which production can be shown fordifferent operators.

Operator

Add operatorAlter operator

data:• language• machinevariables• key file

• password

Log in operator

63. System / Operator 63


Buckinginstruction

Exit

Information

Operator

Kermit

File-manager

System

eseShell E-mail


63.B Description

New operatorNOTEYou can only program operatorswho have lower authorisation thanyourself.

Here you enter new operator namesand link appropriate language, keyand variables file to the new operator.

Removing operatorRemove the selected operator.

Save changes madeChanges that you have made forone or more operators are notregistered unless you click thisbutton.

Select operatorYou change operator here. Apossibility to change operator isalso given when the buckingcomputer is started for a newworking shift.

Current operatorName of the operator currentlyselected. The following functions canbe linked to each operator:

LanguageYou can select the language to beused from those that are availablehere.

TGT fileHere you can select your ownprogramming of functions that are tobe coupled to the respective controlkeys on the base machine.

Programming of TGT files is madein program module 31 Settings Key.

MAS fileHere you can choose which settingof machine variables that you wishto work with. Setting of machinevariables is made in programmodule 33 Machine variables.

63.B 63. System / Operator B. Description

Name:

Language:

Machine file:

Key file:

Password:

Remove

Save

Close

Select operator nameHere you can select among the registered operators.

LanguageEach operator can choose the language that will beused on-screen and on printouts.

Machine variablesDifferent operators have different ways of operatingand therefore may prefer individual programming ofvariables and times. Each operator can thereforedetermine which machine variable file (files with thesuffix .mas) is to be active. Machine variable files areprogrammed in program module 33 Machinevariables.

Key fileEach operator can program an individual file to whichfunctions of the harvester head can be linked tooptional keys. Key files are programmed in programmodule 31 Settings Key.

PasswordEach operator determines an individual password,consisting of a four-digit number. The operator usesthe password to log in the computer. Leave this boxempty if no password is desired.

-

Settings Operator

Language:

TGT file:

MAS file:

Newoperator

Change

Log in

Name: Operator1

GB

Operator 1.tgt

Operator 1.mas

Permitted only for lower authorisationYou can only alter operator data for operators whohave lower authorisation than yourself.


Settings Operator

Language:

TGT file:

MAS file:

Newoperator

Change

Log in

Name: Operator 1

GB

Operator 1.tgt

Operator 1.mas

63.C.1 Select operator andlanguage1 In Operating mode: Click Show, Settings,

System and Operator.

2 Click Log in.

3 Choose operator name.

4 If the operator’s name has a password: Typethe password.

5 Click OK.

6 If you wish to alter the language: ClickLanguage.

7 Click the language desired.

8 Click OK.

9 If you wish to change key file or variablefile: Click on TGT file or MAS file andselect a new file in the same way that youchose the language.


3

4

6

2

9

8

7

Ok

Cancel

63. System / Operator C. Proceed as follows 63.C

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3 Cancel

Ok

Operator

Password

5

DE

FI

FR

GB

NO

SE


63.C.2 Add operator

NOTEYou can only add operators who have lowerauthorisation than yourself.

1 In Operating mode: Click Show, Settings,System and Operator.

2 Click New operator.

3 Click Name.

4 Type the new name.

5 Click Enter.

6 If required: Click Language to select adifferent language.

7 Choose the language and click OK.

8 If required: Click the respective box tochoose Machine file and Key file and thenselect in the same way that you choseLanguage above.

9 You can decide yourself whether theoperator’s name is to be protected by apassword. Click Password if you choose touse a password.

10 Type the password and click OK.

11 Click OK when you are ready with all ofthe entrances.

2

8

63.C.2 63. System / Operator C. Proceed as follows 2. Add operator

Gran

§ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 + ´




Space

Caps Lock:Keyboard<- Delete character.





FACTS

7

7 8 9 <=

4 5 6 +

1 2 3 -

0 C Cancel

Ok

Ok

Cancel

3

6

9

10

5

4

11

Settings Operator

Language:

TGT file:

MAS file:

Newoperator

Change

Log in

Name: Operator 1

GB

Operator1.tgt

Operator 1.mas

Name:

Language:

Machine file:

Key file:

Password:

Remove

Save

Cancel

Ok

DE

FI

FR

GB

NO

SE


Name:

Language:

Machine file:

Key file:

Password:

Remove

Save

Close

Settings Operator

Language:

TGT file:

MAS file:

Newoperator

Change

Log in

Name: Operator 1

GB

Operator 1.tgt

Operator 1.mas

63.C.3 Alter operator data

NOTEYou can only alter operator data foroperators who have lower authorisationthan yourself.


2 Click Change.

3 Click Name to select operator.N.B.You cannot alter operator names becauseproduction reports are based on the operatorname not being changed.

4 Select operator and click OK.

5 To choose a different language, machinevariable file or key file click on Language,Machine file or Key file respectively. Selectand click OK in the same manner asdescribed above for name.

6 To alter the password click Password.

7 Press <= to delete the old password.

8 Type a new password and click OK.

9 Click Save when you are ready with all ofthe alterations.

2

5

3

6

9

4

7 8 9 <=

4 5 6 +

1 2 3 -

0 C Cancel

Ok

Ok

Cancel

Operator 1Operator 2Operator 3Operator 4

8

7

63.C.363. System / Operator C. Proceed as follows 3. Alter operator data


Name:

Language:

Machine file:

Key file:

Password:

Remove

Save

Close

Settings Operator

Language:

TGT file:

MAS file:

Newoperator

Change

Log in

Name: Operator 1

GB

Operator 1.tgt

Operator 1.mas

2

35

63.C.4 Removing operator

NOTEYou can only remove operators who havelower authorisation than yourself.

Operator names are used in the variouslogging contracts to structure productionresults. Take care therefore before deletingan operator’s name.


2 Click Change.

3 Click Name box.

4 Select the operator who is to be deleted andclick OK.

5 Click Remove.

4Ok

Cancel

63.C.4 63. System / Operator C. Proceed as follows 4. Removing operator

Operator 1Operator 2Operator 3Operator 4


64 eseShell64.A OverviewEseShell is a function making it possible to toggle toWindows-mode or to other Windows programs (eg,Internet Explorer).

64.A.1 eseBackupVia eseShell you can access eseBackup to makesafety backups and also restore the followingcategories of data:• User data

(copied to PC card, F:\) Files that have beenprogrammed or used by the operator.

• Logging contracts(copied to particular part of the hard disk, E:\)Current logging contract and current operationsfollow-up. The copying is made automatically ateach logging in, but can also be done in theprogram eseBackup.

• Service data (copied to PC card, F:\) Files that can be usefulwhen servicing the system.

To save space the files are compressed (into zip files)before being saved to PC card or hard disk.

Toggle betweenthe buckingprogram and

other Windowsprograms.

64. System / eseShell 64

eseShell


Buckinginstruction

Exit

Information

Operator

Kermit

File-manager

System

eseShell E-mail

eseBackupBackup of:• User data

• Logging contract • Servic data


64.B Description

64.B 64. System / eseShell B. Description

Esemain Program1Windows

Windows

Program 1

Program 2

Program 3

Esemain Program1

Start WindowsClick on the box to start Windows.Please note that dasa4 is stillactive although Windows hasstarted.

The programs thatcan be opened.

Open programClick the box to see whichprograms you can open.

Return to previouslyopened programProgram that you opened earliercan be returned to by clickingdirect on the box for the relevantprogram.

64.B.1 eseShellEseShell is a function making it possible to toggleto Windows-mode or to other Windows programs(eg, Internet Explorer).

WarningThe bucking program and harvester-headcontrol are still active even if you haveswitched to another program whereby dasa4is not visible on the screen.


Make backup copy Restore Cancel

Create a safety backup

User data

Logging contract

Service data

Unit ESearch path: E\D4Backup\User\User_2002-05-28.zip

Start

64.B.2 eseBackup, Safety backup

User data(copied to PC card, F:\)Files that have been programmed or used by theoperator. Examples of such files are

- bucking files

- operations follow-up files

- calibration files

- e-mail

- machine variables

- logging contracts

- key files

Logging contract (copied to particular part of the hard disk, E:\)

Current logging contract and current operations follow-up. The copying is made automatically at each loggingin, but can also be done in the program eseBackup.

Service data(copied to PC card, F:\)

Files that can be useful when servicing the system, eg:

- bucking files

- operations follow-up files

- calibration files

- maskinvariabler

- logging contracts

- key files

- log files

- trunk profiles

Use the arrow keys to choosebetween User data, Loggingcontract or Service data.

Start making safety backupYou start the safety copying here afterselecting the type of data to be backedup, and inserting a PC card if required.

Maximum five files of eachtypeA maximum of five backup files of eachtype, totally 15 files are stored. If thereare more than five files the oldest will bedeleted as a new file is saved.

Select Safety backupClick here to select copying files fromthe bucking computer to a safetybackup

64.B.264. System /eseShell B. Description 2. eseBackup, Safety backup


Make backup copy Restore Exit

Restore backup

2002-05-28 14:52:41 User data f:\D4Backup\User\User_2002-05-28

StartDetailed

2002-05-28 14:52:41 Logging contract e:\D4Backup\Obj\AvvObj2002-05-28

2002-05-28 14:52:41 Service Data f:\D4Backup\Service\D2002-05-28

Unit: Search path:

Mark files to be restored

Restore selectedfiles

Close

dasa4\sys\ dasa4\sys\esemain.ini dasa4\sys\Service.ini dasa4\sys\ColorSchema,datdasa4\sys\DrfDb\ dasa\sys\DrfDb\AvvObj.PX dasa\sys\DrfDb\drf.PX dasa\sys\DrfDb\AvvObj.db dasa\sys\DrfDb\drf.dbdasa4\User\apt\ dasa4\User\apt\Aptfil_1.APT dasa4\User\apt\Aptfil_2.APT dasa4\User\apt\Aptfil_3.APT dasa4\User\apt\Aptfil_4.APTdasa4\User\Drf\ dasa4\User\Drf\Drffil_1.drf dasa4\User\Drf\Drffil_2.drf dasa4\User\Drf\2002-05-07.drf dasa4\User\Drf\2002-05-08.drf dasa4\User\Drf\2002-05-09.drf dasa4\User\Drf\2002-05-10.drf dasa4\User\Drf\2002-05-11.drf dasa4\User\Drf\2002-05-12.drfdasa4\User\Ktr\

64.B.3 eseBackup, Restoring

Search pathThe search path on thehard disk (E:\) or on the PCcard (F:\) where thecomputer searches for thebackup file.

Use the arrow keys to select

Scroll through the list

Select RestoreClick here to select copying files froma safety backup to the buckingcomputer

Select safety backupSelect the safety backup that is to berestored.The five last saved safetybackups of each type are stored.(There are three types of safetybackups: User data, Logging contractand Service data)

Select file or files thatare to be restoredOnly ticked files will be restored.Use the buttons to the right ofthe list to select files.

Mark/un-markMark selected file (tick in the box) if itwas un-marked or un-mark it if it wasmarked.

Mark all files

Un-mark all files

Restore selected filesThe files that are marked (ticked in the box)are copied from the safety backup to thebucking computer.

Note

• that corresponding files in the buckingcomputer will be deleted and replaced bythe safety backup files.

• that the bucking program in the computerwill close before the restoring begins.

Start RestoringClick on Start if you wish torestore all files that have beenbacked up.

Notethat the bucking program in thecomputer will close before therestoring begins.

DetailedClick on Detailed if you wish totake out one or more specialfiles, or just see what files areincluded.

64.B.3 64. System /eseShell B. Description 3. eseBackup, Restoring

Open

Restore optional fileHere you can select anoptional file that is to berestored.

This function facilitates thetransfer of files when changingthe bucking computer. A newbucking computer cannotidentify safety backups madeby the old computer.



64.C.1 eseShell

1 In Operating mode: Click on Show,Settings, Systems and eseShell. Thisfunction is available direct in operationmode.

2 To see which other programs can beopened: Click on the box containing thearrow.

3 Then click on the program symbol to startthe program.

NoteThe bucking program and harvester-head control are still active even if youhave switched to another programwhereby dasa4 is not visible on thescreen.

4 To start Windows: Click on the boxcontaining the Windows symbol.

5 To toggle to an opened program: Clickdirect on the box for the relevant program.

64.C64. System /eseShell C. Proceed as follows

Esemain

2 54

3

Program1Windows

Windows

Program 1

Program 2

Program 3

Esemain Program1


64.C.2 eseBackup, Safetybackup1 In the Operating mode: Click on Show,

Settings, Systems and eseShell. Thisfunction is available direct in operationmode.

2 Click on the program button for Backup.

3 The Make backup copy function is in forceas the program starts.

4 Select the type of data for which you wishto make a safety backup: User data,Logging contracct or Service data. Clickdirect on the name or ...

5 ... use the arrow boxes.

6 If you have selected User data or Servicedata: Insert a PC card in one of the fourslots in the right side of the computer.

7 Click on Start to start safety backupcopying.

2


Create a safety backup

User Data

Logging contract

Service Data

Unit: ESearch path: E\D4Backup\User\User_2002-05-28.zip

Start

3

5

6

4

7

64.C.2 64. System /eseShell C. Proceed as follows 2. eseBackup, Safety backup

Windows Esemain Program1


Mark files to be restored


Close


Open


Restore backup

2002-05-28 14:52:41 User Data f:\D4Backup\User\User_2002-05-28

StartDetailed



Unit: Search path:

64.C.3 eseBackup, Restoring

Note• that corresponding files in the buckingcomputer will be deleted and replaced bythe safety backup files.• that the bucking program in the computerwill close before the restoring begins.

1 In the Operating mode: Click on Show,Settings, Systems and eseShell. Thisfunction is available direct in operationmode.

2 If you intend to restore files that you havesaved on a PC card (User data or Servicedata), insert the right PC card in one of thefour slots in the right side of the computer.


4 Click on Restore.

5 There are three types of safety backups:User data, Logging contract and Servicedata. The five last saved safety backups ofeach type are stored.Select the safety backup from which youwish to restore files. Click direct on thename or ...

6 ... use the arrow boxes.

7 If you wish to restore all files in the safetybackup: Click on Start.

8 If you wish to restore one or more specialfiles, or just see what files are included inthe safety backup. Click on Detailed.

9 The files that are marked by a tick will berestored.

10 Select file using the arrow buttons.

11 Mark/un-mark selected file using the crossbutton.

12 You can mark or un-mark all files usingthese buttons.

13 Click on Restore selected files after youhave selected the files. Restoring begins.

3

54

11

9

8 7

12

6

10

64.C.364. System /eseShell C. Proceed as follows 43. eseBackup, Restoring

10

13



64.C.4 eseBackup, Restoringoptional file

Note• that corresponding file in the buckingcomputer will be deleted and replaced bythe safety backup file.• that the bucking program in the computerwill close before the restoring begins.

This function facilitates the transfer of fileswhen changing the bucking computer.A new bucking computer cannot identifywhole safety backups made with the aid ofthe old computer.1 In the Operating mode: Click on Show,

Settings, Systems and eseShell. Thisfunction is available direct in operationmode.

2 If you intend to restore a file that you havesaved on a PC card (User data or Servicedata), insert the right PC card in one of thefour slots in the right side of the computer.


4 Click on Restore.

5 Click on Detailed. You do not need tochoose a particular safety backup beforeselecting Detailed.

6 Click on Open.

7 Select the files that you wish to restore.

8 Click on Restore selected files. Restoringbegins. Mark files to be restored


Close


Open


Restore backup

2002-05-28 14:52:41 User Data f:\D4Backup\User\User_2002-05-28

StartDetailed



Unit: Search path:

3

4

5

86

64.C.4 64. System /eseShell C. Proceed as follows 4. eseBackup, Restoring optional file



65 Kermit65.A SummaryLink to program module FileTransfer. Themanual for FileTransfer is included as anappendix to this manual.Kermit is a standard procedure for transmittingdata between the buc king computer and apersonal computer or a memory card, forexample.An important field of use for Kermit is thetransmission of machine variables, or price lists,to the bucking computer.


Kermit

Transmitting filesfrom the bucking

computer toexternal drive.

Formattingmemory card.

65. System / Kermit 65

Transmitting filesfrom externaldrive to the

buckingcomputer.

Buckinginstruction

Exit

Information

Operator

Kermit

File-manager

System

eseShell E-Mail


66 File manager66.A OverviewThis program module makes it possible in aneasy way to delete, copy or move various typesof files to and from the the bucking computerfile directory.It is also possible to copy files of choicebetween units/folders of choice in the fellingcomputer.With the aid of a diskette or memory card youcan utilise File manager, for example,:• To make backup copies.• To transfer machine variables, bucking

files or key programming, for example,between different computer systems orbetween computer systems and personalcomputers.

• To transfer production reports and trunkprofiles to a personal computer for furtherprocessing.

File manager

Copy files to/fromthe buckingcomputer

Move files to/fromthe buckingcomputer

Delete files in thebucking computer

66. System / File manager66


Buckinginstruction

Exit

Information

Operator

Kermit

File-manager

System

eseShell E-mail

Copy filesbetween units/

folders of choice


Files in the buckingcomputerHere you can see the contents ofthe the bucking computer filedirectory for the type of file thatyou have chosen.

After choosing the right type offile you can:

• transfer or copy files from anexternal unit.

• transfer or copy files to anexternal unit.

• delete files.

Select file typeHere you select the file type thatyou wish to show in the windowabove.

The file types: see FACTS boxbelow.

Files in the PC file systemHere you see the contents of theexternal drive/folder that you haveselected. After choosing the rightdrive/folder you can:

• transfer or copy files from thebucking computer file directory tothe drive/folder.

• transfer or copy files from thedrive/folder to the buckingcomputer file directory.

• delete files in the drive/folder.

Select driveHere you select which drive/folderthat is to be shown in the abovewindow.

Drives/folders can, for example, be:

• memory cards

• diskettes

• folder on hard disk in the PC filesystem.

Choose direction of copyingChoose here whether copying/movingof files is to be made from or to thedasa4 file directory.

Select filesWith the buttons Up, Down,Select and Select all you choosewhich file or files that you wish tocopy, move or delete.

Copy / move / delete filesWhen you have chosen the copyingdirection and have selected one ormore files, click the respective boxto copy, move or delete files.

Attribute

Write protect Hidden

SystemArchive

Size:Changed:Type:

Variable info:

Close

IdentityFor apt. file type, text is shownhere in the bucking instructionsbox “Identification” (see section67.B.2).

File type and dateShows which type of file hasbeen selected and when itwas created.

AttributeIt is shown here whether theselected file is provided withone or more attributes.

66.B Description66.B66. System / File manager B. Description

Open logging contract(only visible when file typeLoggcontract is selected).

Click to see the object-,production- and bucking filesused in the Logging contract.

File types• Bucking (*.Apt)

• Calibration (*.Ktr)

• L/D Calibration (*.Ldk)

• Machine variables (*.Mas)

• Manual selec (*.Mlv)

• Logging contract (*.*)

• Finished logging contract (*.*)

• Forecast mean trunks (*.Prg)

• Forecast trunks (*.Pst)

• Results (*.Rlt)

• Trunk identity (*.Sti)

• Trunks (*.Stm)

• Keys (*.Tgt)

• Select drive (*.*)

FACTS

Select file typeHere you select the file type thatyou wish to show in the windowabove.

The file types: see FACTS boxbelow.

RenameMark a file and alterthe name of the file.

66.B.1 Move/copy/ delete felling files to/from thefelling computer

Bucking

Up

Down

Select

Select allSelect file type

File System

Shift Shift

Bucking System

Select drive

Copy file(s) Move file(s) Delete file(s)Show file

info Exit

dasa_1.aptdasa_2.aptdasa_3.aptdasa_4.aptdasa_5.aptdasa_6.aptdasa_7.aptdasa_8.aptdasa_9.aptdasa_10.aptdasa_11.aptdasa_12.apt

Open Select file type

Rename

Compress


a:[]

a:\ folder a folder b folder c

Create

Delete

Ok Cancel

Bucking

Up

Down

Select


File System

Shift Shift

Bucking System

Select drive


info Exit


Rename

Compress

file 1file 2file 3

file 1file 2file 3

Forecast trunks(*.Pst)

Results(*.Rlt)

Trunk identity(*.Sti)

Trunks(*.Stm)

Keys(*.Tgt)

Select drive(*.*)

Ok

Cancel

66.B.2 Copy between units/folders of choiceCompressing files

Copy between units/folders of choice

Choose “Select drive (*.*)” found last in the list offile types. You can then choose in the usual way(see figure below) the unit/folder from/to which youwish to copy files

Compressing files to zipformatClick in the box so that you insert a tickto activate the function.

The compression is made in zipformat, which is an established formatfor compressing one or more files intoa single file (zip file). Compressing ismade, for example, so that the fileshave room on a disk or to reduce thetransmitting time when sending files byKermit (see section 65) or via e-mail(see section 68).

Unzipping a zip fileA zip file can contain one or more files.

Mark the zip file and click on Show fileinfo. This will show the file(s) in the zip file.You can then mark and copy one or moreof the files in the usual way.

66.B.2 66. System / File manager B. Description 2. Copy between units/folders of choice, Compressing files



66.C.1 Copy/move files fromfile directory to external drive1 In Operating mode: Click Show, Settings,

System and File manager.

Choose copying direction

2 If required: Click the left Shift arrow.

3 The right arrow is now active, indicating thecopying direction from Bucking System toFile System (the File System box shows theexternal drive).

4 The Bucking System box is active (white).

5 The File System box is passive (grey).

Select file type

6 Click Select file type.

7 Click the file type (eg, Bucking) that youwish to copy/move.

8 Click OK.

9 You now see all files in Bucking Systemfor the file type selected.

10 If you have selected the file types Loggingcontract or Completed Logging contractyou can mark an object and then open theobject by clicking on Open.

Choose external drive

11 Click Select Drive.

12 The upper box shows which drive isselected. Drives can be, eg, hard disk, PCcard or diskette. Click the box if you wishto change drive.

13 Click the new drive.

c:[]a:c: []d: []

2 34

11

12

13

5

6

7

8

9

Bucking a:\

Bucking System


dasa_1.aptdasa_2.aptdasa_3.aptdasa_4.aptdasa_5.aptdasa_6.aptdasa_7.aptdasa_8.aptdasa_9.aptdasa_10.apt

66. System / File manager C. Proceed as follows 66.C

Up

Down

Select


File System

Shift Shift

Select drive

Copy file(s) Move file(s) Delete file(s) ExitShow file

info

Select file type

a:[]


Create

Delete

Ok Cancel

Open10

Rename

Compress

Bucking (*.Apt)

Calibration (*.Ldk)

L/D Calibration (*.Ldk)

Machine variables (*.Mas)

Manual selec (*.Mvl)

Logging contract (*.*)

Ok

Cancel



Bucking a:\folder a\folder z\Apt

Bucking System



7

6

Select folder in the external driveClick to open drives/folders. When you click afolder/drive its content of folders is shown (atuppermost folder level).In the following example we open the Aptfolder in a:\folder a\folder z\Apt.

1 If required: Click a:\. so that folders in theuppermost level are shown.

2 Click folder a.

3 Click folder z.

4 Click Apt.

5 Click OK.

6 You now see the folder that you selected.

7 Contents of the folder are shown in the greybox.

Create a new folder

8 Select the drive/folder were the new foldershould be placed (see items 1 - 6 above).

9 Click New folder.

10 Write the name of the new folder.

11 Click Ok.

Delete a folder

12 Select the folder that should be deleted (seeitems 1 - 6 above).

13 Click Delete folder.

a:\ folder a folder x folder y folder z

a:\ folder a folder z Apt Ktr Ldk Mas

2 43

9

66.C.1 66. System / File manager C. Proceed as follows 1. Copy/move files from file directory to external drive

Up

Down

Select


File System

Shift Shift

Select drive

Copy file(s) Move file(s) Delete file(s) Exit

a:[]


Create

Delete

Ok Cancel

1

13

5

Ok

Cancel

10 11Directory name:

Show fileinfo

Select file type

Rename

Compress


Select file/files to be copied/movedYou can select one or several files in BuckingSystem with the aid of the buttons Up, Down,Select and Select all.In the following example we shall select thefiles dasa_3.apt, dasa_4.apt and dasa_7.apt.

1 In the System box that is active (in our caseBucking System) there is a dotted selectingframe round one of the files. This framewill always be found round the uppermostfile when the file management programstarts.

2 The selecting frame can be moved up ordown with the aid of the buttons Up andDown.

3 To select dasa_3.apt: Click Down twice sothat the selecting frame appears rounddasa_3.apt.

4 Click Select.

5 The file is now selected (blue with whitetext).Click once more on Select if you wish tounselect the file.

6 To select dasa_4.apt: Click Down onemore time so that the selecting frameappears round dasa_4.apt and click Select.

7 To select dasa_7.apt: Click Down threemore time so that the selecting frameappears round dasa_7.apt and click Select.

8 All three files are now selected.

1




Bucking

Bucking System


3

4

5

2

6

7 8


Bucking System



66. System / File manager C. Proceed as follows 1. Copy/move files from file directory to external drive 66.C.1

Up

Down

Select


FileSystem

Shift Shift

Select drive

Copy file(s) Move file(s) Delete file(s) ExitShow fileinfo

Select file type

Select file typeSelect file type

Select file type

Select file type

Bucking

Bucking System

Bucking

Bucking System

Bucking

Bucking System

Rename

Compress



Bucking System



Select all files

1 Click Select all.

Unselect a file

2 Click Up or Down so that the selectingframe appears round the selected file thatyou wish to unselect.

3 Click Select.

Unselect all files

4 If one or more files are selected: ClickSelect all and all files will becomeunselected

Copy or transfer selected files

5 Click Copy file(s) to copy the selected files.

6 If instead you wish to transfer the selectedfiles, click Move file(s).

66.C.2 Copy/move files fromexternal drive to the filedirectory7 In Operating mode: Click Show, Settings,


Choose copying direction

8 If required: Click the right Shift arrow.

9 The left arrow is now active, indicating thecopying direction from File System(external drive) to Bucking System.

10 The File System box is now active (white).

11 The Bucking System box is passive (grey).

Select, select, copy/move

12 Continue to Select file type, Selectexternal drive, Select files and also Copyor Move files in the same way as describedin section 66.C.1.

1

2

34

5 6


Bucking System



9 8

10

66.C.2 66. System / File manager C. Proceed as follows 2. Copy/move files from external drive to file directory

Up

Down

Select


FileSystem

Shift Shift

Select drive


Up

Down

Select


FileSystem

Shift Shift

Select drive


info Exit

Show fileinfo

Select file type

Select file type

12

11

Rename

Rename

Compress

Compress


66.C.3 Delete files in BuckingSystem1 In Operating mode: Click Show, Settings,


2 Click the left Shift arrow.

3 The Bucking System box is now active(white).

4 Select file type and select the files that youwish to delete, in the same way as describedin section 66.C.1.

5 Click Delete file(s) to remove the files.

66.C.4 Delete files in externaldrive6 In Operating mode: Click Show, Settings,


7 Click the right Shift arrow.

8 The File system box is now active (white).

9 Select file type, external drive, selectfolder in external drive and select the filesthat you wish to delete, in the same way asdescribed in section 66.C.1.

10 Click Delete file(s) to remove the files.


Bucking System



2

7

8

3


Bucking System



5

10

66. System / File manager C. Proceed as follows 3. Delete files in Bucking System 66.C.3

Up

Down

Select


File System

Shift Shift

Select drive


Up

Down

Select


File System

Shift Shift

Select drive


Show fileinfo

Show fileinfo

Select file type

Select file type

Rename

Rename

Compress

Compress


Bucking c:\dasa4\User\Apt

Up

Down

Select


FileSystem

Shift Shift

Bucking System

Select drive





Show fileinfoRename

66.C.5 Make a copy of a file tothe same folder1 In the Operating mode: Click Settings,

Systems and File management.

2 Click on the right-hand Shift arrow.

3 The Bucking System is now active (white).

4 Select file type in the Bucking system.

5 Select the same folder in the FileSystembox as that selected in Bucking System inthe following way:

6 If you have selected file type Bucking forexample, click on Select drive and selectthe folder c:\dasa4\User\Apt in the mannerdescribed in section 66. C. 1.

7 For other types of files, select thecorresponding folder in c:\dasa4\User. Thename of the folder corresponds to that inbrackets when you select file type inBucking System.

8 Select in Bucking System the file to becopied.

9 Click on Copy file(s).

10 The file is now copied to the same folderbut with the name “Copy of (original file)”.You can now rename the file, see section66. C. 6.

2

5

9

6

3 8

8

4


Up

Down

Select


FileSystem

Shift Shift

Bucking System

Select drive

Exit

dasa_1.aptdasa_2.aptdasa_3.aptdasa_4.aptdasa_5.aptdasa_6.aptdasa_7.aptdasa_8.aptdasa_9.aptdasa_10.aptCopy of dasa_4.apt


dasa_1.aptdasa_2.aptdasa_3.aptdasa_4.aptdasa_5.aptdasa_6.aptdasa_7.aptdasa_8.aptdasa_9.aptdasa_10.aptCopy of dasa_4.apt

10

7

66.C.5 66. System /File manager C. Proceed as follows 5. Make a copy of a file to the same folder


infoRename

Compress

Compress

Bucking (*.Apt)

Calibration (*.Ldk)

L/D Calibration (*.Ldk)

Machine variables (*.Mas)

Manual selec (*.Mvl)

Logging contract (*.*)

Ok

Cancel


66.C.6 Rename files1 Select the file to be renamed in the manner

described in section 66. C. 1.

2 Click on Rename.

3 Type the new name of the file and pressOK.

Cancel

OkEnter new file name

dasa_8

3

2

66. System / File manager C. Proceed as follows 6. Rename files 66.C.6

Forecast trunks(*.Pst)

Results(*.Rlt)

Trunk identity(*.Sti)

Trunks(*.Stm)

Keys(*.Tgt)

Select drive(*.*)

Ok

Cancel

a:[]


Create

Delete

Ok Cancel

66.C.7 Copy between units/folders of choice

4 In the File system box you can select unit/folder by clicking in the box Select unit.

5 The Bucking system box is used primarilyto select file in the file directory of thefelling computer. It is however also possiblehere to select a unit/folder of choice.

6 Click on Select file type.

7 Choose Select drive (*.*). This choice islast in the list of different file types.

8 A new window will now open where youcan select unit/folder of choice, see section66.C.1.

7

8


Up

Down

Select


FileSystem

Shift Shift

Bucking System

Select drive





Show fileinfoRename

Compress



Up

Down

Select


FileSystem

Shift Shift

Bucking System

Select drive



file 1.zip

Show fileinfoRename

Compress


Up

Down

Select


FileSystem

Shift Shift

Bucking System

Select drive


dasa_3.aptdasa_4.aptdasa_7.apt


file 1.zip

Show fileinfoRename

Compress

Cancel

OkEnter new file name

5

66.C.8 Compressing files1 The compression is made in zip format,

which is an established format forcompressing one or more files into a singlefile (zip file). Compressing is made, forexample, so that the files have room on adisk or to reduce the transmitting time whensending files by Kermit (see section 65) orvia e-mail (see section 68).

2 Click so that the Compress box is markedwith a tick.

3 Select the file, or files, to be compressed inthe manner described in section 66.C.1.

4 Click on Copy file(s) or on Move file(s).

5 Type the new name of the file and press Ok.

6 All the selected files will now be copied/moved and compressed into a single file ofthe .zip type.

66.C.9 Unzipping a zip file7 To use the files in a zip file it must be

unzipped to restore the original files.

8 Mark the zip file that is to be unzipped.

9 Click on Show information.

10 Now you can see the names of the originalfiles contained in the zip file. Select the filesthat you wish to restore.

11 Click on Copy file(s). The files that youmarked are now restored and copied.

66. System / File manager C. Proceed as follows 8. Compressing files66.C.8


63

4 2

11

8

9

10dasa_3.aptdasa_4.aptdasa_7.apt

Select drive

Bucking

Bucking System

Select file type


67.A SummaryLink to program module OptimizationBuilder. Themanual for OptimizationBuilder is included as anappendix to this manual.The bucking instructions are used to enable buckingof each trunk to give maximum yield, either inrelation to maximum price or a particular assortmentrange. For each bucking the diameter of the trunk andtaper are compared with the permitted availableoptions and the computer then chooses the currentlymost advantageous option.

67 Bucking instructions


6767. System / Bucking instructions

Buckinginstruction

Exit

Information

Operator

System

Kermit

File-manager

eseShell


68 E-mail68.A OverviewHere you will find all the functions needed tosend and receive e-mail:• retrieve, open, reply to, create new and delete

e-mail• address book• settings and facilities to create and maintain

various connections and e-mail accounts.There is also an automatic function for sendingproduction files where you can simply selectone or more files and the forwarding address.Then, for example, you can send productionresults at the end of each shift to the selectedrecipient with a single push of a button.

Mashine Bucking Result System

E-mail

Retrievereplysenddelete

Address bookSettings

68. System / E-mail68

Send productionresults

automatically

Exit

Information

Operator

Kermit

File-manager

Buckinginstruction

System

eseShell E-mail


Inbox

Sendbox

Address book

Create newmail

Settings

Exit

Open... Reply... Delete Retrieve mail

From Date Subject

Inbox

68.B Description

68.B68. System / E-mail B. Description

Attached files:

Copy attachedfile Close

From:To:Subject:

InboxClick on Inbox to see allreceived e-mail messages.

Sort e-mail in the listYou can sort your e-mail in To/From,Date or Subject.

Click on the heading that you wish touse.

A second click on the heading willreverse the sorting (eg, Date willshow the oldest messages first).

Mark and scroll throughthe e-mail listThe uppermost message will bemarked as you click arrow downthe first time. Then you can scrolldown and up in the list.

Retrieve e-mailConnect and retrieve new e-mailmessages.

SettingsCreate new connections, new e-mail accounts and make settingsfor automatic sending ofproduction results, see section68. B. 4 and 68. B. 5.

Attached filesHere you can see any attached files.

Copy attached fileChoose one of the files using the arrowkeys. Then copy the file to your hard disk.

Mark and scroll throughattached filesThe uppermost file will be markedas you click the first time. Thenyou can scroll down and up in thelist.

68.B.1 Receive e-mail

Open Zip-file

Open Zip filesTo reduce the size of files, and thus reducethe transfer time, one or more files can becompressed into a zip file.

If one or more attached files have beencompressed into zip format you can openthe zip file here to take out the original files.

Forward

ForwardForward marked e-mail torecipient of choice.


Inbox

Sendbox

Address book

Create newmail

Settings

Exit


From Date Subject

Inbox

To:

Copy:

Subject:

Attached files:

Add...

Delete

Close

Address...

SendAdd

production

SendboxClick on Sendbox to see all e-mail messages that you havesent.

Sort e-mail in the listYou can sort your e-mail in To/From,Date or Subject.

Click on the heading that you wish touse.

A second click on the heading willreverse the sorting (eg, Date willshow the oldest messages first).

Mark and scroll throughthe e-mail listThe uppermost message will bemarked as you click arrow downthe first time. Then you can scrolldown and up in the list.

Address bookCreate new, alter and delete e-mail addresses, see section 68.B. 3.

SettingsCreate new connections, new e-mail accounts and make settingsfor automatic sending ofproduction results, see section68. B. 4 and 68. B. 5.

RecipientType the address or select anaddress from the address bookby clicking on Address.

Attach one or more filesClick to select the file or files, eg,production files, that are to beattached to your e-mail.

Delete a fileDelete marked file in the list ofattached files.

Select an e-mail addressfrom the address book

Message boxType your text message here.

Send e-mail message

Compress

Compress into Zip fileTo reduce the size of files, and thus reduce thetransfer time, you can compress one or morefiles into a zip file before sending.

Retrieve e-mailConnect and retrieve new e-mailmessages.

Add to productionIn this function you can select whichobjects among ongoing or completedlogging contracts that are to beattached. The function automaticallyfills in the fields To, Subject, Text andAttached files. All you then need todo is to send the message by clickingon Send.

You select what is to be included inthe various fields and which file typesare to be attached from the settingsmenu, see section 68.B.5. Cancle

Show:

Ok

Aktive logging contractsClosed logging contracts

68.B.2 68. System / E-mail B. Description 2. Send e-mail

68.B.2 Send e-mail

ForwardForward marked e-mail torecipient of choice.

Vidarebefodra


Inbox

Sendbox

Address book

Create newmail

Settings

Exit

New... Edit... Delete

Name E-Mail address Misc.name1 address1name2 address2name3 address3

Address book

Name:

E-mail address:

Misc.:

Ok Cancel

68.B.3 Address book

Select address bookClick here to select the addressbook.

Name:

E-mail address:

Misc.:

Ok Cancel

name2

address2

New e-mail addressFill in the three fields with name, e-mailaddress and miscellaneous.

Alter e-mail addressClick on the address in the list that youwish to alter. Click on alter and make thechanges that you wish.

Delete e-mail addressClick on the address in the listthat you wish to delete. Thenclick on the Delete box.

68. System / E-mail B. Description 3. Address book

Mark and scroll throughthe address listThe uppermost message will bemarked as you click arrow downthe first time. Then you can scrolldown and up in the list.

68.B.3



Name Username Phone numberuser1 12345user2 23456

Connections

Connect

E-mail account

Connections

Settingsproduction:

Close

E-mail account

Connections

Settingsproduction:

Close

Edit...

E-mail account

Account name:

Remember password:

Password:User name:

Outgoing e-mail (SMTP):Incoming e-mail (POP3):Account

E-mail address:Name:

Connect account with:

General

68.B.4 E-mail accounts and connections

Account data from your e-mailproviderYour Internet provider notifies you of these fouritems. Fill in the items accurately; they must beabsolutely correct in order to work.

Remember passwordClick here to avoid having totype your password everytime you connect.

E-mail addressType here your e-mail address, asagreed in consultation with your e-mail provider.

Connect account withSelect here one of theconnections that you haveprogrammed in the settingswindow Connections; refer to thebottom of this page.

Edit data in the e-mailaccountClick here to enable editing of datain the programming fields.

Select ConnectionsClick here to display thissetting window (Connections).

Select E-mailaccountsClick here to display thissetting window (e-mailaccounts).

Create a new connectionFill in name, modem data and alsotelephone number to your e-mailprovider.

Edit data in a connectionWhen you create an e-mail connection, all parameters are presetto work in a normal modem connection.

You can perform advanced editing of the settings for the e-mailconnection. However, you should consult your e-mail providerbefore making any alterations.

Connect to e-mailconnectionSelect the connection in the list thatyou wish to use.

68.B.4 68. System / E-mail B. Description 4. E-mail accounts and connections

Mark and scroll throughthe user listThe uppermost message will bemarked as you click arrow downthe first time. Then you can scrolldown and up in the list.


68.B.5 Settings, production

Select SettingsproductionClick here to display thissetting window (Settingsproduction).

Edit settingsClick here if you wish to edit dataor settings.

68. System / E-mail B. Description 5. Settings, production 68.B.5

Edit...

Settings production

Connections

Settingsproduction:

Close

Send production to:

Subject:

Text:

E-mail account

Attach following files:

Copy to:

Select file type:

Add

Ok

Delete

Cancel

Present file type:

Copy toType the e-mail address if you wishto send the e-mail message to anadditional recipient.

Select the file types to be attachedHere you select the file types to be attached You determine whichfelling object(s) to select with the function Add to productionwhen you send a new e-mail message, see section 68.B.2.

File type Files attached

*.* object file (.obj)

production file (.prd)

production file (.pri)

bucking instruction (.apt)

log bill (.stn)

*.Apt bucking instruction (.apt)

*.Prd production file (.prd)

*.Pri production file (.pri)

<c>.Apt bucking instruction (.apt) in current felling contract

<c>.Prd production file (.prd) in current logging contract

<c>.Pri production file (.pri) in current logging contract

Present file typeWith the keys Add and Delete you can choose whichfile types are to be attached. Here you see the filetypes that are selected.

Address...

Send production to:

Subject:


Ok Cancel

Text:

Copy to:

Edit

Change e-mail recipientClick on Address. . . , select oneof the addresses and click on OKor ...

type the e-mail address to therecipient direct in the box.

Subject and textType the subject and the text that youwish to be shown each time you sendproduction results.


Inbox

Sendbox

Addressbook

Create newmail

Settings

Exit


From Date Subjectmy@e-mail 2001-11-10: 12:35my@e-mail 2001-11-10: 13:46my@e-mail 2001-11-10: 14:53

Inbox


Connection:

User name:

Password:

Connect Cancel

Remember password

Phone number:

7 3

4

5

Attached files

Copy attachedfile Close

From:To:Subject:

Attached file1Attached file2

68.C 68. System / E-mail C. Proceed as follows

Open Zip-file

8

9

10

68.C.1 Retrieve e-mail1 In the Operating mode: Click on Show,

Settings, System and eseMail.

2 Check modem and telephone.

3 Click on Retrieve mail.

4 Check that the correct connection is dis-played.If not, select the correct connection.

5 Click on Connect. Wait until theconnection is ready and any e-mail isretrieved.

6 To open an e-mail, use the arrow boxes tomark the right line. The first click on thearrow down box marks the uppermost line.Then you can scroll in the list.

7 Click on Open when you have selected theright e-mail.

8 If the attached file is compressed into a zipfile, click on Open Zip file to gain access tothe original file or files.

9 If you wish to copy an attached file, use thearrow boxes to mark the right line. The firstclick on the arrow down box marks theuppermost line. Then you can scroll in thelist.

10 Click on Copy attached file and select thefolder in which you wish to save the file.How to select in the file system is describedin section 66. C. 1.

6

Forward


68.C.2 Send e-mail1 In the Operating mode: Click on Show,

Settings, System and eseMail.

2 Check modem and telephone.

3 Click on Create new message.

Send production

4 The e-mail program includes a function forautomatic sending of one or moreproduction and/or bucking files to apreselected address.

NoteBefore you can send production dataautomatically, the Address, Subject, any textmessage and also which file types are to besent must be defined in function Settings/Settings production, see section 68.B.5 and68.C.4.

5 Click on Add production.

6 Choose to show Active logging contracts orClosed logging contracts.

7 Select in the list which logging contract(s)to send.

Compressing files

8 To reduce sending time you can compressthe file or files into a zip file. PressCompress. All files in the Attached filesbox will now be compressed into a singlezip file.

9 Click on Send.

10 Check that the correct connection is dis-played. Click on Connect. Wait until yousee that the message has been sent.

Inbox

Sendbox

Address book

Create newmail

Settings

Exit


To Date Subjectmy@e-mail 2001-11-10: 12:35my@e-mail 2001-11-10: 13:46my@e-mail 2001-11-10: 14:53

Inbox

To:

Copy:

Subject:

Bifogade filer:

Add...

Delete

Close

Address...

Send Add production Compress

Connection:

User name:

Password:

Connect Cance

Remember password

Phone number:

3

5 8

10

68. System / E-mail C. Proceed as follows 2. Send e-mail 68.C.2

Cancle

Show:

Ok

Aktive logging contractsClosed logging contracts6

Logging contract 1Logging contract 2

7

9

Forward


To:

Copy:

Subject:

Attached files:

Obj1.prd Obj2.prd

Add...

Delete

Close

Address...

Send Add production Compress

Send normal e-mail

1 Type the e-mail address in the field To,Copy, Subject and the desired text.

2 If you click on the box Address... you canselect an e-mail address from the list in youraddress book:

3 Use the arrow boxes to mark an address.The first click on the arrow down boxmarks the uppermost address. Then you canscroll in the list.

4 Click on OK.

Attach a file

5 Click on Add... if you wish to attach a file.

6 Select the folder containing the file bymarking the right folders in order to comedown in the file system step by step.How to select files in the file system is alsodescribed in section 66. C. 1.

7 Files in the marked folder are shown in theright field.

8 Select file by clicking on it.

9 Click on OK. Click Add... again if youwish to attach more files.

10 All files in the box Attached files will bedeleted if you click on Delete.

11 To reduce the transmission time you cancompress the file or files into a zip file.Press Compress. All files in the Attachedfiles box will now be compressed into asingle zip file.

12 Click on Send when you wish to send youre-mail.

13 Check that the correct connection is dis-played. Click on Connect. Wait until yousee that the message has been sent.

1

Connection:

User name:

Password:

Connect Cancel

Remember password

Phone number:

Name E-mai addressl Misc.name1 address1name2 address2name3 address3

Ok Cancel

12

10

5

13

4

3

68. System / E-mail C. Proceed as follows 2. Send e-mail68.C.2

2

Filename:

Filetype:Ok Cancel

C:\dasa4

C:\

dasa4 User

ObjEnd Obj1

Aptinstr1.aptObj1.obj

Obj1.prdObj1.stn

c: [ ]

67

8

9

11


Inbox

Sendbox

Address book

Create newmail

Settings

Exit

New... Edit Delete

Name E mail address Misc.name1 address1name2 address2name3 address3

Address book68.C.3 Address book

1 Click on Address book

Enter a new e-mail address

2 Click on New.

3 Fill in Name, e-mail address and anyoptional text in the Miscellaneous box.Press Alt Gr and type 2 to write thecharacter @.

4 Click on OK.

Edit an e-mail address


6 Click on Edit.

7 Make the changes and click on OK.

Delete an e-mail address


9 Click on Delete.

Name:

E-mail address:

Misc.:

Ok Cance

1

962

3

74

68.C.368. System / E-mail C. Proceed as follows 3. Address book

85


68.C.4 Settings, sendproduction results1 The e-mail program includes a function for

automatic sending of one or moreproduction and/or bucking files to apreselected address. The followingdescribes how you set the address, include amessage and also how you choose whichfile types to send.

2 Click on Settings.

3 Click on Settings production.

4 Click on Edit.

5 Type the e-mail address, Copy to, Subjectand Text in the four fields.

6 If you click on the box Address... you canselect an e-mail address from the list in youraddress book:

4

2

5

3

E-mail account

Connections

Settingsproduction

Close

Inbox

Sendbox

Address book

Create new mail

Settings

Exit

6

68. System / E-mail C. Proceed as follows 4. Settings, se nd production results68.C.4

Edit...

Settings production

Connections

Settingsproduction:

Close

Send production to:

Subject:

Text:

E-mail account


Copy to:

Address...

Send production to:

Subject:


Ok Cancel

Text:

Copy to:

Edit


Address...

Send production to:

Subject:


Ok Cancel

Text:

Copy to:

Edit

Select file type:

Add

Ok

Delete

Cancel

Present file type:

FACTS

1 Click on Edit.

2 Select the file type(s) (see facts box below)that you wish to attach, in the followingway:

3 Click the arrow in the Select file type boxand select a file type.

4 Click on Add.

5 The selected file type will now be visible inthe Present file type box.

6 More file types can be selected in the sameway.

7 If you wish to remove a file type, select thefile type in the Select file type box andclick Delete.

8 When you are ready: Click on OK.

1

4

5

8

3

7

68. System / E-mail C. Proceed as follows 4. Settings, send production results 68.C.4

File type Files attached

*.* object file (.obj)

production file (.prd)

production file (.pri)

bucking instruction (.apt)

log bill (.stn)

*.Apt bucking instruction (.apt)

*.Prd production file (.prd)

*.Pri production file (.pri)

<c>.Apt bucking instruction (.apt) in current fellingcontract

<c>.Prd production file (.prd) in current loggingcontract

<c>.Pri production file (.pri) in current loggingcontract



Name User name Phone numberuser1 12345user2 23456

Connections

Connect

Close

State name of the computer being called:

Connection 1

Select a unit:

Configure

<Previous Next> Cancel

68.C.5 Settings, E-mailaccounts and Connections1 From your e-mail provider you will have

received data concerning e-mail address,addresses for incoming and outgoing e-mail, username and password. You needthem now.

2 Click on Connections.

3 Click on New.

4 Type an optional name for your connection.

5 Click on Next.

6 Type the area code and telephone number toyour connection.

7 Select the right country.

8 Click on Next.

9 Check that the name is correct and thenpress Implement.

5

3

2

4

State telephone number to the computer being called:

Connection 1 Phone number

Country and area code:

<Previous Next> Cancel

You have now created a new remote connectionwith the name:

<Previous Implement >Cancel

6

7

8

9

68.C.5 68. System / E-mail C. Proceed as follows 5. Settings, E-mail accounts and Connections

E-mail account

Connections

Settingsproduction


Close

Edit...

E-mail account

Account name:

Remember password:

Password:User name:

Outgoing e-mail (SMTP):Incoming e-mail (POP3):Account

E-mail address:Name:

Connect account with:

General

32

6

5

4

1

1 Click on E-post accounts.

2 Click on Edit.

3 Check that the correct connection isselected.

4 Fill in the following data that you havereceived from your e-mail provider:Account name, e-mail address and alsothe four items in the Account field.

5 Click on the box Remember password toavoid having to type your password everytime you connect.

6 Click on Close.

68. System / E-mail C. Proceed as follows 5. Settings, E-mail accounts and Connections 68.C.5

E-mail account

Connections

Settingsproduction

+16

+14

+12

+10+8+6+4+2-2-4-6-8

-10

-12

-14

-16

Machine-

value

Positive difference from

machine value

Negative difference from

machine value

Diam

eter diag

ram

Start date:_____________ C

alibration date:_______________

Difference = M

achine value - Control value

200250

300350

400450

50100

150

+16

+14

+12

+10

+8+6+4+2-2-4-6-8-10

-12

-14

-16

Appendix dasa4

C D

asa Control S

ystems A

B

Calibration date:

_______________

Perform

ed by:_______________

Com

ments:

_______________

Calibration date:

_______________

Perform

ed by:_______________

Com

ments:

_______________

Diam

eter calibratio

nA

ppendix dasa4

Machine value

Difference

Control value

50m

m

100m

m

150m

m

200m

m

250m

m

300m

m

350m

m

400m

m

450m

m

500m

m

Control value equals M

achine value minus D

ifferenceE

xamples: 200 - (-5) = 205 : 150 - 3 = 147 : 300 - (-8) = 308

Calibration date:

_______________

Perform

ed by:_______________

Com

ments:

_______________

50m

m

100m

m

150m

m

200m

m

250m

m

300m

m

350m

m

400m

m

450m

m

500m

m

50m

m

100m

m

150m

m

200m

m

250m

m

300m

m

350m

m

400m

m

450m

m

500m

m

Machine value

Difference

Control value

Machine value

Difference

Control value

C D

asa Control S

ystems A

B

Machine-

value

Positive difference from

machine value

Negative difference from

machine value

+8+7+6+5+4+3+2+1-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8

+8+7+6+5+4+3+2+1-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8

310340

370400

430460

490520

550580

Len

gth

diag

ram

Start date:_____________ C

alibration date:_______________

Difference = M

achine value - Control value

610

Appendix dasa4

C D

asa Control S

ystems A

B

5dAPR 2.0 GB C Dasa Control Systems AB

In program ProductionReport you can get acomprehensive presentation of an optional productionfile. The production results can be presented in avariety of ways to suit varying requirements.The result can be divided per species or perassortment range. They can also be divided intoproduction groups or types of trunks that you havedefined in the felling instructions. In all of these casesthe results can be shown jointly for all operators orindividually for each operator.The log bill shows the results for each diameter/length class either as number of logs or as volumes.These values can also be obtained as percentagedistribution per length class. You also get volumesand number per length class and per diameter class,and percentage distribution between the diameterclasses and between the length classes.In overview of breast heights you get the number oftrunks and volumes for different diameter classesbased on diameter of the tree at breast height.

ProductionReport1 Overview

ProductionReport

ProductionReport

Production fileBucking fileHarvester

BuyerLatest calibration

Diameter calibrationLength calibration

IdentityCalibration

Productionresult

SpeciesMatrix

Product groupTrunk type

Log billBreast height

6 dAPR 2.0 GBC Dasa Control Systems AB

1. A. 1 Production files .prd and .pri

There are two different production files that are usedfor different purpose:

Prd fileEach logging contract generates one or more .prd-filesautomatically.The prd-file is used by dasa4 to save productionstatistics. Data in screen images and for printoutscome from this file. The file is exported to an externalPC for further processing.The file contains only accumulating registers that aredetermined by the structure of the current buckinginstruction.That the registers are accumulating implies thatproduction data is added to the various registers stepby step as the bucking proceeds. This means that thesize of the file is not changed noticeably whilebucking is in progress. The file is made up of threedifferent sections as illustrated.

Data per log *Code Contents

1 Price matrix number

201 Top diameter in mm on bark

202 Top diameter in mm under bark

203 Middle diameter in mm on bark

204 Middle diameter in mm under bark

205 Butt diameter in mm on bark

206 Butt diameter in mm under bark

207 HKS middle diameter in mm on bark

208 HKS middle diameter in mm under bark

301 Length in cm

400 Volume acc. to price type, whole number

1400 Volume acc. to price type, decimal

401 Volume in m3s on bark, whole number

1401 Volume in m3s on bark, decimal

402 Volume in m3s under bark, whole number

1402 Volume in m3s under bark, decimal

500 Consecutive number of trunk.

501 Consecutive number of log in the trunk.

* The table shows maximal number of data that can besaved in the pri-file. To limit the size of the file a selection ischosen that adapts to the relevant country and the relevantcompany.

Contents of PRI-filePri-fileWhen creating a new logging contract you decideyourself whether to generate a new pri-file.The pri-file saves production statistics at log level. Anumber of data for each log are saved. This enablesgreater possibilities to obtain different types ofproduction statistics down to log level. But it alsomeans that the pri-file grows in size all the time.Production statistics from the pri-file cannot be shownin dasa4. The file is only intended for export to anexternal PC for further processing of statistics.The file is made up of three different sections asillustrated.

1. Overview 1. Production files .prd and .pri1.1

Accumulating variables with data on production

Variable no. Example of saved data

201 Log bill pieces per price matrix/species

202 Log bill volume per price matrix/species

222 Number of trunks per trunk sort/species

223 Number of trunks per operator and species

227 Number of trunks/metre class/species

232 Number of trunks/price matrix/species

236 Volume per price matrix in several differentformats

241 Total volume in several different formats

500-504 Data for DBH Breast height diameter

Contents of PRD-fileIdentity and administra-tion dataObject no.

Organisation number

etc.

Structure from usedApt-fileNumber of species

matrices

etc.

Identity and administra-tion dataObject no.

Organisation number

etc.

Structure from usedApt-fileNumber of species

matrices

etc.


2.1 Program menus

2 Description

File

Open, close and saveOpens and closes production files in normal Windows manner. Productionfiles are located in the folders:

Ongoing production: C:\dasa4\User\Obj\Concluded production: C:\dasa4\User\ObjEnd\

Add filesSee section 2.4 Add production files and section 2.2 Settings, General

SettingsSee section 2.2 Settings, General and section 2.3 Settings, matrixoverview.

Show file reading informationError messages, for example, are shown here (checksum errors, etc) orvariables in the production file that are not handled by the program.

PrintSee section 2.18 Printout, settings and section 2.20 Examples of printouts.

Latest used production filesClick the file you wish to reopen it.

ExitEnds the program module ProductionReport and returns to the settingsmenu.

CopyCopies the marked area to Clipboard. By opening a different program, eg,Exel, and using the Paste command you can process data from theproduction file in any manner you choose.

Copy entire matrixCopies the entire matrix, including column and line headings, to Clipboard. Itis not necessary to mark the matrix. By opening another program, eg, Exel,and using the Paste command it is possible to further process data from theproduction file in an optional manner.

Add assortmentThis function is only active when Matrix overview is selected. The function isused to add two or more matrices in one and the same species and isdescribed in section 2.4 Add production files.

Copy

Copy matrix

Add assortment

File Edit View Window Help

Edit

2 ProductionReport B. Description 2

Open

Close

Save

Save as

Add files

Setings

Show file reading information

Print

C:\dasa4\User\ObjEnd\Prod_1.prd



Exit



File Edit View Window HelpLeft panelToolbar

Identity

Totals

Matrix overview

Log bill

Unspecified

Breast height

File Edit View Windows Help

eseProd

Open Copy Identity Totals Matrix overview Log bill Pole Breast height

Identity informationIdentityAdministrationCalibration

TotalsTree speciesMatrixProduct groupStem type

Matrix overviewLog billUnspecifiedBreast height

Toolbar

Left panel

ViewLeft panelClick the box if you wish to see the various sub-sections of the program at theleft side of the screen (see below).

ToolbarClick the box if you wish to see the various sub-sections of the program at thetop of the screen (see below).

Select windowChoose one of the program windows by clicking the desired line. A ticked boxon the left indicates the window currently selected.

2. Description 1. Program menus2.1


File Edit View Window HelpCascadeTile horizontallyTile verticallyMinimize allArrange allClose allC:\dasa4\User\Obj\Objekt 1.prdC:\dasa4\User\Obj\Objekt 2.prdC:\dasa4\User\Obj\Objekt 3.prd

CascadeIf several production files are open simultaneously they are arranged with anoverlap.

C:\dasa4\User\Obj\Objekt 3






C:\dasa4\U C:\dasa4\U C:\dasa4\U

C:\dasa4\User\Obj\Objekt 1 C:\dasa4\User\Obj\Objekt 1 C:\dasa4\User\Obj\Objekt 1

Tile horizontallyIf several production files are open their screen size is adjusted and they areplaced one above the other.

Tile verticallyIf several production files are open their screen size is adjusted and they areplaced side by side.

Minimise allIf several production files are open their screen size is minimised to the nameline only and they are placed side by side at the bottom of the screen.

Choose production fileIf several production files are openchoose the production file that is to beactive.

2. Description 1. Program menus 2.1

Window

Identity informationTotalsMatrix overviewLog billUnspecifiedBreast heightShow file reading information...CopyCopy matrixChart, diameter as seriesChart, length as seriesMatrix chart

Click the right mouse buttonSelect windowChoose one of the program windows by clicking the desired line. The windowthat is currently active is marked by a tick in the box to the left.

Show read-in informationError messages are displayed here, for example, (checksum error, etc) or ifthere are variables found in the production file that are not dealt with by theprogram.

CopyCopy the marked area to Clipboard. By opening another program, eg, Excel,and using the Paste command it is possible to enter data from the productionfile and process it as desired.

Copy whole matrixCopy the entire matrix, including column and line headings, to Clipboard. It isnot necessary to mark the matrix. By opening another program, eg, Excel,and using the Paste command it is possible to enter data from the productionfile and process it as desired.

GraphicsGives an overall view of distribution of logs in the log bill with the aid of barcharts. The chart can either show distribution of diameter in each length class(diameter distribution as series) or distribution of length in each diameterclass (length distribution).

The functions are explained in detail in section 2.14.

Matrix chartGives an overall view of the percentage distribution of trunks within eachdiameter class with the aid of different colors. The table can be copied as acolored image (eg, to Word) or as a table of values (eg, to Excel).

The functions are explained in detail in section 2.15.


General Matrix overview

Start directory

C:\DASA\PRODUCTIONREPORT\PROD Change

Add

Use matirx code

Area value for addition of diameter classes

Area value for addition of length classes

Language

GB

OK Apply Cancel

Start directoryHere you can see the first folderthat you come to in the computerwhen opening a production file.

C:\

C:\Folder1Folder 2Folder 3Folder 4Folder 5Folder 6

c:[]

OK

Cancel1. Select unit

2. Select folder3. Click OKafter selectingthe right folder.

Alter start directory

Area value for addition of diameter/length classesIn the price matrices that are to be added the diameter classes are compared with oneanother. Diameter classes that have the same diameter value are added together into asingle diameter class in the new summed production file. Length classes are compared ina similar way.

In some cases a certain tolerance is required to avoid creating too many new classes.

In the example below the value in the box Area value for addition of diameter classesis set at 2 mm.

Diameter classes production file 1: 120 140 160 180 200 220

New summed production file: 120 140 160 180 200 220

Diameter classes production file 2: 122 142 162 182 202 222

The computer searches first for the smallest diameter class (120 mm) and then checks tofind any further diameter class in the interval 120 – 122 (120 + 2, where 2 = the value inbox Area value for addition of diameter classes). If there is such a diameter class (inour example diameter class 122 in production file 2) then it will be included in thesumming up. The new class gets the name 120. The same comparison is then made withthe other diameter classes and length classes.

Add with matrix codeUsing the function Add production files (seesection 24) several different production filescan be added into a common new productionfile.

When the box Use assortment code is notmarked:• The price matrices of the production files

are added together depending on theposition of the matrices in the matrixoverview:An example:Two production files (fil1.prd and fil2.prd)are to be added together.The price matrix at the top left in fil1.prd isadded to the price matrix at the top left infil2.prd.

Price matrix at top left in thematrix overview

• Adding then continues in the same waywith the remaining price matrices.

When the box Use assortment code ismarked:• When a price matrix is programmed there

is a Code box in which an optional codecan be entered.

• The price matrices are now paired togetherso those matrices with the same code areadded together. In this way one can be surethat the right matrices are paired together,regardless of location in the matrix overview.

• Matrices that cannot be paired together withany other matrix are included in the newproduction file without having been addedtogether.

Choose languageChoose the language for the programmodule ProductionReport

2.2. Settings, General

2. Description 2. Settings, General2.2

Tree species 1 Tree species 2 Tree species 3Pm1 Pm1 Pm1Pm2 Pm2 Pm2Pm3 Pm3 Pm3Pm4 Pm4Pm5 Pm5Pm6 Pm6Pm7 Pm7Pm8 Pm8Pm9 Pm9Pm10

Tree species Code

1 2 3 4 5 6

Buyer

BarkOnUnder

Grade (explicit)

Matrix name Description


In this setting window you determine how manyparameters are to be visible in the Matrix overviewwindow. See also section 2.12 Matrix overview.

Show parameters inmatrix overviewA summary of the contents of theassortments is shown in the“Matrix overview” menu.

Certain parameters are alwaysshown (see below). You candecide here which otherparameters are to be shown.

Matrix overview, smallest number ofparametersThe matrix overview will look like this if none of the boxesin the above setting window are “ticked”.

Matrix overview, maximum number ofparametersThe matrix overview will look like this if all of the boxes inthe above setting window are “ticked”.

2.3 Settings, Matrix overview

2. Description 3. Settings, Matrix overview 2.3

Show matrix for tree species Species 2

Matrix Number Volume Price typePm1 0 0,00 m3toubPm2 2 0,18 m3toubPm3 32 6,92 m3toubPm4 0 0,00 m3toubPm5 7 1,87 m3toubPm6 34 3,74 m3fubPm7 69 5,18 m3fubPm8 14 2,49 m3fubPm9 5 0,31 m3fub

Matrix Code Description Buyer Product group Stem type Grade Number Volume Price type Mean volume Mean length Running meter Volume (m3fub) Volume (m3fobPm1Pm2Pm3Pm4Pm5Pm6Pm7Pm8Pm9



Show

Matrix code

Description

Buyer

Produkt group

Stem type

Grade

Mean volume

Mean length

Running meter

Volume (m3fub)

Volume (m3fob)

OK ApplyCancel


Open

Close

Save

Save as

Add files

Setings...

Show file reading information...

Print




Exit


Select productionfiles for adding

First choose the unit in thecomputer where theproduction files are located.

Then select the folder in theunit where the production filesare located.

After selecting the folder itscontents will be shown here.Select production file.

Select production filesor added filesEven previously added filescan be added together.Choose here whether to showproduction files (*.prd) oradded files (*.psu) in the “Files”box.

Files to addThe files selected for adding areshown here.

AddAdd the file that you marked inthe “Files” box to the “Files toadd” box.

DeleteDelete the file that you markedin the “Files to add” box.

Perform addingAdd together the files that youplaced in the “Files to be added”box and open the summed file.

2.4 Add production filesSeveral different production files can be addedtogether to form a single file on condition that theprice matrices of the files are so alike that they can beadded.Price matrices that are to be added together must havethe same price type and a fairly similar classificationof diameters and lengths.

The adding means that equivalent price matrices inthe production files are added individually so that thenew production file will consist of a number ofsummed price matrices.To facilitate adding together you can make certainsettings that are described in section 2.2 Settings,general.

2. Description 4. Adding production files2.4

C:\Folder 1Folder 2Folder 3Folder 4Folder 5Folder 6Folder 7

c:[]

Directory

Files

Production files (*.prd)

Setup

Add

Delete

Files to add

OK Cancel

Prd1.prdPrd2.prdPrd3.prd

Prd1.prdPrd3.prd


Bucking fileInformation about the latestused bucking file when datawas saved to the production file.Here you can see the name andidentity of the bucking file, whenit was created and whichversion has been used.

Production fileData about the productionfile.

ResetTime when the productionfile was created.

StoreTime of the latest datasaving in the productionfile.

Harvester identityThe machine number is programmedin program module System informa-tion, see section 62.

Production timesInformation about when productionstarted and ended. Also times for anysub-stops. A sub-stop can be made forexample when it is necessary to showpart of the production before the entireproduction is completed.

2. Description 5. Identity 2.5

2.5 IdentityIdentity data for optional production file. Here youcan find out the name, origin and data concerning theproduction file and about the bucking file that wasused in processing.

Identity CalibrationAdministration

Production fileReset

Store

Start

Sub stop

Stop

Machine identity

Machine number

Bucking fileIdentity information

Bucking file

Created

Version

Modified desriptionDescription

Modified descriptionData, eg, whether it is an original fileor one consisting of several filesadded together

Version

Machine type

Manufacture No.


Identitetsuppgifter Calibration informationAdministration

OrganizationOrganization

Administration

District

Working team

Wood pile

ObjectObject number

Marking for cuting

Compartment number

Lot number

SubcontractorSubcontractor

Code

Name

Address

ContractBuyer

Vendor

Contract number


2.6 AdministrationAdministration data into which you can enter a largenumber of different parameters to exactly define theproduction file.

Administration dataEnter the data needed to identify theproduction file.

2. Description 6. Administration2.6

Certified

E-mail

Tele/fax


Latest calibrationLatest length or diameter calibrationand reason, if any, for calibrating.

Calibration of the system is made inprogram module 32 Calibration.

Diameter calibrationDates of previous diametercalibrations.

Length calibrationDates of previous lengthcalibrations.

2.7 CalibrationInformation about when calibration of the length anddiameter sensors was last done on the harvester head.If any particular reason for re-calibration has beenentered the text will be shown here.

2. Description 7. Calibration 2.7

Last calibration Diameter calibration Length calibration

Identity information Calibration informationAdministration


2.8 Tree speciesThe total production divided into different types oftrees is shown here. The volume is shown as:• total volume as the price types m3s under bark and

m3s over bark.• volume of average trunk as the price types m3s

under bark and m3s over bark.• unspecified volume as the price types m3s under

bark and m3s over bark.

Selection ofoperatorYou can choose toshow either the jointproduction of alloperators or theproduction of anoptional operator.

Production per tree species

2. Description 8. Tree species2.8

You can choose to show production of:• optional operator• all operators

Tree species Matrix Product group

Show total bill for operator

All

Species 1 Species 2 Species 3 Sum

Number of logs 0 0 0 0 0Total volume (m3sub) 0 0 0 0 0Total volume (m3sob) 0 0 0 0 0Mean log (m3sub) 0 0 0 0 0Mean log (m3sob) 0 0 0 0 0Unspec. volume (m3sub) 0 0 0 0 0Unspec. volume (m3sob) 0 0 0 0 0

Log type

Species 4


2.9 MatricesThe production of all price matrices for each speciesis shown here. Price type is defined individually foreach assortment and therefore the price type for eachassortment is also presented.The number of logs and mean length of the logs isalso presented.You can choose to show the production of an optionaloperator or all operators combined.

Choice of operatorYou can choose to show theproduction of all operatorscombined or that of an optionaloperator.

Choice of tree speciesChoose among the available typesof trees. All assortment ranges forthe selected types are shown.

Matrices/ tree speciesAll matrices are shown for the selectedtree species.

Volume according toprice typeThe price type can vary fordifferent assortment ranges. Theprice type is therefore shownseparately for each assortment.

The volumes are shown in theprice types that are relevant for therespective assortment.

2. Description 9. Matrices 2.9

Solid volume under/overbarkVolume converted to m3sub andm3sob.

Tree species

Spruce

Matrix1 Sum

Number of logs 0 0 0 0 0Volume (m3sub) 0 0 0 0 0Volume (m3sob) 0 0 0 0 0Volume acc. to price 0 0 0 0 0

Price type m3toub m3toub m3sub m3sub 0Mean length 0 0 0 0 0

Operator

All

Matrix 4Matrix 3 Matrix 2

Tree species Matrix Product group Log type


2.10 Product groupEach price matrix in a bucking instruction can belinked to a particular product group, eg, TIMBER,PULPWOOD or UNSPECIFIED. The productionand number of logs in all of the product groups areshown here for each species.Because the price matrices can have different pricetypes, a product group can contain several different

Choice of operatorYou can choose to show theproduction of all operatorscombined or that of an optionaloperator.

Choice of tree speciesChoose among the availabletypes of trees. All assortmentranges for the selected type areshown.

Product group / tree speciesAll product groups are shown for theselected type of trees.

2. Description 10. Product group2.10

Volume according to price typeThe price type can vary for differentassortment ranges. The price type istherefore shown separately for each productgroup.

The volumes are shown in the price typesthat are relevant for the respective productgroup.

Solid volume under/over barkVolume converted to m3sub and m3sob.

price types. If this is the case, the word “Different”will be displayed on the “Price type” line for thatproduct group. The volume is then shown convertedto price type m3s.You can choose to show the production of an optionaloperator or all operators combined.

Tree species

Spruce

Prod. gr. 1 Sum

Number of logs 0 0 0 0 0Volume (m3sub) 0 0 0 0 0 Volume (m3sob) 0 0 0 0 0Volume acc. to price 0 0 0 0 0Price type m3toub m3toub m3sub m3sub 0

Operator

All

Prod.. gr.4Prod. gr. 3Prod. gr. 2



C:\DASA480\xxx.prd

2.11 Log typeEach price matrix in a bucking instruction can belinked to a particular type of log. The production foreach type of log is shown here for each tree species.Because the price matrices can have different pricetypes, an assortment of different types of trunks maycontain several different price types. The volumes areshown here converted to the price type m3s underbark and m3s over bark.

Choice of speciesChoose among theavailable species.

Choice of log typeChoose among theavailable log types for theselected tree species. Allprice matrices are shownfor the selected log type.

Price matrices / type of logAll price matrices are shown for the selected logtype.

Total volume

The total number of logs and the total volume ofeach type of logs are also presented.Observe that production results for a log group cannotbe shown individually for different operators, all thevalues shown are for all of the operators.

2. Description 11. Log type 2.11

Trunk type codeWhen you create the various trunk types inthe bucking instructions a code is tied toeach particular trunk type.

The standard code is:

first digit = consecutive number of thespecies in the matrix.

second digit = consecutive number of thetrunk type in the selected species.

Other code types may also be used.

Log type

Tree species

Pm 1 Sum

Number of logs 0 0 0 0 0Running meter 0 0 0 0 0

Volume (m3sub) 0 0 0 0 0Volume (m3sob) 0 0 0 0 0

Pm 4Pm 3Pm 2

Spruce

Log type 1

Total volume

Number of trunks Volume (m3f)

Show volume

Under barkOn bark


Code


2. Description 12. Matrix overview2.12

Smallest number of variablesThe number of variables shown can be programmed in themenu Settings, matrice overview, see section 2.3. Someof the variables however are always shown as below.

Maximum number of variablesIf you program the maximum number of variables in themenu Settings, matrix overview, see section 2.3, thedisplay will be as below.

2.12 Matrix overviewIn the upper part of the matrix overview you can seewhich price matrices are included in the productionfile and in what order the matrices are arranged for thevarious tree species.

In the lower part you can see a summary of theproduction results for the various assotments. You candetermine the number of variables to be shown in themenu Settings, matrix overview, see section 2.3.The matrix overview is also used to add one or moreproduction files, see section 2.4. Add productionfiles.

Tree species in the production fileClick one of the matrices to change species inthe lower part of the matrix overview.

Matrices in the production fileThe price matrices included in theproduction file can be seen here. Doubleclick a matrix to come direct to it.

Upper part of matrice overview

Species 1 Species 2 Species 3Pm 1 Pm 1 Pm 1Pm 2 Pm 2 Pm 2Pm 3 Pm 3Pm 4 Pm 4Pm 5 Pm 5Pm 6 Pm 6Pm 7 Pm 7Pm 8 Pm 8Pm 9 Pm 9Pm 10


Matrix Number Volume Price typePm1 0 0,00 m3toubPm2 2 0,18 m3toubPm3 32 6,92 m3toubPm4 0 0,00 m3toubPm5 7 1,87 m3toubPm6 34 3,74 m3fubPm7 69 5,18 m3fubPm8 14 2,49 m3fubPm9 5 0,31 m3fub

Matrix Code Description Buyer Product group Stem type Grade Number Volume Price type Mean volume Mean length Running meter Volume (m3fub) Volume (m3fobPm1Pm2Pm3Pm4Pm5Pm6Pm7Pm8Pm9



Choice of treespeciesChoose among theavailable types of treespecies

Choice of price matrix

Price matrix settingsSome of the settings made whenthe price matrix was programmedare shown here. The settings cannotbe altered in this mode.

Total dataProduction data for all felled logsin this price matrix.

Piece/volumeChoose between showingproduction data as number oflogs or volume. The volumewill be displayed in the unitshown in the price type.

Absolute/PercentageChoose to show the productionin absolute figures (eithernumber of logs or volume) orshow it (number or volume) aspercentage of the entirenumber or volume of thediameter class.

Percent diameter classesPercentage distribution betweenthe different diameter classes.

Volume / diameter classThe aggregate volumes within eachdiameter class.

Percent lengthclassesPercentagedistribution betweenthe different lengthclasses.

Volume /length classThe aggregatevolumes withineach length class.

2.13 Log billThe production for each price matrix is shown herefor each tree species. The information is very detailedand can be shown in four different ways for eachlength/diameter class:• As number of logs.• As number of logs in percent of all logs in the

length class.• As volume.• As volume in percent of the total volume in the

length class.

2. Description 13. Log bill 2.13

You also get information about total volumes of eachlength and diameter class and also the proportionaldistribution within the length classes and thediameter classes.The total number of logs, total volume and meanlength for the entire assortment are also shown.

Choose among theavailable price matrix inthe selected tree species.

Code, Buyer, DescriptionData that is used to facilitate identificationof the price matrix. The data are linked tothe selected price matrix and were enteredwhen the bucking instruction wasprogrammed.

Length/Diam 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 Sum Percent Volume

310 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0,0 0,00

340 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0,0 0,00

370 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0,0 0,00

400 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0,0 0,00

430 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0,0 0,00

460 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0,0 0,00

490 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0,0 0,00

520 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0,0 0,00

550 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0,0 0,00

Sum 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Percent 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -. 0,0

Volume 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00

Species 1

MatrixMatrix 1 m3toub

Maxdiam

0

0,00

0,0

Piece Absolute

Total

0,0

BuyerCode

Description

Tree species Grade

Price type Max length

Number

Volume

Mean lengthLog bill for Setup

Running meter


310 340 370 400 430 460 490 510 540 310 340 370 400 430 460 490 520 550

28

26

24

22

20

18

16

14

12

10

8

6

4

2

0

2.14 GraphicsThis function shows distribution of logs in the log billwith the aid of four bar charts. Three of the chartsshow distribution by the number of logs. The fourthchart shows distribution in %. The function can showdistribution in two different ways:• Diameter distribution within each length class

(diameter distribution)• Length distribution within each diameter class

(length distribution).

Click the right mouse buttonin Log bill mode

Colors for diame-ter classSelect the color bydouble-clicking therespective color box.

Select chartChoose between the fourdifferent display modes;see the images at bottomof the page.

Size of the chartAutomatic: The verticalaxis of the chart (numberor %) is numberedautomatically so that thechart has sufficient space.

Fixed value: The verticalaxis of the chart gets themaximum value that youtype in the box.

PerspectiveWhen the chart is shownas “Depth” you can alterperspective of the charthere.

CopyCopy the chart as a colorimage (bitmap) that can,for example, be pasted inWord.

% distribution modeSide by side modeStacked mode

Perspective modeThe chart is shown as athree-dimensional barchart in which eachdiameter class has itsown bar in each lengthclass. The perspectivecan be altered by movingthe control to the left ofthe chart.

The different diameter classes within each lengthclass are placed on top of one another in thesame stack.

The different diameter classes within each lengthclass are placed beside one another in therespective stack.

The percentage distribution of the number oflogs between the different length classes.

122

142

162

182

File name: Fil1 Matrix: Species1 - Matrix1 Show bar as

DepthStacked

Side by side

Distribution %

Nivå

Automatic

Value

Uppdatera

Copy

Print

Cancel310 340 370 400 430 460 490 520 550

Length

0

1

2

3142122

162182

5

Num

bers

2. Description 14. Graphics2.14

Select the diame-ter classes to beshownClick in the box to show/conceal the diameterclass.

Identity informationTotalsMatrix overviewLog billUnspecifiedBrest heightShow file reading information...CopyCopy matrixChart, diameter as seriesChart, length as seiesMatrix chart

5

4

3

2

1

0

Show bar as

DepthStacked

Side by side

Distribution %

1

2

3

0

Show bar as

DepthStacked

Side by side

Distribution %

5% 5% 5%

20%

15%

10%

15%

0%

25%

310 340 370 400 430 460 490 520 550

Show bar as

DepthStacked

Side by side

Distribution %


Matrix chart Settings

Length in columns

Diameter classes

122 142 162 182

Add together Reset

Limit values and color scheme

< 5 < 15 < 20 < 30 > =

122 142 162 182310340370400430460490520550

20

25

252560

38

25 12

20 12 3338 67


Close Print Copy screen Copy value Paste Stop update of value

Vary size of the tableHere you can alter the sizeof the table. This functionallows you to view the wholetable regardless of how big itis.

If you copy the table to use itin Word, for example, youcan easily adjust the size ofthe table to suit thedocument.

Copy the table as an imageThe table is copied to clipboard as abitmap image, ie, an exact color copyof the table. The image cansubsequently be copied into a Worddocument for example.

Copy the table valuesValues of the table are copied to clipboard andcan subsequently be copied to Excel forexample.

Note that only the table values will be copied.Color data in the table will not be included.

Select limit values and colors in thetableChoose the limit values for the different colors in thetable. Click in the color boxes and choose the colorthat is to be shown for the respective table value.

Add diameter classestogetherMark several diameter classes byclicking and holding the buttondown and drag over the classes thatare to be added together.

Click on Add together.The diameter classes are added,length by length, and the newpercentage values are calculatedfrom the combined classes.

Click on Restore to retrieve theoriginal diameter classes.

Show lengths incolumnsClick in the box to shift so that thelength classes are shown ascolumns and the diameterclasses as lines.

Percentage distributionThe table shows the log bill withpercentage distribution of the trunkswithin the different diameter classes.Boxes in the table are colored accordingto the limit values and colors that youchose in Settings, see below.

Paste the values inYou can copy in the values fromanother table. To enable this, youmust click in the box Stop update ofvalue to interrupt the normalupdating.

2.15 Matrix graphicsIn this function you get an overall view of thepercentage distribution of logs within each diameterclass in the log bill.The distribution is shown as percentage figures, andalso in different colors. You yourself choose thecolors and the limit positions for the different colorsin the Settings mode.

The table can be copied as:• A color image (eg, can be used in a Word

document).• A table of values (eg, can be used in Excel).

2. Description 15. Matrix graphics 2.15


2.16 UnspecifiedThe number of unspecified loggs of differentlength classes divided into different tree species isshown here.Also the total production and the total number oftrunks of different tree species are shown.

Number of loggs ofdifferent lengthclasses/tree speciesAn example:

All poles from 10 to 10.99 mare placed in class 10.

Solid volume under/overbarkThe volume converted to m3suband m3sob.

2. Description 16. Unspecified2.16

Tree species/Length 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15Species 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Species 2 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0Species 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Unspecified bill (meter class)

Total Species 1 Species 2 Species 3 SumNumber 1 5 0 5Volume (m3sub) 0,00 0,26 0,00 0,26Volume (m3sob) 0,00 0,29 0,00 0,29


2.17 Breast heightThe production of different diameter classes basedon diameter of the trunk at breast height for eachtree species is shown here, both as number of trunksand as volumes.Also the total production and the total number oftrunks of the species are shown.

Choice of treespeciesChoose among the availabletypes of tree species.

Breast heightThe height at which thediameter of the trunk is read forsubsequent sorting in one ofthe diameter classes.

Diameter classes fordifferent diameters atbreast heightAn example:

All trunks that have a diameter atbreast height of 100 to 120 mm areplaced in class 100.

Total number and volumeTotal number of trunks and total volume ofselected tree species.

2. Description 17. Breast height 2.17

Tree speciesSpecies 1

Breast height (cm) Number

0

Volume (m3)

0,0

Total

130

Lower limit Number Volume(m3)

100 0 0

120 0 0

140 0 0

160 0 0

180 0 0200 0 0

220 0 0

240 0 0

260 0 0

280 0 0


Page header

Alignment Text

LeftCentreRight

Page foot

Alignment

LeftCentreRight

Text

OK Cancel

Scope of the printout(See also section 2.20 Examples of printouts)

Here you can indicate which parts of the productionfile that you wish to print out:

• IdentityInformation about production file, bucking file,harvester, felling, calibration dates.

• Summary (joint)Total production divided into species and withfollowing data: number of trunks, total volumeand volume of mean trunk.

• Summary (operators)Total production per operator divided intospecies and with following data: number oftrunks, total volume and volume of mean trunk.

• Matrix overviewAn overview of price matrices included in theproduction file. You decide the number ofvariables in the overview in the menu Settings,matrix overview, see section 2.3.

• UnspecifiedVolume, total and per species and also logg billwith metre classes.

• Breast heightProduction of different diameter classes basedon diameter of the trunk at breast height.

• Log billProduction of one or several price matrices inselected species.

Choose:whether the information is to be shown as piece(number of logs) or as volume

whether the information is to be shown withdiameter values in vertical and length valuesin horizontal axis (switch line and column). Theinformation is normally shown with diametervalues on horizontal axis and length values onvertical axis.

which price matrices that are to be shown

Settings for currentprinter

Preview of printoutSee section 2.19 Printout, preview onscreen.

Screen image showing exactly samecontent as the printout. You can check hereto ensure that you get the correct informa-tion before printing.

Print out the selected data

Text in page header and footerText at the top and bottom of all printed pages.The text can be of two kinds:

• Own text, that you type in the text box.

• Text from current fileYou can choose to show one or several of thevariables by clicking on box > and then on thevariable that you wish to show.

Positioning ofpage header/footerDecide whether the text isto be positioned to theleft, right or centred on thepage.

2.18 Printout, settingsYou decide here which parts of the production filethat you wish to print out and how the printout is to bemarked (page header, footer). You can also previewthe contents on screen before printing out.

2. Description 18. Printout, settings2.18

...

File namePath

DateTimeSideSide n(m)

Define print area

IdentityinformationCompilation (Common operator)

Compilation (All operators)

Unspecified

Brest height

Requested log billPiece

Transpose row and column

Volume

Pm 1Pm 2Pm 3Pm 4Pm 5Pm 6Pm 7Pm 8Pm 9

Setup...

Header/Foot..

Help

Cancel

Print...

Preview...

Matrix overview

Certification of measurementCertification of measurement

Volumem3fub

m3fob

Include product group

Mark all matrix

Open

Close

Save

Save as

Add files

Setings


Print




Exit



Define print area

Identity

Compilation (Common operator)


Unspecified

Brest height



Volume


Setup...

Header/Foot..

Help

Cancel

Print...

Preview...

Matrix overview


Volumem3fub

m3fob


Mark all matrix

Zoom 80 Page(of) 1(2) Print Exit

2.19 Printout, preview on screenHere you can preview the exact text before printing.Note that the on-screen preview is displayed page bypage and you must therefore scroll through the pagesto view all of the text.

Optional zoomType a percentage value andpress Enter to enlarge/diminish the text to an optionalsize between 20 – 300%.

Zoom, fixed valuesClick the arrows to enlarge/diminish the text in fixedsteps, from 20 – 300%, insteps of 20%.

Change pageGo to:

first page previous page next page last page

2. Description 19. Printout, preview on screen 2.19


2.20 Examples of printoutsIdentity

2. Description 20. Examples of printouts2.20

Identity informationProduction Bucking instruction

Filename: Filename:Reset date: Identity information:Save date: Create date:Start date: Version:Part end date:End date:

Harvester:Machine number:Manufacture No:Machine type:Calibration date: Control measurement date:

Organization: Subcontractor:Organization: Subcontractor:Region: Code:District: Name:Working team: Address:Wood pile:

Object: Contract:Object number: Buyer:Marking for cutting: Vendor:Comparment number: Contract number:Lot number: Contract number (VIOL):

Calibration informationLast calibrationDate:Description:

Certification of measurement:Printout date:

Harvester:Machine number:Manufacture No:Machine type:Calibration date: Control measurement date:

Production Bucking instructionFilename: Filename:Start date: Identity information:End date: Create date:

Organization: Subcontractor:Organization: Subcontractor:Print out date: Code:District: Name:Working team: Address:Wood pile:

Object: Contract:Object number: Buyer:Marking for cutting: Vendor:Comparment number: Contract number:Lot number: Contract number (VIOL):

Certification of measurement


Product groups for Species 3 Operator :CommonProduct groups Pm 1 Pm2 Pm3 Pm4

PULPWOOD SummaNumber of logs 0 0 0 00 0Volume (m3fub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00

Matrix for Species 3 Operator :CommonMatrices Pm 1 Pm2 Pm3 Pm4PULPWOOD SummaNumber of logs 0 0 0 0 0 0Volume (m3fub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume (m3fob) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume acc. to price 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Price type 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Mean length 0 0 0 0 0 0

Summary (All operators)Total

Matrices per tree species

Product groups per tree species

Type of log per tree speciesLog type for Species 3 Log type: LOG TYPE 1Number: 0 Volume (m3fob): 00,00 Volume (m3fub): 00,00

Log type Pm 1 Pm2 Pm3 Pm4 Pm5 SumNumber 0 0 0 0 0 0Volume (m3fub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Voume (m3fob) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00

Log type for SPURCE Log type: LOG TYPE 2Number: 0 Volume (m3fob): 00,00 Volume (m3fub): 00,00

Log type PULP1 PULP2 SumNumber 0 0 0Volume (m3fub) 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume (m3fob) 0,00 0,00 0,00

TotalsTotals Operator:CommonTree species Species 1 Species 2 Species 3 SumNumber of logs 0 0 0 0Total volume (m3sub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Total volume (m3sob) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Mean log (m3sub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Mean log (m3sob) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Unspec. volume(m3sub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Unspec. volume(m3sob) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00

2. Description 20. Examples of printouts 2.20

Matrix for Species 2 Operator :CommonMatrices Pm 1 Pm2 Pm3 Pm4PULPWOOD SummaNumber of logs 0 0 0 0 0 0Volume (m3fub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume (m3fob) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume acc. to price 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Price type 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Mean length 0 0 0 0 0 0

Matrix for Species 1 Operator :CommonMatrices Pm 1 Pm 2 Pm 3 Pm 4 Pm 5 SumNumber of logs 0 0 0 0 0 0Volume (m3sub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume (m3sob) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume acc. to price 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Price type 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Mean length 0 0 0 0 0 0

Product groups for Species 2 Operator :CommonProduct groups Pm 1 Pm2 Pm3 Pm4

PULPWOOD SummaNumber of logs 0 0 0 00 0Volume (m3fub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00

Product groups for Species 1 Operator :CommonProduct groups Prod. gr. 1 Prod. gr. 2 SumNumber of logs 0 0 0Volume (m3sub) 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume (m3sob) 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume acc. to price 0,00 0,00 0,00Price type 0,00 0,00 0,00

Log type for Species 2 Log type: LOG TYPE 1Number: 0 Volume (m3fob): 00,00 Volume (m3fub): 00,00

Log type Pm 1 Pm2 Pm3 Pm4 Pm5 SumNumber 0 0 0 0 0 0Volume (m3fub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Voume (m3fob) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00

Log type for SPURCE Log type: LOG TYPE 2Number: 0 Volume (m3fob): 00,00 Volume (m3fub): 00,00

Log type PULP1 PULP2 SumNumber 0 0 0Volume (m3fub) 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume (m3fob) 0,00 0,00 0,00

Log type for Species 1 Log type: LOG TYPE 1Number: 0 Volume (m3sob): 00,00 Volume (m3sub): 00,00

Log type Pm 1 Pm 2 Pm 3 Pm 4 Pm 5 SumNumber 0 0 0 0 0 0Volume (m3fub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Voume (m3fob) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00

Log type for Species 1 Log type: LOG TYPE 2Number: 0 Volume (m3sob): 00,00 Volume (m3sub): 00,00

Log type Pm 1 Pm 2 SumNumber 0 0 0Volume (m3fub) 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume (m3fob) 0,00 0,00 0,00


Matrix for Species 1 Operator :JohnMatrix Pm 1 Pm2 Pm3 Pm4PULPWOOD SummaNumber of logs 0 0 0 0 0 0Volume (m3fub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume (m3fob) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume acc. to price 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Price type 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Mean length 0 0 0 0 0 0

Matrix for Species 1 Operator :EricMatrix Pm 1 Pm2 Pm3 Pm4PULPWOOD SummaNumber of logs 0 0 0 0 0 0Volume (m3fub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume (m3fob) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume acc. to price 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Price type 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Mean length 0 0 0 0 0 0

Matrix for Species 1 Operator :DavidMatrix Pm 1 Pm 2 Pm 3 Pm 4PULPWOOD SummaNumber of logs 0 0 0 0 0 0Volume (m3sub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume (m3sob) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume acc. to price 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Price type 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Mean length 0 0 0 0 0 0

Summary (operator)Total per operator

Matrices per tree species and operator

2. Description 20. Examples of printouts2.20

Product groups per tree species and operator

TotalsTotals Operator:JohnTree species PINE SPURCE HARDWOOD SumNumber of logs 0 0 0 0Total volume (m3fub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Total volume (m3fob) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Mean log (m3fub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Mean log (m3fob) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Pole voume(m3fub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Pole voume(m3fob) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Number of timber 0 0 0 0

TotalsTotals Operator:EricTree species PINE SPURCE HARDWOOD SumNumber of logs 0 0 0 0Total volume (m3fub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Total volume (m3fob) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Mean log (m3fub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Mean log (m3fob) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Pole voume(m3fub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Pole voume(m3fob) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Number of timber 0 0 0 0

TotalsTotals Operator:DavidTree species Species 1 Species 2 Species 3 SumNumber of logs 0 0 0 0Total volume (m3sub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Total volume (m3sob) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Mean log (m3sub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Mean log (m3sob) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Pole voume(m3sub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Pole voume(m3sob) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Number of timber 0 0 0 0

Matrix for Species 2 Operator :JohnMatrix Pm 1 Pm2 Pm3 Pm4PULPWOOD SummaNumber of logs 0 0 0 0 0 0Volume (m3fub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume (m3fob) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume acc. to price 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Price type 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Mean length 0 0 0 0 0 0


Matrix for Species 2 Operator :DavidMatrix Pm 1 Pm 2 Pm 3 Pm4PULPWOOD SummaNumber of logs 0 0 0 0 0 0Volume (m3sub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume (m3sob) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume acc. to price 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Price type 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Mean length 0 0 0 0 0 0

Matrix for Species 3 Operator :JohnMatrix Pm 1 Pm2 Pm3 Pm4PULPWOOD SummaNumber of logs 0 0 0 0 0 0VolumMatrix 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume (m3fob) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume acc. to price 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Price type 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Mean length 0 0 0 0 0 0


Matrix for Species 3 Operator :DavidMatrix Pm 1 Pm 2 Pm 3 Pm4PULPWOOD SummaNumber of logs 0 0 0 0 0 0Volume (m3sub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume (m3sob) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume acc. to price 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Price type 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Mean length 0 0 0 0 0 0

Product groups for Species 1 Operator :JohnProduct groups Pm 1 Pm2 Pm3 Pm4Number of logs 0 0 0 0Volume (m3fub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume (m3sob) 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume acc. to price 0,00 0,00 0,00Price type 0,00 0,00 0,00

Product groups for Species 1 Operator :EricProduct groups Pm 1 Pm2 Pm3 Pm4Number of logs 0 0 0 0Volume (m3fub) 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume (m3sob) 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume acc. to price 0,00 0,00 0,00Price type 0,00 0,00 0,00

Product groups for Species 1 Operator :DavidProduct groups Prod. gr. 1 Prod. gr. 2 SumNumber of logs 0 0 0Volume (m3sub) 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume (m3sob) 0,00 0,00 0,00Volume acc. to price 0,00 0,00 0,00Price type 0,00 0,00 0,00








Log bill (volume)

Log bill (piece, transpose line and column)

Matrix overview

Species 1 Species 2 Species 3Pm1 Pm1 Pm 1Pm2 Pm2 Pm 2Pm3 Pm3Pm4 Pm4Pm5 Pm5

Show matrix for tree species: PINE Matrix Code Description Buyer Product group Stem type Grade Number Volume Price type Mean length Volume (m3spb)

Pm 1 1234 11 Buyer 1 Prodgr 1 Stemt 1 m3toubPm 2 3651 12 Buyer 2 Prodgr 2 Stemt 1 m3toubPm 3 103 13 Buyer 3 Prodgr 3 Stemt 1 m3toubPm 4 376 14 Buyer 4 Prodgr 4 Stemt 1 m3toub

Matrix overview

2. Description 20. Examples of printouts 2.20

Log bill Volume for Species 1Matrix: Pm 5 Matrix code: Description: Buyer:

Max diameter: 900 Max length: 580 Price type: m3toub Grade: 11111000000Number: 24 Volume: 4,17 Mean length: 438,8 Running meter:

Lc/Dc 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 Sum % Vol.310 0,06 . . . 0,30 . . . 0,36 8,7 0,36340 0,08 . . . . . . . 0,08 2,0 0,08370 . 0,11 . . . . . . 0,11 2,6 0,11400 0,08 0,10 . . 0,18 . 0,25 0,28 0,90 21,6 0,90430 0,20 0,11 . 0,19 . . . . 0,50 12,0 0,50460 0,09 . . . . . . 0,36 0,45 10,7 0,45490 . . 0,16 . . . . . 0,16 3,9 0,16520 . . 0,17 . 0,27 0,32 . . 0,76 18,2 0,76550 . 0,15 0,21 0,22 0,26 . . . 0,84 20,1 0,84Sum. 0,52 0,47 0,54 0,41 1,02 0,32 0,25 0,64 4,17% 12,4 11,3 12,9 9,9 24,5 7,6 6,0 15,4 100Vol. 0,52 0,47 0,54 0,41 1,02 0,32 0,25 0,64 4,17 ..

Log bill Piece for Species 1Matrix: Pm 5 Matrix code: Description: Buyer:

Max diameter: 900 Max length: 580 Price type: m3toub Grade: 11111000000Number: 24 Volume: 4,17 Mean length: 438,8 Running meter:

Dc/Lc 310 340 370 400 430 460 490 520 550 Sum % Vol.160 1 1 . 1 2 1 . . . 6 12,4 0,52180 . . 1 1 1 . . . 1 4 11,3 0,47200 . . . . . . 1 1 1 3 12,9 0,54220 . . . . 1 . . . 1 2 9,9 0,41240 2 . . 1 . . . 1 1 5 24,5 1,02260 . . . . . . . 1 . 1 7,6 0,32280 . . . 1 . . . . . 1 6,0 0,25300 . . . 1 . 1 . . . 2 15,4 0,64Sum. 3 1 1 5 4 2 1 3 4 24 . .% 8,7 2,0 2,6 21,6 12,0 10,7 3,9 18,2 20,1 . 100 .Vol. 0,36 0,08 0,11 0,90 0,50 0,45 0,16 0,76 0,84 . . 4,17


Matrix Code Description Buyer Number of logs Volume Price type Running meter Mean lengthSPECIES 1Pm 1 1234 11 Buyer 1 23 4,91 m3toub 85,4 371,3Pm 2 3651 12 Plats 2 37 7,02 m3toub 121,9 329,4Pm 3 103 13 Plats 3 12 2,10 m3toub 42,3 352,5Pm 4 376 14 Plats 4 61 15,90 m3toub 231,9 380,1SPECIES 2Pm 1 4402 21 Plats 1 19 3,75 m3toub 75,7 398,4Pm 2 7245 22 Plats 2 50 12,94 m3toub 211,5 423,0Pm 3 0223 23 Plats 3 18 4,12 m3toub 73,3 407,2Pm 4 1432 24 Plats 4 54 14,58 m3toub 217,4 402,5

Sem type CodeNumber of trunks Number of logsRunning meterVolume(m3) Mean trunkSPECIES 1Stem type 1 11 7 23 85,4 4,91 0,701Stem type 2 12 9 37 121,9 7,02 0,780Stem type 3 13 4 12 42,3 2,10 0,525Stem type 4 14 21 61 231,9 15,90 0,757SPECIES 2Stem type 1 21 5 19 75,7 3,75 0,750Stem type 2 22 12 50 211,5 12,94 1,078Stem type 3 23 5 18 73,3 4,12 0,824Stem type 4 24 13 54 217,4 14,58 1,121

Product group Number of logs Volume /price type Price type Volume(m3) Mean lengthSPECIES 1Product group 1 43 13,51 m3toub 20,63 371,3Product group 2 93 27,90 m3toub 42,63 329,4Product group 3 45 12,23 m3toub 18,68 352,5Product group 4 17 3,81 m3toub 5,82 380,1SPECIES 2Product group 1 29 6,81 m3toub 10,39 398,4Product group 2 59 15,11 m3toub 23,06 423,0Product group 3 11 2,41 m3toub 3,68 407,2Product group 4 52 12,98 m3toub 19,81 402,5

Total Number of trunks Number of logs Running meter Volume(m3) Mean trunkSPECIES 1 41 198 481,5 29,93 0,710SPECIES 2 35 141 577,9 35.39 0,936

SummaryMatrix, Stem type, Product group, Total

2.20 2. Description 20. Examples of printouts


C:\DASA480\xxx.prd

Matrix Product group

Show total bill for operator

All

Species 1 Species 2 Species 3 Sum

Number of logs 0 0 0 0 0Total volume (m3sub) 0 0 0 0 0Total volume (m3sob) 0 0 0 0 0Mean log (m3sub) 0 0 0 0 0Mean log (m3sob) 0 0 0 0 0Unspec.volume (m3sub) 0 0 0 0 0Unspec.volume (m3sob) 0 0 0 0 0Number of timber 0 0 0 0 0

Log type

File Edit View Show Windows Help

eseProd

Open Identity information Totals Matrix overview Log bill Unspecified Breast height

Identity informationIdentntityAdministrationCalibration



3.1 Opening production file

7

11

12

3 Proceed as follows3. Proceed as follows 3

3

4

8

5 9

6 10 2

1 Open program ProductionReport.

2 You can have several different productionfiles open at the same time. In menuWindow you can choose which file is to beactive.

3 To open a production file: Click Open.Select and open optional production file inthe normal Windows manner. Productionfiles have the suffix .prd.

3.2 Tree species4 Click Tree species in the list on the left or

…

5 … click Totals at the top and then ifnecessary click the Tree species flap or …

6 … in the menu window Show: select Totalsand then click Tree species.

7 Choose to show the production for alloperators or for an optional operator.

3.3 Matrix8 Click Matrix in the list on the left or …

9 … click Totals at the top and then ifnecessary click the Matrix flap or …

10 … in the menu window Show: select Totalsand then click Matrix.

11 Choose among the available Tree species.


Tree species

Spruce

Matrix 1 Sum

Number of logs 0 0 0 0 0Volume (m3sub) 0 0 0 0 0Volume (m3sob) 0 0 0 0 0Volume acc. to price 0 0 0 0 0

Price type m3toub m3toub m3sub m3sub 0Mean length 0 0 0 0 0

Operator

All

Matrix 4Matrix 3Matrix 2


Species 4

Tree species



eseProd





3.4 Product group1 Click Product group in the list on the left

or …

2 … click Totals at the top and then ifnecessary click the Product group flap or…

3 … in the menu window Show: selectSummary and then click Product group.



3.5 Log type6 Click Log type in the list on the left or …

7 … click Totals at the top and then ifnecessary click the Log type flap or …

8 … in the menu window Show: select Totalsand then click Log type.


10 Choose among the available Log types inthe selected tree species.

11 In addition to production data concerningthe various assortments for each type oftrunk the total data is also shown in pricetype m3s for all felled trunks in the selectedtype of trunk.

4

5

1

3. Proceed as follows 4. Product group3.4

2

10

9

6

117

73 8

Log type

Tree species

Pm 1 Sum

Number of logs 0 0 0 0 0Running meter 0 0 0 0 0

Volume (m3sub) 0 0 0 0 0Volume (m3sob) 0 0 0 0 0

Pm 4Pm 3Pm 2

Spruce

Log type 1

Total volume

Number of trunks Volume (m3f)

Show volume

Under barkOn bark


Code

Tree species

Spruce

Prod. gr. 1 Sum

Number of logs 0 0 0 0 0Volume (m3sub) 0 0 0 0 0 Volume (m3sob) 0 0 0 0 0Volume acc. to price 0 0 0 0 0Price type m3toub m3toub m3sub m3sub 0

Operator

All

Prod.. gr.4Prod. gr. 3Prod. gr. 2




eseProd





3.6 Matrix summary1 Click Matrix summary in the list on the

left or …

2 … click Matrix summary on the upper lineor …

3 … in the menu window Show: click Matrixoverview .

4 Double click on the name of the matrix togo to the matrix.

5 Click an optional matrix in a particularspecies …

6 … so that matrices of the species can beseen in the lower window.The number of parameters shown can vary,depending on what settings you have madein menu File/Settings/Matrix overview(see section 2.3).

1

23

4

5

6

3. Proceed as follows 6. Matrix summary 3.6

Species 1 Species 2 Species 3Pm 1 Pm 1 Pm 1Pm 2 Pm 2 Pm 2Pm 3 Pm 3Pm 4 Pm 4Pm 5 Pm 5Pm 6 Pm 6Pm 7 Pm 7Pm 8 Pm 8Pm 9 Pm9Pm 10


Matrix Number Volume Price typePm 1 0 0,00 m3toubPm 2 2 0,18 m3toubPm 3 32 6,92 m3toubPm 4 0 0,00 m3toubPm 5 7 1,87 m3toubPm 6 34 3,74 m3fubPm 7 69 5,18 m3fubPm 8 14 2,49 m3fubPm 9 5 0,31 m3fub


C:\Mapp 1Mapp 2Mapp 3Mapp 4Mapp 5Mapp 6Mapp 7

c:[]

Directory

Files

Production files (*.prd)

Setup

Add

Delete

Files to add

OK Cancel

Prd1.prdPrd2.prdPrd3.prd

Prd1.prdPrd3.prd


Start directory

C:\DASA\PRODUCTIONREPORT\PROD Change

Add

Use matrix code

Area value for addition of diameter classes

Area value for addition of length classes

Language

GB

OK Apply Cancel

3.7 Adding production files

Alter/check settings

1 Click Setup in the File menu.

2 When you are in the Add files window youcan also click Setup.

3 Choose whether to have the box Use assort-ment code active (Description: see section2.2 Settings, general).

4 Check/alter values in both of the boxesArea values … (Description: see section2.2 Settings, general).

5 Click OK.

Add files

6 Click Add files in the File menu.

7 You can add production files (*.prd) andalso previously added files (*psu).Choose here whether the file is to be aproduction file or a previously added file.

8 Select unit.

9 Select folder.

10 Click the file of choice.

11 Clic Add

12 The filename will now be seen in the boxFiles to add.

13 Repeat items 8 – 12 for remaining files thatare to be added.

14 If you wish to remove a file from the Addfiles box: Mark the file and click Delete.

15 Klick OK to add the files.

3

1

4

6

8

9

7

10

11 2 12

14 15

5

3. Proceed as follows 7. Adding production files3.7

Open

Close

Save

Save as

Add files

Setings


Print




Exit

File Edit View Show Window Help



eseProd





3.8 Log bill1 Click Log bill in the list on the left or …

2 … click Log bill on the upper line or …

3 … in the menu window Show: click Logbill.


5 Choose among the available matrices forthe selected species.

6 Choose whether to show production asPiece (number of trunks) or Volume.

7 The volume is in the unit shown in the boxPrice type.

8 Choose to show the production in Absolutefigures (number of trunks or volume) or asPercentage (percentage of entire number orvolume of the diameter class).

9 In addition to the log bill Total data is alsoshown in price type m3s for all felled trunksin this price matrix.

4

5

6

8

97

3. Proceed as follows 8. Log bill 3.8

1

23

m3toub

MaxdiamTotal

Grade

Price type Max length

Number

Volume

Mean lengthSetup

Running meter0

0,00

0,0

0,0

Species 1

MatrixMatrix 1

Piece Absolute

BuyerCode

Description

Tree speciesLog bill for

Lgh/Diam 160 180 200 220 240 260

310 0 0 0 0 0 0

340 0 0 0 0 0 0

370 0 0 0 0 0 0

400 0 0 0 0 0 0

430 0 0 0 0 0 0

460 0 0 0 0 0 0

490 0 0 0 0 0 0

520 0 0 0 0 0 0

550 0 0 0 0 0 0

Sum 0 0 0 0 0 0

Percent 0 0 0 0 0 0

Volume 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00


3.9 Graphics1 When you show the log bill, click the right

mouse button and select Graphics, diame-ter distribution or Graphics, lengthdistribution.

2 Choose which kind of chart you wish toshow, Depth, Stack, Side by side or Distri-bution %.

3 If you have chosen Depth you can alter theperspective of the image using the control.

4 Choose whether you wish the vertical axisto be numbered Automatically or with aFixed value that you type in the box.

5 Choose which diameter/length classes thatare to be shown by clicking in the boxes.

6 If you select Copy you can paste a colorimage of the actual chart in another pro-gram.

3. Proceed as follows 9. Graphics3.9

1

6

3

4

2

122

142

162

182

5


460 490 520 550

142122

162182

5

Show bar as

DepthStacked

Side by side

Distribution %

Nivå

Automatic

Value

Uppdatera

Copy

Print

Cancel



122 142 162 182310340370400430460490520550

20

25

252560

38

25 12

20 12 3338 67


Close Print Copy screen Copy value Paste Stop update of value


Length in columns

Diameter classes

122 142 162 182

Add together Reset

Limit values and color scheme

< 5 < 15 < 20 < 30 > =

3. Proceed as follows 10. Matrix graphics 3.10

3.10 Matrix graphics1 When you show the log bill, click the right

mouse button and select Matrix chart.

2 Click the flap Settings to set the limitvalues and colors and to add together thediameter classes.

3 Choose the limit values for the differentcolors in the table by clicking the arrowboxes at the respective figure value.

4 Click in the color boxes and choose thecolor that is to be shown for the respectivetable value.

5 To add together the diameter classes: Markseveral diameter classes by clicking andholding the button down and drag over theclasses that are to be added together.

6 Click on Add together.

7 Click on Restore to retrieve the originaldiameter classes.

8 You can alter the size of the table using thecontrol.

9 Copy the table to clipboard as a color imageby clicking Copy screen.

10 Click Copy value to copy the figure valuesof the table to clipboard. Color data in thetable will not be included in this copy.

1

8

7

34

6

5

2

9 10



eseProd





3.11 Unspecified1 Click Unspecified in the list on the left or

…

2 … click Unspecified on the upper line or …

3 … in the menu window Show: clickUnspecified.

4 In addition to the pole bill Total data is alsoshown 1

23

4

3. Proceed as follows 11. Poles3.11

Tree species/Length 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15Species 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Species 2 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0Species 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Unspecified bill (meter class)

Total Species 1 Species 2 Species 3 SumNumber 1 5 0 5Volume (m3sub) 0,00 0,26 0,00 0,26Volume (m3sob) 0,00 0,29 0,00 0,29



eseProd





Tree speciesSpecies 1

Breast height (cm) Number

0

Volume (m3)

0,0

Total

130

Lower limit Number Volume(m3)

100 0 0

120 0 0

140 0 0

160 0 0

180 0 0200 0 0

220 0 0

240 0 0

260 0 0

280 0 0

3.12 Breast height1 Click Breast height in the list on the left or

…

2 … click Breast height on the upper line or…

3 … in the menu window Show: click Breastheight.


5 In addition to production data concerningthe various diameter classes at Breast heightTotal data is also shown in m3s for allfelled trunks in the selected species.

1

2

4

5

3. Proceed as follows 12. Breast height 3.12

3


Page header

Alignment Text

LeftCentreRight

Page foot

Alignment

LeftCentreRight

Text

OK Cancel

3.13 Printout

Choose scope of the printout

1 Click Print in the File menu.

2 Choose which parts of the production filethat you wish to print out by clicking one ormore boxes. Examples of how the printoutslook are found in section 2.18 Examples ofprintouts.

3 Click the log bill(s) you wish to print out. Ifyou wish to mark several log bills, keep theCtrl key pressed in while clicking theadditional bills.

4 Choose whether you wish the log bill to beprinted out as pieces (number of logs) or asvolumes.

5 The log bill is normally printed with dia-meters on the horizontal axis and lengths onthe vertical axis. Click the box if you wishto changeover so that lengths are printed onthe horizontal axis and diameters on thevertical axis.

Page header/footer

6 If you wish to have special text in theheader or footer: Click Header/Footer.

7 Choose whether the text in the header/footeris to be on the left, right or centred.

8 Type desired own text in the box.

9 You can also include a number of variablesretrieved direct from the production file.Click the > box.

10 By clicking any of the variable or date/time variables, the information will bepresented in the page header or footer.


2

3

11

10

97

6

4

5

Variables

Date/timevariables

3. Proceed as follows 13. Printout3.13

1

Open

Close

Save

Save as

Add files

Setings


PrintC:\dasa4\User\ObjEnd\Prod_1.prd



Exit

File Edit View Show Window Help

8

File namePath

DateTimeSideSide n(m)

Define print area

Identity



Unspecified

Brest height



Volume


Setup...

Header/Foot..

Help

Cancel

Print...

Preview...

Matrix overview


Volumem3fub

m3fob


Mark all matrix


Define print area

Identity



Unspecified

Brest height



Volume


Setup...

Header/Foot..

Help

Cancel

Print...

Preview...

Matrix overview


Volumem3fub

m3fob


Mark all matrix

Zoom 80 Page(av) 1(2) Print Exit

Preview and print out

1 Click Preview if you wish to check onscreen before printing out.

2 To enlarge/diminish the text to an optionalsize between 20 – 300%:Type an optional value and press Enter onthe keyboard.

3 To enlarge/diminish the text in fixed stepsfrom 20 – 300% in steps of 20%:Click the arrow keys.

4 To change page, click one of the arrowkeys.Note that the on-screen preview is displayedpage by page and you must change thepages to view all of the text.

5 Click Print to print out direct from thePreview menu.

6 Click Exit to return to the Print menu.

7 Click Setup if you wish to check or alterthe printer settings.

8 Click Print to print out.

7

1

8

3. Proceed as follows 13. Printout 3.13

2

3

4

first page previous page next page last page 5 6


ManualFileTransfer

Version: 2.0 GB

dAFT 2.0 GB C Dasa Control Systems AB

Contents

Contents

FileTransfer ___________________________ 51 Summary __________________________ 52 Description_________________________ 63 Proceed as follows __________________ 73.1 Set baud rate and serial port ______________ 73.2 Connect external unit ____________________ 83.3 Copy files from the bucking computer to

external drive __________________________ 93.4 Copy files from external drive to the

bucking computer_______________________ 103.5 Delete files_____________________________ 11

dAFT 2.0 GBC Dasa Control Systems AB

5dAFT 2.0 NO C Dasa Control Systems AB

FileTransfer1 SummaryFileTransfer is a standard procedure fortransmitting data between the bucking computerand a personal computer or a memory card, forexample.An important field of use for FileTransfer is thetransmission of machine variables, or price lists,to the bucking computer.

FileTransfer

Transmitting filesfrom the bucking

computer toexternal drive.

Formattingmemory card.

FileTransfer

Transmitting filesfrom externaldrive to the

buckingcomputer.

6 dAFT 2.0 NOC Dasa Control Systems AB

2. Description

Tranmitting speed (baudrate)

Automatic change of baudrate

Serial output

Language

4800

Com1

GB

Ok

Archive Help

Settings Server Erase Transmit Connect Abort

PcC:\

Packet No

Connected unit

c:[]

C:\folder xfolder yfolder z

No. of attempts 0

Baud

Select

Apt1.aptApt2.aptApt3.apt

*.apt

Serial output:

Server modeOne of the drives must be set in servermode when transmission is to be madebetween an external drive (eg, personalcomputer) and the bucking computer.

If the bucking computer is to control thetransmission the external drive must beset in server mode (card reader isalways set in server mode).

If the external drive is to control thetransmission then the bucking computermust be set in server mode by clickingon Server.Click on Abort to return to normal mode.

Delete/formatDelete selected file or formatmemory card.

TransmitBegin transmission of selected file/files to/fromthe bucking computer.

Choose baud rateBaud rate is the speed at which data is transmitted betweenthe two computers. Both computers must be set at the samebaud rate. The highest possible baud rate should be used toachieve short transmission times.

The following rates can be set:

• 1200 • 19200

• 2400 • 38400

• 4800 • 57600

• 9600

Rate changeIf the box is crossed an attemptwill be made to choose thespeed selected in the boxTransmission speed when anexternal drive is connected. Thestandard rate 1200 baud will bechosen if the attempt isunsuccessful.

Select serial portSelect the serial port that isused for data transmission..

Choose languageChoose a language for theprogram menus.

ConnectClick here to opencommunication withexternal drive.

Select file/files in thebucking computerSelect drive, folder, file type and file/files that are to be transmitted fromthe bucking computer to externaldrive.

Select file/files inconnected driveSelect the file or files inthe category of files thatare to be transmitted tothe bucking computer.

Baud rate and serial portShows current setting of baud rateand serial port.

Activity listShows the activities that haveoccurred while connected andtransmission from/to external drive.

Number of transmitted“packets”Transmission is split into a numberof “packets”. Here you see howmany “packets” have beentransmitted.

Number of attempts toconnectThe bucking computer makes anew attempt to connect an externaldrive if the first attempt isunsuccessful. Here you see howmany attempts have been made.The bucking computer makes amaximum of 10 attempts toconnect.

2 Description

2


3. Proceed as follows

3 Proceed asfollows

3.1 Set baud rate andserial port

1 Open the program FileTransfer.

2 Click Settings.

Manual setting of speed3 Click in the box and select suitable baud

rate.

6

3

4

2

Automatic change of baud rateThe following occurs when the box Automatic change ofbaud rate in the Settings menu is crossed and the unitsare connected to each other:

• Calling is made at the rate of 1200 baud.

• The bucking computer asks whether the external unitcan transmit at the rate shown in box Transmittingspeed.

• If the answer is yes, the rate will be changed for boththe bucking computer and the external unit.

• Transmission will otherwise continue at 1200 baud.

FACTS

5

3

7

Archive Help


PcC:\

Packet No

Connected unit

c:[]


No. of attempts 0

Baud

Select


*.apt

Serial output:

Tranmitting speed (baudrate)

Automatic change of baudrate

Serial output

Language

4800

Com1

GB

Ok

Setting with automatic change of baud rate4 Click in the box Automatic change of

baud rate to activate the function (cross inthe box).

5 Select the new baud rate (see FACTS boxbelow).

Select serial port6 Click in the box and select the serial port

that is used for transmission.

Exit settings7 Click OK to confirm the new choices and

close the settings box.


3. Proceed as follows 2. Connect external unit

Archive Help


PcC:\

Packet No

Connected unit

c:[]


No. of attempts 0

Baud

Select


*.apt

Serial output:

3.2 Connect external unit1 Open the program FileTransfer.

2 Connect the external unit with cable to theserial port that you have selected in theSettings menu (see section 3.1). The serialport used is shown in the box at the bottomof the window.

3 Check that the baud rate is correct (seesection 3.1). The current baud rate is shownin the box at the bottom of the window. Thestandard rate for Kermit is 1200 baud butother rates may occur.

4 Either the bucking computer or the externalunit must be in server mode.If transmission to an external personalcomputer is controlled from the buckingcomputer the computer is to be set in servermode.If transmission is controlled from anexternal personal computer then thebucking computer must be set in servermode by clicking on Server.An external unit in the form of a cardreader is always in server mode.

5 Click Connect.

6 The bucking computer now attempts toconnect to the external unit.

7 You can see in the Activity box whetherconnection is made or not.

8 If the bucking computer needs to makemore than one attempt it will be seen in thebox Number of attempts.

8

7

3

5

2

4

3.2


3. Proceed as follows 3. Copy files from the bucking computer to external drive

Archive Help


PcC:\

Packet No

Connected unit

c:[]


No. of attempts 0

Baud

Select


*.apt

Serial output:

3.3 Copy files from thebucking computer to externaldrive1 Open the program FileTransfer.

2 Make any necessary settings and connectexternal drive according to sections 3.1 and3.2.

3 Select the type of files you wish to transmit.The following types of file exist:*.* = All files*.apt = Bucking files*.prd = Production files*.stm = Trunk profile files*.apt, *.prd, *.stm = all three of the above

4 Select drive.

5 Select folder.Double click to open/select the folders.On double clicking a folder it is shownwhich folders (in the main folder level) areincluded in the folder. Files in the folder areshown in the box to the right.

6 Select file/files. Hold the Ctrl buttonpressed down on the computer keyboardand click on the files desired if you wantmore than one.

7 Click Transmit.

8 You can follow the transmission in theActivity box and in box Packet No..

6

8

3

7

5

4

3.3


3. Proceed as follows 4. Copy files from external drive to the bucking computer

Archive Help


PcC:\

Packet No

Connected unit

c:[]


No. of attempts 0

Baud

Select


*.apt

Serial output:

3.4 Copy files fromexternal drive to the buckingcomputer1 Open the program FileTransfer.

2 Make any necessary settings and connectexternal drive according to sections 3.1 and3.2.

3 Select the drive and folder to which thetransmitted files are to be saved in thebucking computer:Select drive first.

4 Select folder.Double click to open/select the folders. Ondouble clicking a folder it is shown whichfolders (in the main folder level) areincluded in the folder.

5 Select the file/files that are to be transmittedby clicking on files in box Connecteddrive.Hold the Ctrl button pressed down on thecomputer keyboard and click on the filesdesired if you want more than one.

6 You can also choose all files in a particularcategory.The following types of file exist:*.* = All files*.apt = Bucking files*.prd = Production files*.stm = Trunk profile files

7 Click Select. All files in the selectedcategory will now be selected.

8 Click Transmit.

9 You can follow the transmission in theActivity box and in box Packet No..

6

9

5

8

4

3 7

3.4


3. Proceed as follows 5. Delete files

Archive Help


PcC:\

Packet No

Connected unit

c:[]


No. of attempts 0

Baud

Select


*.apt

Serial output:

3.5 Delete files1 Open the program FileTransfer.

Delete files in the bucking computer2 Select file/files that are to be deleted (in box

Pc) in the manner described in section 3.3.

3 Click Erase.

4 Click Yes.

Delete files in external drive5 Make any necessary settings and connect

external unit according to sections 3.1 and3.2.

6 Select file/files that are to be deleted (in boxConnected drive) in the manner describedin section 3.4.

7 Click Erase.

8 Click Yes.

Formatting memory card9 Make any necessary settings and connect

the drive with memory card according tosections 3.1 and 3.2.

10 Click Erase.

11 Click in the box Format memory card.Observe that formatting erases all earlierinformation that has been saved on thememory card.

12 Click Yes.

4

11

3

2 6

Format memory card

Delete files?

Yes No

7

8

10

12

3.5


ManualOptimizationBuilder

Version: 2.0 GB

dAOB 2.0 GB C Dasa Control Systems AB

Contents

Contents

OptimizationBuilder ____________________ 51 Summary __________________________ 51.1 Matrices ______________________________ 51.2 Identity ________________________________ 61.3 Common variables ______________________ 61.4 Quick guide, creating new bucking

instructions ____________________________ 72 Description_________________________ 82.1 Program menus ________________________ 82.2 Matrix overview ________________________ 132.3 Bucking overview _______________________ 142.4 Analysis of price list _____________________ 152.5 Identity ________________________________ 162.6 Tree species ___________________________ 172.7 Bark function ___________________________ 182.8 Demand _______________________________ 192.9 Grade _________________________________ 202.10 Product groups _________________________ 212.11 Trunk types ____________________________ 222.12 Breast height (DBH) _____________________ 232.13 Sound knot ____________________________ 242.14 Machine, basic setting ___________________ 252.15 Matrices, common part __________________ 262.16 Others settings _________________________ 272.17 Price matrix ___________________________ 282.18 Color matrix ___________________________ 292.19 Demand matrix _________________________ 302.20 Limit matrix ____________________________ 312.21 Pole matrix ____________________________ 322.22 Line price ______________________________ 332.23 Length and diameter classes _____________ 343 Proceed as follows __________________ 353.1 Opening bucking instructions _____________ 353.2 Saving bucking instructions ______________ 373.3 Tree species ___________________________ 383.4 Bark function ___________________________ 393.5 Demand _______________________________ 403.6 Grade _________________________________ 413.7 Product groups _________________________ 423.8 Stem type _____________________________ 433.9 Breast height (DBH) _____________________ 443.10 Sound knot ____________________________ 453.11 Machine settings _______________________ 463.12 Create new and delete matrices ___________ 473.13 New matrix with earlier one as basis _______ 483.14 Diameter classes _______________________ 493.15 Length classes _________________________ 503.16 Enter prices ____________________________ 523.17 Line price-list __________________________ 543.18 Matrix variables ________________________ 563.19 Color matrix ___________________________ 583.20 Demand matrix _________________________ 603.21 Limit matrix ____________________________ 633.22 Pole matrix ____________________________ 643.23 Bucking overview _______________________ 653.24 Analysis of price list _____________________ 66

dAOB 2.0 GBC Dasa Control Systems AB

5dAOB 2.2 en C Dasa Control Systems AB

NOTEThe program OptimizationBuilder, described in thefollowing pages, may appear differently dependingon which machine type is selected. Not allfunctions are included in all machine types.

1 SummaryThe OptimizationBuilder are used to enablebucking of each trunk to give maximum yield,either in relation to maximum price or a particularassortment range. For each bucking the diameter ofthe trunk and taper are compared with thepermitted available options and the computer thenchooses the currently most advantageous option.There are several different bucking methods:• Profit-based bucking where a large number of

price matrices can be compared with one another toenable the computer to select the assortment rangeand length that gives the most favourable yieldvalue. In choosing the log length the computer alsotakes into consideration the value of the next log(“remaining piece” evaluation).

• Demand bucking working together with profit-based bucking as an instrument to choose just thelengths and diameters that are in demand. Selectionis made by programming the desired demandamong different lengths in a diameter class or in anentire price matrix. It is also possible to set limitsfor a maximum number of logs in each class oflogs.

1.1 MatricesThe most important part of the bucking instructions isthe matrices; one matrix for each assortment range ineach species.Each matrix consists of four different sub-matricesand one variable part:• The Price matrix; a price list entered for all length/

diameter classes.• The Demand matrix; an aid in demand bucking to

select just the assortment range that is in demand.• The Limit matrix; enabling limitation of the

number of logs in different diameter classes.• The Color matrix; where you decide which length/

diameter classes are to be color-marked.• Variables for each matrix; eg, price type, free cut,

choice of product group or type of trunk.

OptimizationBuilderOptimizationBuilder

Tree specie 1

Matrix 1

Matrix 2

Matrix 3

Matrix X

Tree specie 2

Matrix 1

Matrix 2

Matrix 3

Matrix X

Tree specie 3

Matrix 1

Matrix 2

Matrix 3

Matris X

Matris X

Matrices

Price matrix

Demand matrix

Limit matrix

Color matrix

SettingsName and species

GradePrice type

Bark function on/offFree cut

Trunk typeProduct group

Enter lineprice-list

6 dAOB 2.2 enC Dasa Control Systems AB

Identity

NameDate

ContractorObject

ContractOrganisation

FilenameDate saved

VersionMachine data

Commonvariables

Tree speciesGrade

Bark function

Sortsdemandbucking

Product groupsTrunk type

1. Summary 2. Identity1.2

1.2 IdentityEach bucking instruction has an identity part that is usedto identify the bucking instructions, eg, title of theinstructions and data about the contractor, object,contract and organisation.

1.3 Common variablesThese apply for all matrices in the bucking instructions.Examples of such variables are number and name ofspecies, grade, product groups and trunk type.


1.41. Summary 4. Quick guide, creating new bucking instructions

1.4 Quick guide, creating new bucking instructions

Start OptimizationBuilderIn Operating mode: Click Settings, Bucking and Bucking instructions.

Open template for bucking computer, change the identityClick Open. Open desired template, eg, OptimizationBuilder. Alter Identity data.

3.1 Opening bucking instructions

Give the file a new name, save as new fileClick Save as and type a new name.

3.2 Saving bucking instructions

Delete matrices that are not neededClick Matrix summary. Mark matrix to be deleted. Click Delete. Repeat as

required.

3.11 Create new and delete matrices.

Add matrices (timber assortment range) and adjust orderof the matrices

Position the cursor in the column of the correct species. Click APM. Selectmatrix file. Repeat if required. Position the cursor on the matrix that is to be

moved up or down. Click Up or Down. Repeat if required.

3.12 New matrix with earlier one as basis.

3.13 Diameter classes in the matrix.

3.14 Length classes in the matrix.

3.15 Enter prices direct in the price matrix.

3.16 Line price-list.

3.17 Matrix variables.

3.18 Color matrix.

3.19 Demand matrix.

3.20 Limit matrix.

Save fileClick Save. Check any warnings/errors in machine type check.

Adjust prices, settings of matricesSelect matrix: Double click matrix in Matrix summary or select Tree species/

Matrix name in image Price matrix.

ExitClick Close.

Create new bucking instructions by copying and modifying an earlier version


2.1 Program menus

Archive

New, Open, Open mould, CloseHere you can create new (empty) or open existing bucking instructions. Youcan also open a mould as the basis for the new bucking instructions.

Save, Save asHere you save the current bucking instructions with their existing name. If youchoose “Save as …” you can save the bucking instructions in a different nameand in a different folder or unit.

Choose machine typeHere you can choose between different machine types. On choosing aparticular machine type the bucking instructions are adapted accordingly tosuit it.

Control machine typeHere you can check whether there are any variables in the buckinginstructions that are outside the limitations that apply for the machine type youhave choosen.

Show reading informationThe bucking file is checked on being opened. Possible errors and deviationsare visible here.

Printout

SettingsSee description on next page

Latest used bucking instructionsClick the file if you wish to open it again.

ExitExit program module Bucking instructions and return to the setting menu.

New

Open

Open mould

Close

Save

Save as ...

Choose Machinetype

Control machinetype


Print

Settings

C:\OB\User\ObjEnd\Prod_1.prd



Exit

File Edit Matrix Wiew Tools Window Help

2. Description2

2 Description

NOTEProgram OptimzationBuilder, described in thefollowing pages, may appear differently depending onwhich machine type is selected. Not all functions areincluded in all machine types.


Direct to screen

Do control at save file

Value for control of price difference pricematrx

Ok Help

Directory, file name Warning- & errormessages Color marking Language Other settings

Ok Help

Directory for bucking instruction

Directory for machine type

Directory for moulds

Directory for APM files

Browse

Browse

Browse

Browse

Max 8 character in filename

Save line price information in file

Ok Help

Ok Help

GB

Current directoryThe actual search paths for four different types of files areseen here (bucking files, machine files, bucking templates andAPM-files) that are used in the bucking instructions. It is herethe bucking program searches when you wish to open a file.

Click on Browse if you wish to alter search paths for the filetypes.

Maximum 8 characters in a filenameCertain programs accept only 8 characters in a file name. Ifthe bucking files are to be exported and used in suchprograms you can cross this box. You will then be given awarning if the name consists of more than 8 characters.

Save line priceIf you cross the box the line price information will be saved inthe bucking file. You can then make alterations direct in theline price list.

Show warnings and errors direct on thescreenWarnings and errors are shown direct on the screen as theyoccur. If the box is not activated an error will be shown firstwhen the system makes a check (see the box below “Makecheck on saving”).

Make check on saving the fileCross the box if you wish the program to make a check of thebucking file when it is being saved. An error list will bedisplayed on screen if any fault is detected.

Control of price differenceA function to avoid mistakes when entering values in the pricematrix.

If the difference between values in adjacent matrix boxes isgreater than that you have written into the box you will receivea warning.

Colors for dye markingColors used for marking which length/diameter classes thatare to be dye-marked. Click on another color box to select adifferent color.

Choose languageSelect which language menus and printouts that the buckingprogram is to have.

Common product groupsIf you cross the box, all species will have the same productgroups.

HKS Diameter classesIf this box is crossed, and HKS diameter classes have beencreated for a matrix, the name of the diameter class will beshown instead of the diameter classes in mm in the matriximage.

Standard machine typeStandard machine type is selected when a new .apt file orwhen an .apt opens that is not linked to any machine type.


Archive/Settings

New

Open

Open mould

Close

Save

Save as ...

Choose Machinetype

Control machinetype


Print

Settings




Exit

File Edit Matrix View Tools Window Help

Ok Help




Common for all tree species

Product group


Show HKS diameter classes in matrix

HKS Diameter classes

Default machine type

Choose machine type


Matrix

Diameter classes

Length classes

Color

Matrix overview

Lineprice

Switch pos. for tabs

File Edit Matrix View Tool Window Help

Diameter classesGo to the setting menu for diameter classes where you can add, alter orremove diameter classes from the price matrix.

Length classesGo to the setting menu for length classes where you can add, alter or removelength classes from the price matrix.

Color choiceOnly active when you have selected Color matrix.Mark one or more length/diameter classes in the dye matrix. Select the color with which to dye themarked classes.

Matrix overviewGo to menu Matrix overview.

Line priceGo to menu Line price.

Change position of tabsWhen a price matrix is selected you choose between price, dye, distributionand limit matrices with the help of tabs. Change the position of the tabs asfollows by repeatedly selecting this function.

Active only when you have selected a matrix

2.1 2 Description 1 Program menus

Copy

Cut

Paste

Increase/decrease


Edit

Type the value or percentagewith which you wish toincrease or decrease.

Cut, Copy, PasteCopy marked area to Clipboard. You can now paste the data in anothermatrix or another program, eg, Exel, to enable further processing of datafrom the bucking instructions.

Increase/decreaseThis function is used to increase or decrease the value of all variables inthe area in a price, distribution, limit or stop matrix that you have marked.Increasing or decreasing can be made in absolute figures or as apercentage.

Tabs

Cancel

Increase/decrease

Type

OkIncreaseDecrease

Insert valueAdd/SubtractPercentage

Select an option:

• Insert value – values in the matrix are replaced by thetyped value.

• Add/subtract – current values of the matrix areincreased/reduced by the typed value.

• Percentage – current values of the matrix are increased/reduced in percentage by the typed value.

Choose whether to increase orreduce current values.


View

Left panel

Toolbar

Identity

Bucking

Machine

Pulp

Matrix


Show left panelClick the box if you wish the various sub-sections of the program to bedisplayed at the left edge of the screen (see below).

Show toolbarClick the box if you wish the various sub-sections of the program to bedisplayed at the upper edge of the screen (see below).

Select windowChoose one of the program windows by clicking the desired line. The windowthat is currently selected is grey marked and with a “tick” at the left edge.

Toolbar

Left panel


Tools

Analyse price list

File Edit Matrix View Tools Windowr Help

Analysis of price listA detailed description of the function is given in section 2.4 Analysis of thepricelist.

The function enables an overall comparison of prices between two differentprice matrices in the same species.

The function is especially useful for comparing matrices of different pricetypes, eg, pulpwood (m3s) and timber (m3 top measure). The timber matrixprices are converted to m3s. These m3s prices are dependent on actual taperof the log. By varying the taper value it can be discerned at what taper aparticular matrix is strongest in the respective length/diameter class.

Open Open mould Save Identity Bucking Machine Matrix overview Pricematrix Apt. summary


IdentityAdministrationBucking

Tree speciesBarkfunctionDemandGradeProductgroupTrunktypeBreast height (DBH)

MachinePulpMatrix

Matrix overviewPricematrix LinepriceColormatrixDemandsmatrixPiecematrix

Choose machinetypeControl machinetype


CascadeTileArange iconsMinimizeC:\OB..... Obj 1.aptC:\OB..... Obj 1.apt

Arrange overlappingIf several production files are open simultaneously they overlap.

C:\OB\User\Obj\Objekt 3






C:\OB\User\Obj\Objekt 1 C:\OB\User\Obj\Objekt 1 C:\OB\User\Obj\Objekt 1

Arrange horizontallyIf several production files are open their screen size is adjustedand the files are on top of one another.

Arrange iconsIf several bucking files are open and are minimised (see function Minimise below)the icons of the files (name lines) are arranged at the bottom of the screen.

MinimiseIf several production files are open their screen size is minimised to a nameline only and they are placed side by side at the very bottom of the screen.

Select bucking instruction fileIf several bucking instruction files areopen; choose the one that is to be active.

Windows


Icons (name lines)

2.1 2 Description 1 Program menus


New Copy Paste Delete Move up Move down Apm

Species 1 Species 2 Species 3Pm11 Pm21 Pm31Pm12 Pm22 Pm32Pm13 Pm23 Pm33Pm14Pm15

Species 1

Matrixname Code Description Buyer Product group Stem type Grade (explicit) Pricetype Volume type Bucking condition Priority Free cutPm1Pm2Pm3Pm4Pm5

Copied =

Basic settings Price matrix Other settings

Here you get an overview of settings for the price matrices for aparticular species. The various parameters are explained insection 2.17 Price matrix.

To change species: Click a matrix in different species in thesummary top left.

CopiedHere you see which matrixhas just been copied withthe function Copy.

Mark one or several matricesTwo options:

• Click and keep the button pressed. Dragwith the mouse and release the button.

• Click on upper. Press Shift and click onlowest.

Select and open particular matrixTwo options:

• Double click on desired matrix.

• Click desired matrix, click right mousebutton and select Open matrix.

Change matrix nameTwo options:

• Click right mouse button on desired matrix.Select Change name in the displayedmenu.

• Click left mouse button on desired matrix.Press key F2.

Create a new matrixClick the right species andthen click New.

Make a new copy of a matrixClick the cursor on the desired matrix andclick Copy. Click the desired species andclick Paste. You can copy matrices from otherbucking instructions in the same way.

Change orderClick the cursor on the desiredmatrix. Click Move up or Movedown to change position of thematrix among matrices in the samespecies.

2.2 Matrix overviewIn the matrix overview you see which price matricesare included in the bucking instructions. You also geta summary of existing price matrices with their mostimportant parameters.

Here you can:• Select the matrix that you wish to program.• Delete matrices.• Create new matrices, either completely new or on

the basis of a copy of another matrix.• Change the matrix name.• Alter the place of the matrix among the other

matrices.

2.22 Description 2 Matrix overview

Apm – Standard matricesThere are a number of individualhere (saved in the standard formatApm) here that can be copied andused as templates to facilitateprogramming.

Delete one or several matricesMark one or more matrices within thesame species and click on Delete.

Summary Basic settingsHere you get an overview of basic settings for theprice matrices for a particular species. The variousparameters are explained in section 2.15 Matrices,common part.

To change species: Click a matrix in differentspecies in the summary top left.

Matrix name Diameter classes Min top diameter Root diameter Length classes Over length Cutting windowPm1 (120) (440) < (999) 120 0 (120) (440) < (999) 2 (2) (2)Pm2 (310) (550) < (580) 120 0 (120) (440) < (999) 2 (2) (2)Pm3 (310) (550) < (580) 120 0 (120) (440) < (999) 2 (2) (2)Pm4 (255) (255) < (275) 110 0 (110) (110) < (180) 2 (2) (2)Pm5 (280) (300) < (330) 50 0 (50) (50) < (900) 2 (2) (2)


Matrix name Principle for registration Distance from top Tolerence gradePm1 Cut length in cm 0 (20) (20)Pm2 Cut length in cm 0 (20) (20)Pm3 Cut length in cm 0 (20) (20)Pm4 Cut length in cm 0 (20) (20)Pm5 Cut length in cm 0 (20) (20)


Summary Price matrix

Summary Other settings

Here you get an overview of settings in the price-matrix tab“Other settings” for a particular species. The various para-meters are explained in section 2.16 Other settings.

To change species: Click a matrix in different species in thesummary top left.

Lowest value Highest value Max. value

Lower Upper

top butt


Close Save as... Open Excel Print Printer setup Copy Paste Settings

A1

A B C D E F G H I J

123456789

10111213

141516171819

20212223

24

25

26

27

28

Apt.overviewIdentfication

Site number

Organization

Subcontractor

Marking for cuting

Region

Code

Filename

Compartment number

District

Name

Buyer Vendor Contract number

Treespecies

Code Bark-function

Startgrade

Demand Max-deviation

BreastHeight

Machine type

Lot number

Working team

Address


Save date

Date of cut

Wood pile

Comment

Diameter-classes

Pricetype

Volumetype

PriorityBuckingcondition

GradeProduct-group

Stem typeCodeMatrixname

Species 1

Save as Excel fileThe bucking overview can besaved as an Excel file in anoptional folder.

Open a Bucking overviewOpen a bucking overview that has been savedin the Winapt/AptOverView folder. Buckingoverviews are saved in file format .vts.

Open the bucking overview as anExcel fileThe relevant overview is opened in the Excelprogram and can then be used for statisticalprocessing for example.

Printout formatHere you have the possibility, forexample, of determining text in theheader and footer of the page, size andappearance of the page/pages and theirinterrelation.

Standard modularspacingThe length classes usually have amodular spacing of 30 cm. If youtype 30 in the box, only the firstand last length value of each pricematrix will be shown:

If you type 20, for example, thelength classes will be shown withdeviating modular spacing:

Lengthclasses

340 - 550340 - 550340 - 550340 - 550

Lengthclasses

340, 370, 400, 43340, 370, 400, 43340, 370, 400, 43340, 370, 400, 43

Translate variable headings• A standard set of variable headings that are

adapted to suit the table will be used if the box isnot crossed.

• By crossing the box, the headings found in thebucking instructions will be used. It may benecessary to adjust the division of words toensure that headings fit the table boxes.

Show cm indmSpacing in thelength classes canbe shown as dmvalues instead ofcm.

Show mm incmSpacing in thelength classes canbe shown as cmvalues instead ofmm.

Note. You must close the Bucking overview and thenopen it again to enable changes in the settings menuto be shown in the table.

2.3 Bucking overviewHere you get a detailed overview of the buckinginstructions. The overview contains informationconcerning common data for the instructions and alsodetails of all the price matrices included.

The overview can be saved as an Excel file and canthen be used for example for further statisticalprocessing.

2 Description 3. Bucking overview2.3

Diameter-classes

Pricetype

Volumetype

PriorityBuckingcondition

GradeProduct-group

Stem typeCodeMatrixname

Species 2

Default module range for length classes (cm)

Show cm in dm

Show mm in cm

Translate variable headings

Ok

Directory for Save as...

Browse


Close Print Copy screen Copy value

Tree species

Matrix A Matrix B Taper in mm/m

Settings

Length in column

A>B A=B A>B

Price comparison between matrix A and B (A - B)

Species 1 A:Matrix 1 - B Matrix 2 20 mm/m

142 162 182 202 222 242 262 282 302 322 342310 -166 -109 -45 -25 -5 7 18 23 46 59 70370 -166 -108 -43 -21 0 13 25 35 55 68 80400 -166 -109 -42 -20 0 15 27 39 59 73 86430 -165 -106 -38 -14 9 23 36 49 70 85 99460 -164 -104 -34 -9 15 30 44 58 80 96 111490 -166 -106 -37 -11 13 29 44 57 80 96 112520 -168 -109 -41 -16 9 25 40 54 77 94 109550 -170 -113 -45 -20 5 21 37 51 74 91 108

2.4 Analysis of price listThe function enables an overall comparison ofprices between two different price matrices inthe same species. After choosing the pricematrices that you wish to compare, a tableappears that with the help of different colorsindicates which price matrix has the highestprice in the respective length/diameter class.The function is especially useful in comparingmatrices of different price types, eg, pulpwood(m3s) and timber (m3 top measure). The timbermatrix prices are converted to m3s. These m3sprices are dependent on actual taper of the log.By varying the taper value it can be discerned atwhat taper it is profitable to produce pulpwood

instead of timber.When two matrices of price type m3 top measure arecompared there will be no conversion to m3s andconsequently the taper value will not affect the result.The table can be copied, eg, as an image for pasting in Wordor as a value table for use in Excel.The following applies for results in the table:• The matrix that you select in box Matrix A determines

which length and diameter classes will be shown in thetable.

• The table values are the result of Matrix A minus MatrixB.

• If no value is shown in one or more length/diameterclasses then such classes are not comparable between thematrices.

Vary size of the tableHere you can alter the sizeof the table. This functionallows you to view the wholetable regardless of how big itis.

If you copy the table to use itin Word, for example, youcan easily adjust the size ofthe table to suit thedocument.

Select speciesSelect the species withinwhich you wish to compareprice matrices. Thecomparison can only bemade between matrices inthe same species.

Copy the table as an imageThe table is copied to clipboard as abitmap image, ie, an exact color copyof the table. The image cansubsequently be copied into a Worddocument for example.

Copy the table valuesValues of the table are copied to clipboard andcan subsequently be copied to Excel forexample.

Note that only the table values will be copied.Color data in the table will not be included.

Select price matricesChoose two price matrices inthe species that you haveselected.

Matrix B >Matrix AMinus values in the tableindicate that Matrix B has ahigher value than Matrix A

Matrix B = Matrix AThe matrices have the samevalue

Matrix B >Matrix APositive values in the tableindicate that Matrix A has ahigher value than Matrix B

TaperWhen you compare matricesof different price types, eg,pulpwood (m3s) and timber(m3 top measure) the timberprices are converted to m3s.These m3s prices aredependent on actual taper ofthe log.

By varying the taper value itcan be discerned at whattaper it is profitable toproduce pulpwood instead oftimber.

Shift length/diameterClick in the box to shift thedisplay, so that the lengths areshown as columns and thediameters as lines in the table.

Select colors in thetableClick in the boxes andchoose the color that is tobe shown for the respectivetable value.

2.42 Description 4. Analys av prislista


2.5 IdentitySome data can be entered here for use in identifyingthe bucking instructions. Aptdate is here, for example,showing when the bucking instructions were created,in which type of program the bucking instructions aremade, etc.

2 Description 5. Identity2.5

Todays dateClick here to change the date of cutto today’s date.

Additional identificationFill in the data that is required, eg, to link the price matrix to a particularorganisation, etc.

System settingCertain bucking computers requirethis information about whichlanguage is used so that all systemparameters can be set correctly.

Bucking dateType the date showing when theprice matrix was made or altered. Toalter to today’s date; click Updatedate.

IdentificationType in data (eg, special matrix mark)that facilitates identification.

VersionVersion number of the programthat created the buckinginstructions.

VersionVersion number of program forcreating apt. files from oai. andap1. files.

Free textThree different options forentering free text. Use thebuttons to shift between thethree texts.

Site number

Marking for cutting

Comparment number

Lot number

Certified

Vendor

Code

Name

Address

E-mail

Tele/fax

Buyer

Contract number


Sub contracor

Code

Name

Address

E-mail

Tele/Fax

Identification Administration

Program data and machinedataThese data describe types of program andmachines and cannot be altered.


Identification AdministrationIdentification Administration

Organization Site Vendor Contract Sub contractor Organization Site Vendor Contract Sub contractor

Organization Site Vendor Contract Sub contractorOrganization Site Vendor Contract Sub contractor

Only data in the upper white entry fields can bealtered, such as Identification, Aptdate,Organisation.


Identification

Date of cut

Update date

Save date

Manufacture No.

Machine No.

SS-ISO 3166

Version

Version

Machine type

Free text

(V200t1) (V200t1) (V200t1)

Organization

Region

District

Working team

Wood pile

Organization Site Vendor Contract Sub contractor



2.6 Tree species

AddClick here to add a new species. Thenew species will appear at the end ofthe list.

A warning will be displayed on thescreen should the number of speciesexceeds the maximum permittednumber.

RemoveClick on a species and then click here toremove the marked species.

Enter new or alter nameTo type a new name or type over anexisting name: Click the name box andtype the new name.

To alter an existing name: Double clickthe name box. Position the cursor in theright place and type.

Settings for how many and which species that are tobe included in the bucking instructions.Different bucking computers have different rules andlimitations for the number of species.

2.62 Description 6. Tree species

Type the codeHere is a possibility to further define thespecies by typing a relevant code.

Tree species Barkfunction Demand Grade Product group Trunktype Breast height (DBH)

Add Remove

Name of species

1234

Code


2.7 Bark function

AddClick here to add a new bark function.The new species is placed last in thelist of species.

RemoveClick on a bark function and then clickhere to remove the marked function.

Write in or alter barkfunctionTo write a new bark function or writeover an old one: Click the box and typethe new figure.

To alter an existing bark function:Double click the box. Position the cursorin the right place and type.

Tree speciesThe species programmed into thefunction are seen here.

The bark function consists of constants for calculatingbark thickness of different species. The constants varydepending on where in the country felling is beingcarried out.

2. Description 7. Bark function2.7

Tree species Bark function Demand Grade Product group Trunk type Breast height (DBH)

Special functionThe function assumes that Pine is the firstspecies and Spruce is the secondspecies.

When the function is active it controls thebark function for Pine and Spruce. Forother species the bark function is stillcontrolled by the Y and X values of thespecies.

The latitude value is written as a degreevalue with one decimal, eg, 64.2.

Add Remove

Species 1 Species 2 Species 3 Species 4

YX

Bark

Special function ”SkogsForsk 2004”Code 3 Pine + Code 4 Spurs

Latitude 64,2


Here you make overall settings for demand buckingthat apply for all demand matrices in the buckinginstructions. Other settings and also programming ofthe demand matrix are made in the “Demandmatrix” function (see section 2.19)Demand bucking makes it possible to control fellingtowards desired lengths in each diameter class of theprice matrix.

2.8 Demand

Piece/mil for the entire matrixYou program distribution of the number ofcut logs that you want in thousandths overthe entire price matrix. The sum over theentire matrix should be 1000.

Volume/mil for the entire matrixYou program distribution of cut volume thatyou want in thousandths over the entireprice matrix. The sum over the entire matrixshould be 1000.

Piece/100% for the entire matrixYou program distribution of the number ofcut logs that you want in percentage withineach diameter class.

Volym/100% inom varjediameterklassDu programmerar den fördelning avavverkad volym du vill ha i procent inomvarje diameterklass.

Maximum deviation invalue

Maximum deviation inpercent

Controlling is made by programming in preferencesin the form of percentage or per mil values, in eachdiameter class or in the entire price matrix, for thelength/diameter classes that are to be given prioritywhen felling.

2.82 Description 8. Demand

Distribution methodIn the distribution matrix you choose the lengths/diameters thatare most in demand. The computer gives priority to these lengths/diameters when bucking.

Select here the method used by the computer in this prioritization.

Near-optimum

This is the most frequently used of the two methods.

• The computer makes a normal profit-based bucking assessmentfor each log. A price matrix and a length are then selected thathave the highest price according to the price list. In addition tothis length, as a rule, there are a few optional lengths that liewithin the maximum permitted price deviation for thedistribution bucking.

• The computer now checks among the permitted lengths if thereare any that have been selected for the distribution bucking. Ifseveral lengths are selected the computer will choose thelength where the difference between desired number and thenumber processed so far is greatest.

If none of the permitted lengths are selected in the distributionbucking assessment a normal profit-based bucking will bemade, ie, the length that has the highest value will be selected.

Adaptive

This method is based on prices in the price list being changeddepending on how great the difference is between desirednumber and currently processed number. The greater thisdifference, the higher the price will be set in the price list.

Bucking to demand

Piece/per mil

Volume/per mil

Piece/100%

Max deviation

Value

Per cent


Method for bucking to demand

No distribution

Adaptive

Near-optimum

Volum/100%


No of grades

Add Remove

Grade system

Random grade

Explicit grade


S Species 1 S Species 2 S Species 3 S Species 4

Qu 1Qu 2Qu 3Qu 4Qu 5Qu 6Qu 7Qu 8

S = Stargrade




2.9 Grade

Number of GradesThe names of the Grades for therespective species are written here.

Add gradeClick here to add an additional lineat the bottom of the grade list.

Remove gradeClick here to remove the bottom lineof the grade list.

Overall settings for grade. Here you decide whichgrade the respective species are to have and in whatorder the grades are to be positioned in each species.The conception of grade can be dealt with in twodifferent ways:

Random gradesA higher grade may be included in a lower when thebucking computer estimates the price of an individuallog.

Explicit gradesExclusively the grades stated in the price matrix areallowed to be included when the bucking computerestimates the price of an individual log.

2 Description 9. Grade2.9

Random gradeA higher grade may be included in a lowerwhen the bucking computer estimates priceof an individual log.

Explicit gradeExclusively the grades stated in the pricematrix are allowed to be included when thebucking computer estimates the price of anindividual log.

Starting gradeKlick on the box that shall be startinggrade when a new trunk is to beprocessed.


2.10 Product groups

Add product groupClick here to add an additional lineat the bottom of the list of productgroups.

Remove product groupClick here to remove an optional linefrom the list of product groups.

Number of product groupsNames of the product groups in eachspecies are written here.

Settings for how many and which product groups thatare to be included in the bucking instructions. Productgroups can for example be TIMBER, PULPWOOD orPOLES.

When you subsequently program price matrices youcan link each one to a certain product group.This can later be used, for example, to structureproduction follow-up so that you can get volumes andnumber of logs also per product group.

2.102 Description 10. Product groups


Add Remove

Prodgr1 Prodgr1 Prodgr1 Prodgr1Prodgr2 Prodgr2 Prodgr2 Prodgr2Prodgr3 Prodgr3 Prodgr3 Prodgr3Prodgr4 Prodgr4 Prodgr4 Prodgr4

1234



Settings of how many and which trunk types are tobe included in the bucking instructions.When you subsequently program price matricesyou can link each one to a particular trunk type.

2.11 Trunk types

Add trunk typeClick here to add an additionalline at the bottom of the list oftrunk types.

Remove trunk typeClick here to remove an optionalline from the list of trunk types.

Number of trunk typesNames/codes of the trunk types ineach species are written here.

2 Description 11. Trunk types2.11

TextUse this mode when you type in optionalnames for the different sorts of trunks.

CodeWhen creating (pressing on “Add”) trunksorts a two-digit code will be givenaccording to the standard for trunk sorts:First digit = species, second digit = trunksort. The codes can also be alteredmanually.

Tree species Bark function Demand Grade Product group Trunk type Breast height(DBH)

Add Remove

Species 1 Species 2 Species 3 Species 4Trunk type 1 Trunk type 1 Trunk type 1 Trunk type 1Trunk type 2 Trunk type 2 Trunk type 2 Trunk type 2Trunk type 3 Trunk type 3 Trunk type 3 Trunk type 3Trunk type 4 Trunk type 4 Trunk type 4 Trunk type 4Trunk type 5 Trunk type 5 Trunk type 5 Trunk type 5

12345

Text Code

This can later be used, for example, to structureproduction follow-up so that you can get volumes andnumber of logs also per trunk type.


Various data for grading of trunks are stored in thebucking instructions in relation to diameter of thetrunk at breast height, ie, 120-130 cm from the butt.Data saved in the production file include the numberof trunks and volume per breast height grade. Thesedata are used, for example, in valuing the trunks.

2.12 Breast height (DBH)

In the bucking instructions you set the value for breastheight and which diameter limits that are to apply forthe breast height diameter (DBH).

2 Description 12. Breast height (DBH) 2.12

Make interval (mm)From Until Step

Do

Measurepoint above stump (cm)

Lower limit for diameter (mm)

Species1 Species 2 Species 3 Species 41 40 40 40 402 60 60 60 603 80 80 80 804 100 100 100 1005 120 120 200 2006 140 140 300 3007 160 160 400 4008 180 180 500 5009 200 20010 220 22011 240 24012 260 260

Lower diameter limitsThe table shows diameter limits perspecies. If it is not desirable to havethe same interval and number ofintervals in all species it can bealtered direct in the table. However, itis not permitted to enter fallingvalues, ie, a higher line number isnot allowed to have a lower diametervalue than a lower line number.

Should the number of intervals for aspecies not fill out the entire tablethen the remaining boxes are to beleft empty (the value 0 is notallowed).

Create intervalsHere you create a new set ofdiameter limits for all species.The smallest diameter limit isgiven in the field From and thehighest diameter limit is given infield To. The distance betweenthe limits in mm is given in fieldStep. The new limits are createdin the table on pressing Executeand any earlier settings will bedeleted.

Measuring point overstumpYou note here a value at whichthe breast height diameter is tobe measured on the trunk.



2.13 Sound knot

Select formulaSelect the formula to be used forcalculating the limit for sound knots.

The function automatically calculates a trunk lengthwhere the limit goes for a trunk that includes onlysound knots. The length is dependent on the breast-height diameter (the x value in the function is below).To different formulas can be used for the calculation.Formula values a, b, c and d are given for each

species in the table. The grade that applies when thelimit for sound knots has been passed is noted at thebottom of the table. This grade is set automaticallywhen the limit is passed.

2. Descriptions 13. Sound knot2.13

Formula valuesDepending on species and also othervariations, eg, productiveness and growingzone, the values of the formulas may vary.These values are filled in for each species inthe table.

Grade at sound knotType the grade that is to be used when thelimit for sound knots is passed.


Type of function

0. No function

1. y=(a+bx)xd

Sound knot

2. y=(a+bx+cx2)xd

Species 1 Species 2 Species 3 Species 4 Constant a 0 0 0 0 Faktor b 0 0 0 0 Faktor c 0 0 0 0 Tolerance d 0 0 0 0Grade 0 0 0 0


2.14 Machine, basic setting

Overall settings for length and diameter values usedfor prognosis of trunk taper.

Calculation lengthThe prognosis length, or actual measuredlength, in cm within which the buckingcomputer selects log-lengths for bucking.Consideration is also taken to the value of apossible remaining piece.

Measured length beforeprognosisThe stretch in cm that is to be fed forwardafter felling a tree, before the buckingcomputer makes its first prognosis. Theprognosis is based on the measureddiameter values of this initial stretch.

Maximum deviation up –downMaximum deviation up or downrespectively is the number of millimetresthat the measured diameters values maydeviate from the prognosis withouthaving to modify the prognosis. A newprognosis is made in the event of greaterdeviation.

The prognoses are utilised to estimate the best loglength in relation to the current price matrix.

2.142 Description 14. Machine, basic setting

C:\Program\ESE Technique\OB32\mallar\......

Machine settings

Calculation length

Measured length before prognosis

Max deviation up

Max deviation downcm

mm

mm

cm

Add Remove

No of prognose parameters


12

Add lines in Number ofprognosis parameters

Remove lines in Numberof prognosis parameters

Number of prognosis para-metersCertain bucking computers need to know thenumber of prognosis parameters to ensuresatisfactory operation (however, notOptimizationBuilding from Dasa ControlSystems AB).

Settings may vary depending on the buckingcomputer so please refer to the specialinstructions for the relevant buckingcomputer.


Tree species Code

1 2 3 4 5 6

Buyer

BarkOnUnder

Free cut

Product group Bucking group

Grade (explicit)

Matrix name Description Stem type Priority

Price type Volume type

2.15 Matrices, common partA matrix consists of four different sub-matrices, ie,price matrix, color matrix, demand matrix and piecematrix. The variables seen in the upper part of thematrix window are common and do not change whenyou shift between the sub-matrices.

The common part is explained below, once only. Thelower part of the four different sub-matrices aredescribed in the following pages.

2.15 2 Description 15. Matrices, common part

FACTS

Spruce Qu1 Qu2 Qu3 Qu4 Qu5 Qu6

Matrix 1 1 0 0 0 0 0

Matrix 2 0 1 0 0 0 0

Matrix 3 1 1 1 0 0 0

Matrix 4 1 1 1 1 0 0

Matrix 5 1 1 1 0 0 0

Matrix 6 1 1 1 0 0 0

Matrix 7 1 1 1 1 1 0

Matrix 8 1 1 1 1 1 1

Pine Qu1 Qu2 Qu3 Qu4 Qu5 Qu6

Matrix 1 1 0 0 0 0 0

Matrix 2 0 1 0 0 0 0

Matrix 3 1 0 1 0 0 0

Matrix 4 1 1 1 1 0 0

Matrix 5 1 1 1 1 1 0

Matrix 6 1 1 1 1 0 0

Matrix 7 1 1 1 1 0 0

Matrix 8 1 1 1 1 1 1

Examples of the connection between price matrices andgrade for specific grades

Free cutIndicates to thebucking computerthat free cuttingmay be madebetween minimumlength andmaximum length.

BarkIndicate whethervolumetric measurementis to be on or under bark.

Price typeExamples of price typesavailable:

m3to (top measure)

m3s (solid measure)

m3smm (solid mid measure)

Tree speciesSelect species for thematrix to be shown.

CodeHere you can typeadditional identity for thematrix.

GradeMark a cross in the grade to which thematrix applies.

• If you use falling grades: A highergrade may be included in a lower whenthe bucking computer estimates theprice of an individual log.

• If you use specific grades: Exclusivelythe grade or grades stated in the pricematrix are allowed to be included inestimating the price of an individual log.

Product groupIndicate here if the matrix isto be linked to a productgroup.

Product groups can forexample be TIMBER,PULPWOOD, POLES orMISCELLANEOUS.

Trunk typeIndicate here if the matrix is to belinked to a trunk type.

Matrix nameSelect which matrix inthe respectivespecies is to beshown.

Volume typeThe length that volumetric calculation isbased on. The following options areavailable:

• Cut lengthThe real cut length. Normally used forpulpwood.

• Intended lengthLength-class length plus possible extralength. Normally used for timber

• Cut length in falling dmThe length is counted from the nearestlower even dm

Prerequisites for buckingChoose under which conditions bucking is to be done:

• Always crosscutStandard setting, calculation for bucking is alwaysdone if the matrix is permitted in the selected grade.

• Never crosscutUsed if you wish to temporarily “switch off” a matrix,or have a matrix that is used to register manuallycut timber.

• Crosscut on butt log only, do not crosscut onbutt logCalculation for bucking made for butt log only or alllogs except butt log if the matrix is permitted in theselected grade.

Delivery locationA possibility to define location of deliveryfor logs bucked in this price matrix.

DescriptionA possibility to linkexplanatory text to the pricematrix.

PriorityThis function can be set atlow, normal or high and isused by some manufacturersto give or not to give priority tothe price matrix when thecomputer chooses betweendifferent price matrices.



Diameter type

Principle for registration

Cut length in cm

Distance from top

cm

Tolerence grade

Top Root

cm

Grade toleranceHere you can allow a log to assume a grade otherthan that chosen a certain length in from the top orbutt of the log.

Distance from topThe diameter value is registered at this distancefrom the log’s length value. How the length value isregistered is determined by the principle ofregistration chosen (see explanation on the left).

Principle for registrationThe length that the diameter registration is based on. Thefollowing options are available:

Cut length The real cut length. Normallyused for pulpwood.

Intended length Length-class length. Normallyused for timber

Cut length in falling dm The length is counted from thenearest lower even dm

2.16 Others settingsIn addition to the upper part of the matrix thereare more settings, that apply to all matrices,under the tab “Other settings”.

2. Description 16. Other settings 2.16

Desired length for free cutThe setting is only valid if free cut is on for alllogs.

Length for free cut

cm


2.17 Price matrix

The price matrix is a price list giving prices for eachdiameter/length class.The price matrix is used in profit-based bucking, ie, anumber of programmed price matrices are comparedwith one another to enable the computer to select theassortment range and length that gives the mostfavourable yield value. In choosing the log length thecomputer also takes into consideration the value of thenext log (“remaining piece” evaluation).

As a basis for evaluation the computer makes aprognosis of the trunk taper with the aid of twodiameter values measured at an optional distance fromthe previous point of cutting. Diameter values takenfor example at 1.25 m and 2.25 m are used in makinga prognosis of what the trunk looks like 7 metresahead. The prognosis is continuously updated inrelation to diameter values that are measured duringthe forward feed. A renewed prognosis will be madein the event that diameter values deviate too muchfrom the prognosis.

The upper part of the price matrix is commonfor all matrices and is described in section“2.15 Matrices, common part”.

2 Description 17. Price matrix2.17

Maximum lengthvalueThe maximum permittedlength for a log to be classifiedin the price matrix. Observethat there should always be atolerance between the highestlength class in the matrix andthe maximum value. Suitablevalues are 10-20 cm for blocksand low-grade timber and 20-30 cm for timber.

Maximum diameter valueThe maximum permitted top diameter (10cm from the cutting point) for a log to beclassified in the price matrix. As a rule thereis no upper limit in timber grades so thevalue can be set as 999. Observe that thereshould always be a tolerance between thehighest diameter class in the matrix and themaximum value. A suitable value for blocksand low-grade timber is 10-20 mm.

Over lengthOver length is a value that is added to thenominal lengths in the respective matrix.The value is used as a length tolerancefor cutting.

Length classificationAdd, remove or alter values inlength classes: Select Matrix/Length classes on the menuline at the top left, or doubleclick in the column for lengthvalues of the price matrix (seesection 2.23).

Diameter classificationAdd, remove or alter values in diameterclasses: Select Matrix/Diameter classes onthe menu line at the top left, or double click inthe column for diameter values of the pricematrix (see section 2.23).

Minimum diameterSmallest permitted topdiameter for a log to beclassified in the price matrix.

PricePrice in m3 for each diameter/length class in the price list.

• Click on a box to mark it. Type in the value and use theEnter key or arrow keys to go to the next box.

• Mark several close length/diameter classes as follows:Click, keep the button pressed and dragorclick on the upper left box, keep the Shift key pressed andclick the lower right box.

Select price values in the marked area by choosingIncrease/decrease in menu Edit or by clicking the rightmouse button and choose Increase/decrease.

Maximum value buttdiameterThe maximum permitted buttdiameter that the log may have. Canbe used for example to limit taper orto ensure that the sawmill willaccept the log in production.

Cutting zoneThe length zone within whichcutting is permitted.

LowerLower limit for the cutting zone. Thelower limit will be:

Length-class length + possible overlength + value in the box Lower(the value can be negative).UpperUpper limit for the cutting zone. Theupper limit will be:

Length-class length + possible overlength + value in the box Upper(the value cannot be negative).

L/D 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320310 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600340 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600370 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600400 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600430 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600460 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600490 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600520 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600550 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600

Diameter

cm mm

Lower Upper

cm cm

Root diameter

mm cm

Min top diameter

mm



Cutting window

Color marking limiting matrixIn the limiting matrix (see section 2.20) there are three different limiting codes(-1, -2, -3) for individual length/diameter classes.

These codes are color coded and the colors are also visible in the pricematrices. The codes are as follows:

• red -1 Prohibited to cut logs in this length/diameter class, eitherautomatically or manually.

• yellow -2 Logs in this length/diameter class will be excluded if youhave selected distribution bucking.

• turquoise -3 Logs in this length/diameter class can only be cutmanually.


2.18 Color matrix

In the color matrix you can mark which assortmentrange or parts of the range that are to be color marked.You can also choose to color mark in the entire pricematrix or only the logs that are demand crosscut.

Color marking can be made in colors 1, 2 or 3. It isalso possible to mark with more than one colorsimultaneously, eg, by crossing both 1 and 2.

The upper part of the color matrix is commonfor all matrices and is described in section“2.15 Matrices, common part”.

2.182 Description 18. Color matrix

Color-mark individual length/diameter classEach length/diameter class can be dye marked using one, two orthree colors.

• Mark a color by double-clicking the right box in the length/diameter class that is to be color marked.

• Mark a column or a line by clicking the head of the column/line.Mark several columns/lines by clicking, holding in and draggingthe head of the column/line.

• Mark the entire matrix by clicking in the L/D box in the upper leftcorner of the table.

• Mark several length/diameter classes with the same color/colors as follows: click, keep the button pressed and dragorclick on the upper left box, keep the Shift key pressed and clickthe lower right box.

Select color or colors in the marked area by choosing Colorchoice in menu Matrix by clicking the box Color.

L/D 122 142 162 182 202 222 242 262 282 302 322310340370400430460490520550


Colormark all classes1 2 3

Colormark demand pieces1 2 3

Color-mark the entire matrixMark one or more colors if everything that iscrosscut according to this matrix is to becolor marked

Color-mark distribution crosscutMark one or more colors if everything that isdistribution crosscut according to this matrix is tobe color marked

Color

Ok

Cancel

1

2

3

Choice of colorAfter marking one or moreboxes in the matrix, click onColor and choose one ormore colors.


C:\Program\ESE Technique\OB32\....... L/D 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 Sum

310 0 0 20 0 0 0 0 20 0 0 0 40340 0 0 0 0 30 0 0 0 0 0 0 30370 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 10400 0 0 20 0 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 60430 0 0 30 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 40460 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 30 0 0 0 40490 0 0 10 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 20520 0 0 10 0 10 0 0 30 0 0 0 50550 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 10Sum 0 0 100 0 100 0 0 100 0 0 0 300

Bucking to demandPiece/100%

Max allowed deviation

Per cent


2.19 Demand matrix

The upper part of the demand matrix is com-mon for all matrices and is described insection “2.15 Matrices, common part”.

The demand matrix is an aid in selecting just thoselengths and diameters that are in demand. Theselection is achieved by programming the desireddemand between different lengths within a diameterclass, or within an entire price matrix.The principle of demand bucking is as follows:• The computer makes a normal profit-based

bucking evaluation, choosing a price matrix and alength that has the highest price according to theprice list. In addition to this length there are as arule optional lengths within the permittedmaximum price deviation for demand bucking.

• The computer now checks among the permittedlengths to see if any of them have been selected inthe demand bucking function. If there are severallengths the computer chooses the length where thedifference between desired number and currentlyprocessed number is greatest.

• If none of the permitted lengths are found in thedemand bucking mode then a normal profit-basedbucking will be performed, ie, the length giving thehighest price will be selected.

2 Description 19. Demand matrix2.19

Maximum permitted deviationThe loss of value accepted in demand buckingcompared with the highest value in profit-basedbucking. The maximum deviation can be expressedas Percentage or SEK, depending on the type ofprofit-based bucking being used.

SEK or Percentage is set in the function Demand(see section 2.8).

Sort demand buckingDemand bucking can be given inPiece/mil, Volume/mil or Piece/100%, depending on the type of profit-based bucking being used.

The sort is set in the function Demand(see section 2.8).

Values, demand matrixIf demand is given in Piece/100% (see section 2.8):

Indicate desired result in % for optional lengths within respective diameterclass. The sum should be 100 for each programmed diameter class.

If demand is given in Piece per mil or Volume per mil (see section 2.8):

Indicate desired result in % for optional lengths within the entire matrix.The sum should be 1000 for the entire matrix.

Sum/diameter classThe computer automatically calculatesthe sum/diameter class.

Sum/length classThe computer automatically calculatesthe sum/length class.

Total

Mark and type in the values• Click on a box to mark it. Type in the value and use the Enter key or

arrow keys to go to the next box.

• Mark a column or a line by clicking the head of the column/line. Markseveral columns/lines by clicking, holding in and dragging the head of thecolumn/line.

• Mark the entire matrix by clicking in the L/D box in the upper left cornerof the table.

• Mark several close length/diameter classes as follows:Click, keep the button pressed and dragorclick on the upper left box, keep the Shift key pressed and click the lowerright box.

Select values in the marked area by choosing Increase/decrease inmenu Edit or by clicking the right mouse button and choose Increase/decrease.



C:\Program\ESE Technique\OB32\....... L/D 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320

310 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0340 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0370 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0400 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0430 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0460 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0490 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0520 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0550 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


No limitation


No action

2.20 Limit matrix

The upper part of the limit matrix is commonfor all matrices and is described in section“2.15 Matrices, common part”.

2.202 Description 20. Limit matrix

The limit matrix gives the possibility in distributionbucking to indicate a maximum volume or maximumnumber of logs for each diameter/length class. Bysetting “Type of limitation” and “Action whenproduction target is fulfilled” the production can be

Type of limitation per price matrixHere you can state different types of production limitation:

• Total number or total volume for the entire price matrix.

• Number or volume within length, diameter or dimensionclasses.

controlled to fulfil specific wishes concerning volumeor number for individual length/diameter classes orfor entire length, diameter or dimension classes.

Action when production target is fulfilledHere you can indicate what is to happen when productiontargets of the limitation matrix are fulfilled:

• Production is stopped.

• Production is stopped and prices in the price matrix arereset.

Values or limitation codes for individual length/diameterclassesIndicate a maximum volume or maximum number of logs for individual diameter/length classes.

You can also type in digit codes (with negative sign as prefix) to limit the felling invarious ways for individual length/diameter classes.The codes are also marked indifferent colors. These colors are also visible in corresponding boxes of the pricematrix.

The following codes/colors exist:

Code Color Function

-1 red Prohibited to cut logs in this length/diameter class, eitherautomatically or manually.

-2 yellow Logs in this length/diameter class will be excluded if you haveselected distribution bucking.

-3 turquoise Logs in this length/diameter class can only be cut manually.

Mark and type in the values• Click on a box to mark it. Type in the value and use the

Enter key or arrow keys to go to the next box.

• Mark several close length/diameter classes as follows:click, keep the button pressed and dragorclick on the upper left box, keep the Shift key pressed andclick the lower right box.

Select values in the marked area by choosing Increase/decrease in menu Edit or by clicking the right mouse buttonand choose Increase/decrease.



Length Upper Lower310 0 0340 0 0370 0 0400 0 0430 0 0460 0 0490 0 0520 0 0550 0 0

Measurepoint above stump

cmLimit for rootdiameter (mm)

2.21 Pole matrixThe pole matrix is used mainly for long loglengths. In the pole matrix you can determinehow big the butt diameter may be for differentpole lengths. With the aid of the value “Min.top diameter” (see section 2.16) you can set alimit for smallest top diameter of the logs.

Measuring point for buttdiameterHere you can indicate how long from thebutt end of the log that the butt diameter isto be measured.

Limits for butt diameterType in lower and upper diameter limits for eachlength class. The log will only be approved if the buttdiameter is between the two limit values.

2 Description 21. Pole matrix2.21


Basic price

Add to pricematrix

Recalculate pricematrix

Value%

%%

Value%%%

Diameter class mm

Length class cm

Cancel HelpOk

120 140 160 180 200 210 220 240 260 280 3000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

From 310 340 370 400 430 460 490 520 550

2.22 Line price

As an option to entering prices direct into the pricematrix you can enter a line price-list. On the basis ofthe line price-list the computer then calculates andwrites in all prices in the price matrix.

The line price-list consists of a basic price andamendments of the basic price for different length anddiameter classes.

Select sortIf you select Value:

The amount is added to the basic price ofeach diameter or length class.Example: Basic price = 300. Correction = 100gives 400 in the price matrix.

If you select %:The amount in the matrix will be:Percentage value x Basic price/100.Example: Basic price = 300. Correction =110%300 x 110/100 = 330

If you select %% (mil):The amount in the matrix will be:Mil value x Basic price/1000.Example: Basic price = 300. Correction =1200%300 x 1200/1000 = 360

Correcting diameter classesType the corrections that apply for the variousdiameter classes.

Add/recalculate the matrixIf you select Add to price matrix:

The basic price and the correctionvalues you enter will be added to thevalues that are in the price matrix.

If you select Recalculate price matrix:The price matrix will be recalculated onthe basis of the values you enter into theline price-list. No consideration will betaken to any previous values in the pricematrix.

Correcting length classesType the corrections that apply for the variouslength classes.

Different length correction for differentdiametersHere you decide whether the length correction shall apply toall diameter classes or whether there shall be several differentlength corrections.

Same length correction for all diameter classes:Type the lowest diameter class in the box From. Type thecorrection values.

Length class cm

From 310 340 370 400 430 460 490 520 550120 10 10 10 0 0 20 30 20 20180 0 0 0 10 10 10 20 20 0260 0 0 0 0 0 10 10 10 10

Length class cm

Different length correction depending on diameterclass:Type the lowest diameter class in the box From. Typethe correction values.

Continue with new groups of correction values in thesame way until all of the diameter classes are includedin the correction.

2 Description 22. Line price 2.22

Basic priceThis price is the basis in the price listresulting from the line price-list.

From 310 340 370 400 430 460 490 520 550120 0 0 0 10 10 20 30 20 20


2.23 Length and diameter classes

The length and diameter classes of each matrix can beset with the aid of the setting boxes below. In a simpleway you can add, remove or alter values in thedifferent length and diameter classes.

IntervalIf the length classes consist of values with thesame distance between all of the values (eg,30 cm) then all of them can be entered withthe aid of the interval box.

Type the lowest length class in the box From.Type the distance between length classes inthe box Step. Press Do.

Inserting a length classTo insert a separate length class:Mark (click) one of the length classesand click Insert. A new length classwill thus be inserted to the left of thebox that you marked.

Removing a length classMark (click) one of the length classes and clickRemove. The marked length class will thus beremoved.

Length classesThe length classes that youhave already programmed areseen here. Click a box to alteror type a new value.

The procedure is the same for both length anddiameter settings and therefore only the settings forlength are shown below.

2.23 2 Description 23. Length and diameter classes

Maximum length valueThe maximum permitted length to allowclassification in the price matrix. Observe thatthere should always be a tolerance between thehighest length class in the matrix and themaximum value. Suitable values for blocks andlow-grade timber is 10-20 cm and for timber 20-30cm.

Observe that this is the same setting box as inthe price matrix box Max. values length. A valuethat has been entered in the price matrix will bevisible here. If you alter the value here it will alsobe seen in the price matrix.

Overmeasurement lengthOvermeasurement length is a value that isadded to the nominal lengths in the respectivematrix. The value is used as a length tolerancefor cutting.

You can set the overmeasurement length valuein two ways:

1. Individual values fordifferent length classes

Type the values for therespective length class.

2. Same value for all length classes

Type a value here and press Do.

Observe that for length setting this isthe same setting box as in the pricematrix box Overv. length. A valuethat has been entered in the pricematrix will be visible here. If you alterthe value here it will also be seen inthe price matrix.

C:\Program\ESE Technique\OB32\.......122 142 162 182 202 222 242 262 282 302 322

310 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600340 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600370 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600400 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600430 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600460 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600490 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600520 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600550 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600

Three ways of selecting the menus Diameter classes or Length classes.

1. Double click one of the length or diametervalues in the price matrix.

Diameter classes

Length classes

Color

Matrix summary

Lineprice

Next page

Matrix

Diameter classes

Length classes

Color

Matrix summary

Lineprice

Copy

Cut

Paste

Increase/Decrease

2. Choose in the Matrix menu. 3. Click with the right mouse button. Clickthe left mouse button to choose.

Length values

Diameter values

HKS Diameter classesThis function enters fixed diameter classes andclass name. This can only be done if thecurrent matrix has an HKS price type (pricetype 6 or 7).

No of classes:

Max value:From Until Step

Do Do

Interval

Insert Remove Ok Cancel Help

Value for overlength

Class 310 340 370 430 400 460 490 520 550Overmeasur 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Do



3.1 Opening buckinginstructionsYou can open bucking instructions in severaldifferent ways depending on what you wish todo:

33 Proceed as follows

3 Proceed as follows

2

3


Open Open mould Save Identity Bucking

New

Open

Open mould

Close

Save

Save as ...

Choose Machinetype

Control machinetype


Print

Settings




Exit


Use the Open command to open the file. 1. Open entirely new bucking instructionsusing the command New. You now have tofill in all of the values and matrices fromthe beginning.

2. Open a templatewith the command Open template. Hereyou can choose from a number of standardtemplates in which you modify the valuesand matrices to suit the new instructions.

3. Open optional bucking instructionswith the command Open. Make necessaryalterations and save as new buckinginstructions using the command Save as.

Existing instructions New bucking instructions

Opening existing bucking instructions

1 Start program OptimzationBuilder.

2 Select Open from the list on the left or …

3 … Open in the File menu. In the normalWindows manner choose existing buckinginstructions. (Bucking instructions havefilenames with the suffix .apt).


Opening new bucking instructions


2 Select New in the File menu.

3 Click the appropriate line to selectMachine type.

4 Click OK or double click the appropriateline.

5 Fill in the identity data that applies for thecurrent bucking instructions.

6 Select language. Certain bucking computers(however, not OptimzationBuilder ) needto know this to ensure satisfactory opera-tion.

7 There are three different fields for free text.These are selected using the three buttonsabove the text field.

Open a template


8 Select Open mould in the list on the leftor …

9 …Open mould in the File menu. In thenormal Windows manner choose a templatefile. (Bucking instructions have filenameswith the suffix .apt).

10 Click the appropriate line to select Machinetype.

11 Click OK or double click the appropriateline.

12 Fill in the identity data that applies for thecurrent bucking instructions.

14 There are three different fields for free text.These are selected using the three buttonsabove the text field.

15 Click on Administration to be able to enter

further identification data.

3 Proceed as follows 1. Opening bucking instructions3.1

Choose machinetype

Cancel Help

3

5

Ok

2

9

10

11

412

13



New

Open

Open mould

Close

Save

Save as ...


OptimizationBuilderstandard

7

6


Identification

Date of cut

Update date

Save date

Manufacture No.

Machine No.

SS-ISO 3166

Version

Version

Machine type

Free text

(V200t1) (V200t1) (V200t1)

Organization

Region

District

Working team

Wood pile

Organization Site Vendor Contract Sub contractor


15

14


3.2 Saving buckinginstructions

1 Click Save to save the bucking file …

2 … or if you wish to Save or Close in theFile menu. If you choose Close you will beasked if you wish to save the file.

3 Before saving the file the computer checkswhether there are any conflicting aspectsbetween data of the bucking file and themachine type for which it is intended. Anyfaults are displayed as an error list.Check and remedy any errors shown beforesaving the file.

If the bucking instructions are to be saved asnew bucking instructions:

4 Select Save as in the File menu.

5 Type a new name and save the file in thenormal Windows manner.

2

1

4



New

Open

Open mould

Close

Save

Save as ...

Choose Machinetype

Control machinetype


Print

Settings




Exit


3 Proceed as follows 2. Saving bucking instructions 3.2



Add Remove

Name of species

1234

Code

3.3 Tree species

1 Select Tree species either from the list onthe left or in the menu View/Bucking.

2 If required, add a species by clicking Add.

3 If required, remove a species by clickingRemove.

4 Click the name box of each species andtype in the names.

5 Type the relevant code for each species.

1

3

2

4

3.3 3 Proceed as follows 3. Tree species

5




Tree speciesBarkfunctionDemandGradeProductgroupStemktypeBreast height(DBH)

MachinePulpMatrix

Matrix summaryPrice matrix Line priceColor matrixDemand matrixLimit matrixPoleRemaining settings

Choose machine typeControl machine type






MachinePulpMatrix

Matrix summaryPricematrix LinepriceColormatrixDemandsmatrixLimitmatrixPoleRemaining settings


3

2

4

3.4 Bark function

1 Select Bark function, either in the list onthe left or in the View/Bucking menu.

2 If required, click Add to add new lines tothe bark function list.

3 If required, click Remove to delete linesfrom the bark function list.

Enter and alter values manually

4 Click a box and type or alter the Y or Xvalues of the various species in the normalway.

Special function “SkogsForsk 2004”

5 The function assumes that Pine is the firstand Spruce is the second species. Thefunction controls the bark function for Pineand Spruce only. Other species are notaffected, they are controlled by the Y and Xvalues of the species.

6 Click in the box to activate the function.

7 Type the latitude as a two-digit degree valuewith one decimal, eg, 64.2.

3 Proceed as follows 4. Bark function 3.4

1

Add Remove


YX

Bark

Special function ”SkogsForsk 2004”Code 3 Pine + Code 4 Spurs

Latitude 64,26

7


Bucking to demand

Piece/per mil

Volume/per mil

Piece/100%

Max deviation

Value

Per cent


Method for bucking to demand

Ingen fördelning

Adaptiv

Näroptimal

Volum/100%





MachinePulpMatrix



Piece/mil for the entire matrixYou program distribution of the number ofcut logs that you want in thousandths overthe entire price matrix. The sum over theentire matrix should be 1000.

Volume/mil for the entire matrixYou program distribution of the cut volumethat you want in thousandths over the entireprice matrix. The sum over the entire matrixshould be 1000.

Piece/100% for the entire matrixYou program distribution of the number ofcut logs that you want in percentage withineach diameter class.

Volume/100% within each diameterclassYou program distribution of the buckedvolume that you want in percentage withineach diameter class.

3.5 Demand

Here you only make overall settings fordemand bucking that apply for all demandmatrices in the bucking instructions. Othersettings and also programming of thedemand matrix are made in the function“Demand matrix” (see section 3.19).

1 Select Demand, either from the list on theleft or from the menu View/Bucking.

2 Choose which sort the demand bucking is tohave (see FACTS box below).

3 Choose which sort the value for maximumdeviation between the highest profit-basedbucking and approved demand bucking is tohave.

4 Note that the following choice is anadditional function and is not available at allmanufacturers.Select the distribution method that you wishthe computer to apply (see explanation insection 2.8).

2

3

FACTS

3.5 3 Proceed as follows 5. Demand

1

4






MachinePulpMatrix



Tree species Bark function Demand Grade Product group Trunk type Breast height

No of grades

Add Remove

Grade system

Random grade

Explicit grade

S Species 1 S Species 2 S Species 3 S Species 4


S = Stargrade




2

6

3.6 Grade

1 Select Grade, either in the list on the left orin the View/Bucking menu.

2 If required, click Add to add new lines tothe grade list. The line is placed last in thetable.

3 If required, remove the lowest line from thegrade list by clicking Remove.

4 Type the names of the grade for thevarious species.When you subsequently program the pricematrices you can link each one to optionalgrades.

5 Choose whether it is to be Falling orSpecific grades (see FACTS box).

6 For each species, select a start grade, byclicking the box in front of the grade.The start grade is selected automatically asbucking of a trunk begins.

The conception of grades can be dealt with in two differentways:

Random grades higher grade may be included in a lower when the buckingcomputer estimates the price of an individual log.

Explicit gradesExclusively the grades stated in the price matrix are allowedto be included when the bucking computer estimates the priceof an individual log.

FACTS

5

3

3 Proceed as follows 6. Grade 3.6

1

4






MachinePulpMatrix



4

2

5

3

3.7 Product groups

1 Select Product group, either in the list onthe left or in the View/Bucking menu.

2 If required, click Add to add new lines tothe product group list.

3 If required, remove lines from the productgroup list by clicking an optional name onthe line to be removed …

4 … then click Remove.

5 Type the Product groups for the variousspecies.When you subsequently program the pricematrices you can link each one to anoptional product group.

1


Add Remove

Prodgr1 Prodgr1 Prodgr1 Prodgr1Prodgr2 Prodgr2 Prodgr2 Prodgr2Prodgr3 Prodgr3 Prodgr3 Prodgr3Prodgr4 Prodgr4 Prodgr4 Prodgr4Prodgr5 Prodgr5 Prodgr5 Prodgr5

12345


3.7 3 Proceed as follows 7. Product groups






MachinePulpMatrix



3.8 Stem type

1 Select Stem type either from the list on theleft or in the menu View/Bucking.

2 If required, click Add to add new lines tothe trunk type list.

3 If required, click Remove to delete linesfrom the trunk type list.

4 Ensure that Text is marked.

5 Type the names of the various trunk types.When you subsequently program the pricematrices you can link each one to optionaltrunk types.

6 Click on Code to go to the code mode.When adding new sorts of trunks a two-digit code is entered according to thestandard: First digit = species, second digit= line number. The codes can also bealtered manually.

3

2

5

3.83 Proceed as follows 8. Stem type

1

Tree species Barkfunction Demand Grade Productgroup Trunktype Breast height(DBH)

Add Remove

Species 1 Species 2 Species 3 Species 4Trunk type 1 Trunk type 1 Trunk type 1 Trunk type 1Trunk type 2 Trunk type 2 Trunk type 2 Trunk type 2Trunk type 3 Trunk type 3 Trunk type 3 Trunk type 3Trunk type 4 Trunk type 4 Trunk type 4 Trunk type 4Trunk type 5 Trunk type 5 Trunk type 5 Trunk type 5

12345

Text Code

4 6






MachinePulpMatrix



3.9 Breast height (DBH)

1 Select Breast height either from the list onthe left or in the menu View/Bucking.

2 Type the values for Make interval andclick Do. (See FACTS box).

3 Type a value for Measurepoint abovestump. (See FACTS box).

4 If it is not desirable to have the sameinterval for diameter limits in all species itis possible to alter it in the table Lowerlimit for diameter. (See FACTS box).

2

1

3.9 3 Proceed as follows 9. Breast height (DBH)

Create intervalsHere you create a new set of diameter limits for all species. The smallest diameterlimit is given in the field From and the highest diameter limit is given in field To. Thedistance between the limits in mm is given in field Step. The new limits are created inthe table on pressing Execute and any earlier settings will be deleted.

Measuring point over stumpYou note here a value at which the breast height diameter is to be measured on thetrunk.

Lower diameter limitsThe table shows diameter limits per species. If it is not desirable to have the sameinterval and number of intervals in all species it can be altered direct in the table.However, it is not permitted to enter falling values, ie, a higher line number is notallowed to have a lower diameter value than a lower line number.

Should the number of intervals for a species not fill out the entire table then theremaining boxes are to be left empty (the value 0 is not allowed).

FACTS

3

4

Make interval (mm)From Until Step

Do

Measurepoint above stump (cm)

Lower limit for diameter (mm)

Species1 Species 2 Species 3 Species 41 40 40 40 402 60 60 60 603 80 80 80 804 100 100 100 1005 120 120 200 2006 140 140 300 3007 160 160 400 4008 180 180 500 5009 200 20010 220 22011 240 24012 260 260

Tree species Bark function Demand Grade Product group Trunk type Breastheight(DBH)


3. Proceed as follows 10. Sound knot

3.10 Sound knot

1 Select Sound knot either in the list on theleft or in the View/Bucking menu.

2 Choose one of the two formulas.

3 Type in the numeral values for the differentformula items a, b, c and d. These valuesmay vary depending on the species,productiveness and growing zone, etc, andthey are provided by the relevant contractor.

4 Type the grade that is to be used when thelimit for sound knots is passed.

2

1

3.9

3

4





Sound knotMachinePulpMatrix




Type of function

0. No function

1. y=(a+bx)xd

Sound knot

2. y=(a+bx+cx2)xd

Species 1 Species 2 Species 3 Species 4 Constant a 0 0 0 0 Faktor b 0 0 0 0 Faktor c 0 0 0 0 Tolerance d 0 0 0 0Grade 0 0 0 0






MachinePulpMatrix



3.11 Machine settings

1 Select Machine in the list on the left orMachine in the menu View.

2 Type the values for Calculation length,Measured length before prognosis, Maxdeviation up and Max deviation down.(See FACTS box).

3 Certain bucking computers need to knowthe number of prognosis parameters toensure satisfactory operation (however,not OptimzationBuilder from DasaControl Systems AB). Because thesettings may vary depending on thebucking computer, please refer toinstructions for the relevant buckingcomputer.

4 The boxes Add and Remove are used forthe function Number of prognosis para-meters.

Calculation lengthThe prognosis length, or actual measured length, in cm, withinwhich the bucking computer selects log-lengths for bucking.Consideration is also taken to the value of a possible remainingpiece.

.

Measured length before prognosisThe stretch in cm that is to be fed forward after felling a tree,before the bucking computer makes its first prognosis. Theprognosis is based on the measured diameter values of thisinitial stretch.

Maximum deviation up – downMaximum deviation up or down respectively is the number ofmillimetres that the measured diameters values may deviate fromthe prognosis without the prognosis being modified. A new prognosisis made in the event of greater deviation.

FACTS

2

3 Proceed as follows 11. Machine settings3.11

1

C:\Program\ESE Technique\OB32\mallar\......

Machine settings

Calculation length

Measured length before prognosis

Max deviation up

Max deviation downcm

mm

mm

cm

Add Remove

No of prognose parameters


12

3

4


Matrixname Code Description Buyer Product group Stem type Grade (explicit) Pricetype Volume typePm1Pm2Pm3Pm4Pm5



Species 1 Copied =






MachinePulpMatrix



3.12 Create new and deletematrices

1 Select Matrix summary from the list onthe left or in the menu View/Matrix.

Create a new matrix

2 Click in one of the boxes for the specieswhere you wish the new matrix to be.

3 Click New.

4 Type the name of the new matrix.

5 If required, press Move up or Move downto change the place of the matrix in relationto other matrices.

6 Double click the new matrix if you wish toget to it.

Delete a matrix

7 Mark one or several matrices that youwish to delete. You can mark severalmatrices within the same species byclicking, keeping the button pressed anddragging the mouse and then releasing thebutton.

8 Click Delete. Note that you cannot undo adeletion.

3

4

58

3.123 Proceed as follows 12. Create new and delete matrices

6

7

1

2






MachinePulpMatrix



Matrixname Code Description Buyer Product group Stem type Grade (explicit) Pricetype Volume typePm1Pm2Pm3Pm4Pm5



Species 1 Copied =


3.13 New matrix with earlierone as basis

1 Select Matrix summary from the list onthe left or in the menu View/Matrix.

Copy matrices in the matrix summary

2 Mark one or several matrices that youwish to copy. You can mark several matriceswithin the same species by clicking,keeping the button pressed and dragging themouse and then releasing the button.

33 Click Copy.

4 The copied matrix is shown in the boxbottom left.

5 Click a suitable matrix. The new matrix/matrices will immediately appear above theone that you marked.

6 Click Paste.

7 Type the name of the new matrix.

8 If necessary, you can alter the position of amatrix in relation to other matrices of thesame species by first clicking on the matrixand then on Move up or Move down.

9 To open a matrix: Double click on thematrix, or right-click on the matrix, andselect Go to matrix.

Copy individual matrices from the folderApm

10 Click a suitable matrix. The new matrix/matrices will immediately appear above theone that you marked.

11 Click Apm.

12 Select a matrix file and click Open.

13 If required, alter names of the files andadjust positions according to items 7 - 8above.

3 Proceed as follows 13. New matrix with earlier one as basis3.13

25

86

10

11

4

1

3


No of classes:


Do Do

Interval


Value for overlength

Class 310 340 370 430 400 460 490 520 550Overmeasur 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Do






MachinePulpMatrix



L/D 00 0

Diameter

cm mm

Lower Upper

cm cm

Root diameter

mm cm

Min top diameter

mm



3.14 Diameter classes

1 You have three options to get to thefunction: Select Diameter classes in menuMatrix or …

2 … double click the diameter line in theprice matrix or …

3 … right click the mouse and select Diame-ter classes from the menu.

4 If required, alter the Max value. Observethat it is the same value as …

5 … Max values, Diameter in the pricematrix. If you alter the value in one placethe value will also change in the other.

Add, alter or remove diameter classes

6 Fill in lowest (From) and greatest (Until)diameter values and how big the distance isto be between the values (Step).

7 Click Do.

8 If you wish to alter a value: Mark the valueand type the new one.

9 If you wish to remove a diameter class:Mark the value and click Remove.

10 If you wish to Add a diameter class: Markan existing diameter class and click Insert.The new diameter class will be placedbefore the marked one. Type the new value.

Values for over length

11 Fill in the over length value.

12 Click Do.



HKS Diameterklasser

15 Click on Do if you select HKS classes. Thefunction can only be done if the currentmatrix has an HKS price type (price type 6or 7).

10

3.143 Proceed as follows 14. Diameter classes

4 76 1211

9 8 13 14

1

2

5

Cutting window

15






MachinePulpMatrix



3 Proceed as follows 15. Length classes3.15

3.15 Length classes

1 You have three options to get to thefunction: Select Length classes in menuMatrix or …

2 … double click the length line in the pricematrix or …

3 … right click the mouse and select Lengthclasses from the menu.

4 If required, alter the Max value. Observethat it is the same value as …

5 … Maximum values, Length in the pricematrix. If you alter the value in one placethe value will also change in the other.

Add, alter or remove length classes

6 Fill in lowest (From) and greatest (Until)length values and how big the distance is tobe between the values (Step).

7 Click Do.


9 If you wish to remove a length class: Markthe value and click Remove.

10 If you wish to Add a length class: Mark anexisting length class and click Insert. Thenew length class will be placed before themarked one. Type the new value.

1

L/D 00 0

Diameter

cm mm

Upper Lower

cm cm

Root diameter

mm cm

Min top diameter

mm



2

5

No of classes:


Do Do

Interval


Value for over length

Class 310 340 370 400 430 460 490 520 550Over length 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

10 9 8

4 76

Cutting window


Values for over length

1 Fill in the over length value.

2 Click Do. Observe that it is the same valueas …

3 … Over length in the price matrix. If youalter the value in one place the value willalso change in the other.



L/D 00 0

Diameter

cm mm

Lower Upper

cm cm

Root diam.

mm cm

Min top diam.

mm



3

No of classes:


Do Do

Interval


Value for over length

Class 310 340 370 400 430 460 490 520 550Over length 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

4

21

Cutting window

3 Proceed as follows 15. Length classes 3.15

5


3.16 Enter prices

Enter prices direct in the matrix

1 Click a box in the matrix.

2 Enter a price. Press Enter. You will thuscome to the next box in the diameter classand can continue to enter data. You alsohave the option of using the arrow keys ofthe computer to choose an adjacent box.

Alter several prices at the same time

3 You can alter several adjacent prices at thesame time. You can increase or reduce allmarked prices by the same figure or by thesame percentage value.

4 You can mark adjacent prices in manyways:

5 1. Click the uppermost price on the far left.Keep the button pressed and ...

6 ... drag the mouse diagonally to thelowermost price at the far right. Releasethe button.

7 2. Click the uppermost price on the farleft...

8 ... keep the Shift button pressed andclick the lowermost price at the far right.

9 3. Mark a whole line/column by clickingthe head of the line/column. Mark severallines/columns by clicking the head,holding the button in and dragging thehead with the mouse.

10 4. Mark the entire matrix by clicking in theL/D box.

11 After marking the values open the functionIncrease/decrease as follows:

12 Select Increase/decrease in menu Edit or...

13 ... right click and select Increase/Decrease.

9

3.16 3 Proceed as follows 16. Enter prices

L/D 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320310 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600340 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600370 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600400 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600430 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600460 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600490 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600520 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600550 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600

Diameter

cm mm

Lower Upper

cm cm

Root diameter

mm cm

Min top diameter

mm



L/D 120 140 160 180 200310 100 100 200 200 300340 100 100 200 200 300370 100 100 200 200 300400 100 100 200 200 300430 100 100 200 200 300460 100 100 200 200 300490 100 100 200 200 300520 100 100 200 200 300550 100 100 200 200 300

L/D 120 140 160 180 200310 100 100 200 200 300340 100 100 200 200 300370 100 100 200 200 300400 100 100 200 200 300430 100 100 200 200 300460 100 100 200 200 300490 100 100 200 200 300520 100 100 200 200 300550 100 100 200 200 300

68

57

Cutting window

1

10






MachinePulpMatrix



1 Enter the value to be inserted in the matrixor to increase/reduce existing values in thematrix.

2 Select an option:

• Insert value – values in the matrix arereplaced by the typed value.

• Add/subtract – current values of thematrix are increased/reduced by the typedvalue.

• Percentage – current values of the matrixare increased/reduced in percentage bythe typed value.

3 Choose whether to increase or reducecurrent values.


Copy and move prices

5 To utilise already entered prices for othersimilar price matrices you can copy wholeor parts of the price matrix. Mark the partyou wish to copy in the way described inthe previous section.

6 Select Copy in the Edit menu or right clickand select Copy.

7 Change to the price matrix where the pricesare to be pasted and click on the box in thematrix where the uppermost left value is tobe pasted.

8 Select Paste in the Edit menu or right clickand select Paste.

1

2

6

3.163 Proceed as follows 16. Enter prices direct in the price matrix

Cancel

Increase/decrease

Type

OkIncreaseDecrease

Insert valueAdd/SubtractPercentage

4

3


Basic price

Add to pricematrix


Value%

%%

Value%%%

Diameter class mm

Length class cm

Cancel HelpOk

120 140 160 180 200 210 220 240 260 280 3000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

From 310 340 370 400 430 460 490 520 550





MachinePulpMatrix



3.17 Line price-list

1 Select Line price from the list on the left orLine price in the menu Matrix or rightclick the mouse and select Line price.

2 Choose whether the item being entered is tobe added to the current price matrix orwhether the price matrix is to be fullyrecalculated.

3 Type in the basic price of the line price-list.

4 Select sort for correction values of thediameter classes (See FACTS box).

5 Type in the correction values for thevarious diameter classes.

4

3

5

3 Proceed as follows 17. Line price-list3.17

1

Length class cm

From 310 340 370 400 430 460 490 520 550

120 10 10 10 0 0 20 30 20 20

180 0 0 0 10 10 10 20 20 0

260 0 0 0 0 0 10 10 10 10

FACTS

Examples of length correction

Different corrections depending on diameter class

Length correction for the diameterclasses:

120, 140 and 160 mm

180, 200, 220 and 240 mm

260, 280, 300 and 320 mm

Select sortIf you select Value:

The amount is added for each diameter orlength class.Example: Basic price = 300. Correction =100 gives 400 in the price matrix.

If you select %:The amount in the matrix will be:Percentage value x Basic price/100.Example: Basic price = 300. Correction =110%300 x 110/100 = 330

If you select %% (mil):The amount in the matrix will be:Mil value x Basic price/1000.Example: Basic price = 300. Correction =1200%300 x 1200/1000 = 360

FACTS

Length class cm

From 310 340 370 400 430 460 490 520 550120 0 0 0 10 10 20 30 20 20

Same corrections for all diameter classes

Same length correction for alldiameter classes

2


Basic price

Add to pricematrix


Value%

%%

Value%%%

Diameter class mm

Length class cm

Cancel HelpOk

120 140 160 180 200 210 220 240 260 280 3000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

From 310 340 370 400 430 460 490 520 550

120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320310 300 300 400 400 400 500 500 500 600 600 600340 300 300 400 400 400 500 500 500 600 600 600370 300 300 400 400 400 500 500 500 600 600 600400 300 300 400 400 400 500 500 500 600 600 600430 300 300 400 400 400 500 500 500 600 600 600460 300 300 400 400 400 500 500 500 600 600 600490 300 300 400 400 400 500 500 500 600 600 600520 300 300 400 400 400 500 500 500 600 600 600550 300 300 400 400 400 500 500 500 600 600 600

1 Select sort for the length-class correctionvalues (See FACTS box).

2 Type the lowest diameter class (From) inthe price matrix.

3 Type the correction values for the variouslength classes.

Choose 1 or 2(See FACTS box on this and the previous page)1. Same correction values for all diameter

classes: Continue from item 7.2. Different correction values for different

diameter classes: Continue from item 4.

4 Type the lowest diameter class (From) forthe next group of correction values.

5 Type the correction values for the group.

6 If there are further groups of correctionvalues, repeat item 4 and 5 for such values.

7 When ready, click OK. The values that youhave entered will thus be recalculated andshown in the price matrix.

4

1

7

5

3.173 Proceed as follows 17. Line price-list

FACTS

Radpris

120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320310 270 270 360 400 400 500 500 400 480 480 480340 270 270 360 400 400 500 500 400 480 480 480370 270 270 360 400 400 500 500 400 480 480 480400 300 300 400 440 440 550 550 450 540 540 540430 300 300 400 440 440 550 550 500 600 600 600460 330 330 440 480 480 600 600 550 660 600 600490 330 330 440 480 480 600 600 550 660 660 660520 360 360 480 400 400 500 500 550 660 660 660550 360 360 480 400 400 500 500 550 660 660 660

Length class cm

From 310 340 370 400 430 460 490 520 550120 90 90 90 100 100 110 110 120 120180 100 100 100 110 110 120 120 100 100260 80 80 80 90 100 110 110 110 110

Principles for programming the line price-listA programming example:

Type the basic price 300, select sort Value and type thecorrection values for the Diameter classes.

Only correction of the diameter values should have resultedin the price matrix below, where the correction values areadded to the basic price for the various diameter classes.(These price matrix values are not shown but are includedin this example to illustrate the principles of programming).

Select sort for length correction – in the following example we choose%.

Type the lowest diameter class (From) from which the lengthcorrection is to apply. Type the correction values for lengthcorrection. If the length correction is the same for all diameterclasses there will be one line in the table.

If, for example, there are three different length corrections fordifferent diameter classes there will be three lines as in the examplebelow.

For percentage correction the result will be: The value after diametercorrection multiplied by the percentage value in the lengthcorrection.

3

2

Basic price

Add to pricematrix


Value%

%%

Diameter class mm

120 140 160 180 200 210 220 240 260 280 3000 0 100 100 100 200 200 200 300 300 300

Value%%%

300


3.18 Matrix variables1 Select or enter the matrix variables (see

FACTS boxes on this and next page).

2 For the following variables you can enternumerical values:CodeDescriptionBuyerMax. valuesMin top diameterOver lengthCutting zone, upper and lowerDiameter type, distance from topTolerance grade, top and buttLength for free cut

For other variables you may only chooseamong certain options.

3 Proceed as follows 18. Matrix variables3.18


Diameter type

Principle for registration

Cut length in cm

Distance from top

cm

Tolerance grade

Top Root

cm

FACTS

GradeMark a cross in the grades to which the matrix applies.

• If you use falling grades: A higher grade may be included ina lower when the bucking computer estimates the price of anindividual log.

• If you use specific grades: Exclusively the grade or gradesstated in the price matrix are allowed to be included inestimating the price of an individual log.

Tree speciesSelect species.

Matrix nameSelect matrix in the species selected.

CodeHere you can type additional identity for the matrix.

DescriptionA possibility to link explanatory text to the price matrix.

BuyerA possibility to define the buyer of logs bucked in this pricematrix.

Trunk typeIndicate here if the matrix is to be linked to a trunk type.

Product groupIndicate here if the matrix is to be linked to a product group.

Product groups can for example be TIMBER, PULPWOOD,POLES or MISCELLANEOUS.

Price typeExamples of price types available:

m3to (top measure)

m3s (solid measure)

m3smm (solid mid measure)

BarkIndicate whether volumetric measurement is to be on or underbark.

Free cutAIndicates to the bucking computer that free cutting may bemade between minimum length and maximum length.

Continued on next page

Diameter

cm mm

Lower Upper

cm cm

Root diam.

mm cm

Min top diam.

mm



Cutting window

Tree species Code

1 2 3 4 5 6

Buyer

BarkOnUnder

Free cut

Product group Bucking group

Grade (explicit)

Matrix name Description Stem type Priority

Price type Volume type

Length for free cut

cm


Prerequisites for buckingChoose under which conditions bucking is to be done:

• Always crosscutStandard setting, calculation for bucking is always done if thematrix is permitted in the selected grade.

• Never crosscutUsed if you wish to temporarily “switch off” a matrix, or havea matrix that is used to register manually cut timber.

• Crosscut on butt log only, do not crosscut on butt logCalculation for bucking made for butt log only or for all logsexcept butt log if the matrix is permitted in the selectedgrade.

PriorityThis function can be set at low, normal or high and is used by somemanufacturers to give or not to give priority to the price matrix when thecomputer chooses between different price matrices.

Volume typeThe length that volumetric calculation is based on. The followingoptions are available:

Cut length in cm The real cut length. Normally used forpulpwood.

Aimed length Length-class length. Normally for timber.

Cut length in dm The length is counted from the nearestlower even dm.

Maximum values, LengthThe maximum permitted length for classification in the pricematrix. Observe that there should always be a tolerancebetween the highest length class in the matrix and the maxi-mum value. Suitable values are 10-20 cm for blocks and low-grade timber and 20-30 cm for timber.

Maximum values, DiameterThe maximum permitted top diameter (10 cm from the cuttingpoint) for a log to be classified in the price matrix. As a rulethere is no upper limit in timber grades so the value can be setas 999. Observe that there should always be a tolerancebetween the highest diameter class in the matrix and themaximum value. A suitable value for blocks and low-gradetimber is 1-2 cm.

Maximum value butt diameterThe maximum permitted butt diameter for classification of thelog in the price matrix. Can be used to prevent coarse butt logswith severe taper from being classified in the matrix.

Minimum value top diameterThe smallest permitted top diameter (10 cm from the cuttingpoint) for classification of a log in the price matrix. Can be usedto “switch off” the lowest diameter classes or to prevent low-grade timber that has severe taper from being classified in thematrix when a price type with mid-point measured value is used.

Over lengthOver length is a value that is added to the nominal lengths in therespective matrix. This value is used as length tolerance whencutting.

Cutting zoneThe length zone within which cutting is permitted.

LowerLower limit for the cutting zone.The lower limit will be:Length-class length + possible over length + value in the boxLower (the value can be negative).

Upper

Upper limit for the cutting zone.The upper limit will be:Length-class length + possible over length + value in the boxUpper (the value cannot be negative).An example:Length class: 430 cmOver length: 3 cmLower: -1 cmUpper: : 2 cmLower limit for the cutting zone 430 + 3 -1 = 432 cm

Upper limit for the cutting zone 430 + 3 + 2 = 435 cm

Diameter type registrationSetting for where on the log that diameter registration is to bemade.

The setting is made in two steps: first the Principle ofregistration is determined, ie, in what manner the length of thelog is to be registered (see “Volume type”). Then you decideDistance from top, ie, how far from registered length that thediameter is to be read.

Tolerance gradeHere you can allow a log to have a different grade at a certaindistance from the top or butt of the log than that selectedinitially.

Length for free cutDesired length for free cut. The setting is only valid if free cutis on for all logs.

FACTS

3 Proceed as follows 18. Matrix variables 3.18






MachinePulpMatrix



1

6

2

3.19 Color matrix

1 Select Color matrix from the list on theleft or in the menu View/Matrix.

2 You can also select Color matrix byclicking the flap under the matrix.

3 The marking colors for the color matrix canbe set in Menu File/Settings, see section2.1.

4 If the entire color matrix is to be colormarked: Click on the color box/boxes thatare to be used.Note that several colors can be usedsimultaneously.

5 If the part of the assortment that is distri-bution crosscut (see section 3.19 Distribu-tion matrix) is to be color marked: Clickon the color box/boxes that are to be used.Note that several colors can be usedsimultaneously.

Enter individual colors

6 Double-click on the color box/boxes foreach diameter/length class that is to bemarked.Note that several colors can be usedsimultaneously in the same diameter/lengthclass.

3.19 3 Proceed as follows 19. Color matrix

5

4

L/D 122 142 162 182 202 222 242 262 282 302 322310340370400430460490520550




Color


Mark several color boxes at the same time

1 You can mark several adjacent color boxeswith the same colors in two ways:

2 1. Click the uppermost color box on the farleft. Keep the button pressed and ...

3 ... drag the mouse diagonally to thelowermost color box at the far right.Release the button.

4 2. Click the uppermost color box on the farleft.

5 Keep the Shift button pressed and clickthe lowermost color box at the far right.


7 4. Mark the entire matrix by clicking inthe L/D box.

8 Click on Color choice.

9 Click in one or more of the boxes (to tickthem) for the colors boxes you wish to use.

10 Click on Ok.

L/D 122 142 162 182 202 222310340370400430460490520550

L/D 122 142 162 182 202 222310340370400430460490520550

24

53

1

2

3

Ok

Cancel

9 10

3.193 Proceed as follows 19. Color matrix

6

7

8

L/D 122 142 162 182 202 222 242 262 282 302 322310340370400430460490520550




Color






MachinePulpMatrix



1

3.20 Demand matrix

1 Select Demand matrix from the list on theleft or in the menu View/Matrix.

2 You can also select Demand matrix byclicking the flap.

Check sorts, type the loss value

3 Ensure that you have the right sorts inBucking to demand and Max alloweddeviation (see FACTS box).

4 You can change the above sorts in programmodule Demands (see section 3.5).

5 Type in the acceptable value loss fordemand bucking compared to the highestvalue for profit-based bucking.

Enter individual values

6 Click an optional matrix box and type thedesired demands for the selected diameter/length class (see FACTS box). Press Enter.You will thus come to the next box in thematrix and can continue to enter data. Youalso have the option of using the arrowkeys of the computer to choose an adjacentbox.

Piece/mil for the entire matrixYou program demand of the number of cut logs that youwant in thousandths over the entire price matrix. The sumover the entire matrix should be 1000.

Volume/mil for the entire matrixYou program demand of cut volume that you want inthousandths over the entire price matrix. The sum over theentire matrix should be 1000.

Piece/100% for each diameter classYou program demand of the number of cut logs that youwant in percentage within each diameter class.

The sum for each diameter class should be 100.

FACTS

3 Proceed as follows 20. Demand matrix3.20

C:\Program\ESE Technique\OB32\....... L/D 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 Summa

310 0 0 20 0 0 0 0 20 0 0 0 40340 0 0 0 0 30 0 0 0 0 0 0 30370 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 10400 0 0 20 0 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 60430 0 0 30 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 40460 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 30 0 0 0 40490 0 0 10 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 20520 0 0 10 0 10 0 0 30 0 0 0 50550 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 10

Summa 0 0 100 0 100 0 0 100 0 0 0 300



Percent


5

3

6

32


Alter several prices at the same time

1 You can alter several adjacent values at thesame time. You can increase or reduce allmarked values by the same figure or by thesame percentage value.

2 You can mark adjacent values in two ways:

3 1. Click the uppermost value on the far left.Keep the button pressed and ...

4 ... drag the mouse diagonally to thelowermost value at the far right. Releasethe button.

5 2. Click the uppermost value on the far left.

6 Keep the Shift button pressed and clickthe lowermost value at the far right.


8 4. Mark the entire matrix by clicking inthe L/D box.

9 After marking the values open the functionIncrease/decrease as follows:

10 Select Increase/decrease in menu Edit or...

11 ... right click and select Increase/Decrease.

L/D 120 140 160 180 200310 100 100 200 200 300340 100 100 200 200 300370 100 100 200 200 300400 100 100 200 200 300430 100 100 200 200 300460 100 100 200 200 300490 100 100 200 200 300520 100 100 200 200 300550 100 100 200 200 300

L/D 120 140 160 180 200310 100 100 200 200 300340 100 100 200 200 300370 100 100 200 200 300400 100 100 200 200 300430 100 100 200 200 300460 100 100 200 200 300490 100 100 200 200 300520 100 100 200 200 300550 100 100 200 200 300

46

35

3.203 Proceed as follows 20. Demand matrix

C:\Program\ESE Technique\OB32\....... L/D 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 Summa

310 0 0 20 0 0 0 0 20 0 0 0 40340 0 0 0 0 30 0 0 0 0 0 0 30370 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 10400 0 0 20 0 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 60430 0 0 30 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 40460 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 30 0 0 0 40490 0 0 10 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 20520 0 0 10 0 10 0 0 30 0 0 0 50550 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 10

Summa 0 0 100 0 100 0 0 100 0 0 0 300



Percent


7

8


1 Type the value that you wish to insert/change in the table.

2 Select an option:

• Insert value – values in the matrix arereplaced by the typed value.

• Add/subtract – current values of thematrix are increased/reduced by the typedvalue.

• Percentage - current values of the matrixare increased/reduced in percentage bythe typed value.

3 Choose whether current values of thematrix are to be increased or reduced by thetyped value.

4 Click on OK.

Alter, copy and paste several values at thesame time

5 Values are copied and pasted in the sameway as price matrices, see description insection 3.15.

Recalculate values in the distribution matrix

6 The values that you type in the distributionmatrix should be 100 for each diameterclass or 1000 for the whole matrixdepending on which unit you have chosenfor distribution bucking (see also section2.6 and 2.16).You can make an automatic recalculation ofthe matrix values so that the sum will be100 for each diameter class or 1000 for theentire matrix. Proceed as follows.

7 Right click and point at Demand.

8 You can now choose between Recalculateto 100% diameter class or Recalculate to1000 per mil / matrix.

Diameter classes

Length classes

Color

Matrix summary

Lineprice

Copy

Cut

Paste

Increase / Decrease

Demand Recalculate to 100 % diameter class

Recalculate to 1000 perImil / matrix7

8

3 Proceed as follows 20. Demand matrix3.20

Cancel

Increase/decrease

Type

OkIncreaseDecrease

Insert valueAdd/SubtractPercentage2

1 4

3






MachinePulpMatrix



3.21 Limit matrix

1 Select Limit matrix from the list on the leftor in the menu Show, Matrix.

2 You can also select Limit matrix byclicking the flap under the matrix.

3 Select the type of limitation per price matrixthat is to apply for the limit matrix.

4 Select action when production target isfulfilled.


5 Click optional matrix box and type themaximum number of logs for the selecteddiameter/length class (see FACTS box).Press Enter. You will thus come to the nextbox in the matrix and can continue to enterdata. You also have the option of using thearrow keys of the computer to choose anadjacent box.


6 Values can be altered by a certain figure orpercentage, copied and pasted in the sameway as price matrices, see description insection 3.15.

3.213 Proceed as follows 21. Limit matrix

1


C:\Program\ESE Technique\OB32\....... L/D 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320

310 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0340 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0370 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0400 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0430 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0460 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0490 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0520 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0550 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


No limitation


Noaction

3 2 4

5

When the number of logs in a class isreachedWhen the number is reached in a diameter/length classthe bucking continues according to one of the followingprinciples:

• The desired distribution is aborted and normal profit-based bucking takes over for the diameter/lengthclass.

• The price for the diameter/length class is set at theprice for pulpwood.

FACTS






MachinePulpMatrix



3.22 Pole matrix

1 Select Pole in the list to the left or Pole inmenu Show, Matrix.

2 You can also click on the tab to select Pole.

3 Select how high above the stump that themeasuring point is to be.


4 Click in optional matrix box and type invalues for the selected length class. PressEnter.You now come to the next box in the matrixand can continue to enter.You can also use the computer arrow keysto choose an adjacent box.


5 Values can be altered by a certain figure orpercentage, copied and pasted in the sameway as price matrices, see description insection 3.15.

2

4

3

3 Proceed as follows 22. Pole matrix3.22

1


Length Lower Upper310 0 0340 0 0370 0 0400 0 0430 0 0460 0 0490 0 0520 0 0550 0 0

Measurepoint above stump

cmLimit for rootdiameter (mm)


Standard modular spacingThe length classes usually have a modular spacing of 30 cm. Ifyou type 30 in the box, only the first and last length value ofeach price matrix will be shown:

If you type 20, for example, the length classes will be shownwith deviating modular spacing:

eseProd

Open Open mould Save Identity Bucking Machine Matrix overview Pricematrix Apt.summary


3.23 Bucking overview

1 Click on Bucking overview

Open the overview in Excel/save as Excelfile

2 Click Excel to open the overview as anExcel file.

3 Save the overview as an Excel file byclicking on Save as.

Copy /paste

4 Mark an optional number of boxes and useCopy and Paste to copy selected boxes toanother location.

Settings

5 Click on Settings.

6 Alter settings (see FACTS box below).Click on OK.

A1

A B C D E F G HI1

234567

6

1

3 2 4 5

Lengtclasses

340 - 550340 - 550340 - 550340 - 550

Lengthclasses

340, 370, 400,43340, 370, 400, 43340, 370, 400, 43340, 370, 400, 43

Show cm in dmSpacing in the length classes can be shown as dm valuesinstead of cm.

Show mm in cmSpacing in the length classes can be shown as cm valuesinstead of mm.

Translate variable headings• A standard set of variable headings that are adapted to suit

the table will be used if the box is not crossed.

• By crossing the box, the headings found in the buckinginstructions will be used. It may be necessary to adjust thedivision of words to ensure that headings fit the tableboxes.

Note. You must close the Bucking overview and then open itagain to enable changes in the settings menu to be shown inthe table.

FACTS

3.233 Proceed as follows 22. Bucking overview

Close Save as... Open Excel Print Printer setup Copy Paste Settings

Apt.overviewIdentfication

Site number

Organization

Marking for cuting

Region

Filename

Compartment number

District

Machine type

Lot number

Working team

Default module range for length classes (cm)

Show cm in dm

Show mm in cm

Translate variable headings

Ok

Directory for Save as...

Browse


Close Print Copy screen Copy value

Tree species

Matrix A Matrix B Taper in mm/m

Settings

Length in column

A>B A=B A>B

Price comparison between matrix A and B (A - B)

Species 1 A:Matrix 1 - B Matrix 2 20 mm/m

142 162 182 202 222 242 262 282 302 322 342310 -166 -109 -45 -25 -5 7 18 23 46 59 70370 -166 -108 -43 -21 0 13 25 35 55 68 80400 -166 -109 -42 -20 0 15 27 39 59 73 86430 -165 -106 -38 -14 9 23 36 49 70 85 99460 -164 -104 -34 -9 15 30 44 58 80 96 111490 -166 -106 -37 -11 13 29 44 57 80 96 112520 -168 -109 -41 -16 9 25 40 54 77 94 109550 -170 -113 -45 -20 5 21 37 51 74 91 108

3.24 Analysis of price list

1 Select Analysis of price list in the Toolsmenu.

2 elect the species where you wish tocompare different price matrices.The comparison can only be made betweentwo price matrices in the same species.

3 Select the first price matrix in thecomparison (matrix A). From matrix Aretrieve the length and diameter classes thatare shown in the table.

4 Select the second matrix (matrix B).

5 If you compare price matrices of differentprice types (eg, m3s and m3 top measure)the m3 top measure prices will be convertedto m3s prices. These m3s prices aredependent on actual taper of the logs.Set the taper in mm/m.

6 You can vary size of the table by movingthe control.

7 Choose colors in the table by clicking thecolor boxes.

8 Click on Copy screen to copy the table as acolor image. The image can subsequently beused in a Word document for example.

9 Click on Copy value to copy values of thetable. The values can be pasted into anExcel document for example.

3 Proceed as follows 24. Analysis of price list3.24

6

4

3

2

5 798

manual dasa4 au1 value bucking - excidor ner... · 4 c dasa control systems ab d4au1o 1.8 en...

Documents